Model T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer

Operation Manual
Model T100
UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Also supports operation of:
when used in conjunction with:
Model T100U Analyzer
T100U addendum, PN 06840
Model T100H Analyzer
T100H addendum, PN 07265
Model T108 Analyzer
T108 addendum, PN 07268
Model T108U Analyzer
T100U addendum, PN 06840, and
T108 addendum, PN 07268
© TELEDYNE API (TAPI)
9970 CARROLL CANYON ROAD
SAN DIEGO, CA 92131-1106
USA
Toll-free Phone: 800-324-5190
Phone: +1 858-657-9800
Fax: +1 858-657-9816
Email: api-sales@teledyne.com
Website: http://www.teledyne-api.com/
Copyright 2010-2016
Teledyne API
06807F DCN7335
05 August 2016
NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT
© 2010-2016 Teledyne API Inc. All rights reserved.
TRADEMARKS
All trademarks, registered trademarks, brand names or product names appearing in this
document are the property of their respective owners and are used herein for
identification purposes only.
06807F DCN7335
i
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
Important safety messages are provided throughout this manual for the purpose of
avoiding personal injury or instrument damage. Please read these messages carefully.
Each safety message is associated with a safety alert symbol and placed throughout this
manual and inside the instrument. The symbols with messages are defined as follows:
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard
HAZARD: Strong oxidizer
GENERAL WARNING/CAUTION: Read the accompanying
message for specific information.
CAUTION: Hot Surface Warning
Do Not Touch: Touching some parts of the instrument without
protection or proper tools could result in damage to the part(s)
and/or the instrument.
Technician Symbol: All operations marked with this symbol are
to be performed by qualified maintenance personnel only.
Electrical Ground: This symbol inside the instrument marks the
central safety grounding point for the instrument.
CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
The T100 Analyzer should only be used for the purpose and in the
manner described in this manual. If you use the T100 in a manner other
than that for which it was intended, unpredictable behavior could ensue
with possible hazardous consequences.
NEVER use any gas analyzer to sample combustible gas(es).
Note
ii
Technical Assistance regarding the use and maintenance of the T100 or
any other Teledyne API product can be obtained by contacting Teledyne
API’s Technical Support Department:
Phone: 800-324-5190
Email: sda_techsupport@teledyne.com
or by accessing various service options on our website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com/.
06807F DCN7335
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ
Des consignes de sécurité importantes sont fournies tout au long du présent manuel dans le but d’éviter des
blessures corporelles ou d’endommager les instruments. Veuillez lire attentivement ces consignes. Chaque
consigne de sécurité est représentée par un pictogramme d’alerte de sécurité; ces pictogrammes se retrouvent
dans ce manuel et à l’intérieur des instruments. Les symboles correspondent aux consignes suivantes :
AVERTISSEMENT : Risque de choc électrique
DANGER : Oxydant puissant
AVERTISSEMENT GÉNÉRAL / MISE EN GARDE :
complémentaire pour des renseignements spécifiques
Lire
la
consigne
MISE EN GARDE : Surface chaude
Ne pas toucher : Toucher à certaines parties de l’instrument sans protection ou
sans les outils appropriés pourrait entraîner des dommages aux pièces ou à
l’instrument.
Pictogramme « technicien » : Toutes les opérations portant ce symbole doivent
être effectuées uniquement par du personnel de maintenance qualifié.
Mise à la terre : Ce symbole à l’intérieur de l’instrument détermine le point central
de la mise à la terre sécuritaire de l’instrument.
MISE EN GARDE
Cet instrument doit être utilisé aux fins décrites et de la manière décrite
dans ce manuel. Si vous utilisez cet instrument d’une autre manière
que celle pour laquelle il a été prévu, l’instrument pourrait se comporter
de façon imprévisible et entraîner des conséquences dangereuses.
NE JAMAIS utiliser un analyseur de gaz pour échantillonner des gaz
combustibles!
06807F DCN7335
iii
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
WARRANTY
WARRANTY POLICY (02024J)
Teledyne API (TAPI), a business unit of Teledyne Instruments, Inc., provides that:
Prior to shipment, TAPI equipment is thoroughly inspected and tested. Should equipment
failure occur, TAPI assures its customers that prompt service and support will be available.
(For the instrument-specific warranty period, please refer to the “Limited Warranty” section
in the Terms and Conditions of Sale on our website at the following link:
http://www.teledyne-api.com/terms_and_conditions.asp).
COVERAGE
After the warranty period and throughout the equipment lifetime, TAPI stands ready to
provide on-site or in-plant service at reasonable rates similar to those of other manufacturers
in the industry. All maintenance and the first level of field troubleshooting are to be
performed by the customer.
NON-TAPI MANUFACTURED EQUIPMENT
Equipment provided but not manufactured by TAPI is warranted and will be repaired to the
extent and according to the current terms and conditions of the respective equipment
manufacturer’s warranty.
PRODUCT RETURN
All units or components returned to Teledyne API should be properly packed for
handling and returned freight prepaid to the nearest designated Service Center. After the
repair, the equipment will be returned, freight prepaid.
The complete Terms and Conditions of Sale
http://www.teledyne-api.com/terms_and_conditions.asp
can
be
reviewed
at
CAUTION – Avoid Warranty Invalidation
Failure to comply with proper anti-Electro-Static Discharge (ESD) handling and packing
instructions and Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) procedures when returning parts for
repair or calibration may void your warranty. For anti-ESD handling and packing instructions
please refer to the manual, Fundamentals of ESD, PN 04786, in its “Packing Components for
Return to Teledyne API’s Customer Service” section. The manual can be downloaded from our
website at http://www.teledyne-api.com. RMA procedures can also be found on our website.
iv
06807F DCN7335
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Presented here is information regarding the documents that are included with this
manual (Structure), its history of release and revisions (Revision History), how the
content is organized (Organization), and the conventions used to present the information
in this manual (Conventions Used).
STRUCTURE
This T100 manual, PN 06807, is comprised of multiple documents, assembled in PDF
format, as listed below.
Part No.
Note
Rev Name/Description
06807
F
Operation Manual, T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
05036
F
Appendix A, Menu Trees and related software documentation
06845
A
Spare Parts List (in Appendix B of this manual)
04357
A
AKIT, Expendables, basic (in Appendix B of this manual)
01475
A
AKIT, Expendables, IZS (in Appendix B of this manual)
04728
A
AKIT, Spares (in Appendix B of this manual)
04796
F
Appendix C, Repair Form
06908
B
Interconnect Diagram (in Appendix D of this manual)
We recommend that this manual be read in its entirety before any attempt
is made to operate the instrument.
CONVENTIONS USED
In addition to the safety symbols as presented in the Important Safety Information page,
this manual provides special notices related to the safety and effective use of the
analyzer and other pertinent information.
Special Notices appear as follows:
ATTENTION
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
This special notice provides information to avoid damage to your
instrument and possibly invalidate the warranty.
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Could either affect accuracy of instrument readings or cause loss of data.
Note
Pertinent information associated with the proper care, operation or
maintenance of the analyzer or its parts.
06807F DCN7335
v
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
REVISION HISTORY
This section provides information regarding the history of changes to this manual.
T100 Manual, PN06807
Date
Rev
DCN
Change Summary
2016 Aug 05
F
7335
Administrative updates.
2016 April 19
E
7230
Clarified Range setup when using dilution factor option; other administrative fixes.
2015 June 28
D
7088
Condensed content; implemented DCRs
2013 Apr 22
C
6650
Administrative corrections; technical corrections
2011 Aug 22
B
6192
Administrative change: reorganized structure.
Technical Updates: added MODBUS Quick Setup (Section 6.6.1), update Appendices A
and D with latest revisions.
2010 Sep 7
A
5834
Initial release
vi
06807F DCN7335
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Important Safety Information ..............................................................................................................................ii
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ ...............................................................................................................................iii
Warranty ...............................................................................................................................................................iv
About This Manual ...............................................................................................................................................v
Revision History ..................................................................................................................................................vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS .......................................................................................................... VII
List of Figures......................................................................................................................................................xi
List of Tables .....................................................................................................................................................xiv
1. INTRODUCTION, FEATURES AND OPTIONS ................................................................. 17
1.1. T100 Overview .............................................................................................................................................17
1.2. Features .......................................................................................................................................................18
1.3. T100 Documentation ...................................................................................................................................18
1.4. Options .........................................................................................................................................................18
2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS & COMPLIANCE ......................................................... 23
2.1. Specifications and Approvals ....................................................................................................................23
2.2. EPA Equivalency Designation ...................................................................................................................25
2.3. Approvals and Certifications .....................................................................................................................25
2.3.1. EMC .......................................................................................................................................................25
2.3.2. Safety .....................................................................................................................................................25
2.3.3. Other Type Certifications .......................................................................................................................25
3. GETTING STARTED .......................................................................................................... 27
3.1. Unpacking the T100 Analyzer ....................................................................................................................27
3.1.1. Ventilation Clearance .............................................................................................................................28
3.2. Instrument Layout .......................................................................................................................................29
3.2.1. Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................29
3.2.2. Rear Panel .............................................................................................................................................33
3.2.3. Internal Chassis Layout .........................................................................................................................35
3.3. Connections and Setup ..............................................................................................................................36
3.3.1. Electrical Connections ...........................................................................................................................36
3.3.2. Pneumatic Connections .........................................................................................................................52
3.4. Startup, Functional Checks, and Initial Calibration .................................................................................65
3.4.1. Startup....................................................................................................................................................65
3.4.2. Warning Messages ................................................................................................................................65
3.4.3. Functional Checks .................................................................................................................................67
3.4.4. Initial Calibration ....................................................................................................................................69
4. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES .............................................................................. 75
4.1. Sample Mode ...............................................................................................................................................77
4.1.1. Test Functions .......................................................................................................................................77
4.1.2. Warning Messages ................................................................................................................................80
4.2. Calibration Mode .........................................................................................................................................81
4.3. Setup Mode ..................................................................................................................................................81
4.3.1. Password Security .................................................................................................................................81
4.3.2. Primary Setup Menu ..............................................................................................................................82
4.3.3. Secondary Setup Menu (SETUP>MORE) .............................................................................................82
5. SETUP MENU .................................................................................................................... 83
5.1. SETUP – CFG: Configuration Information ................................................................................................83
5.2. SETUP – ACAL: Automatic Calibration Option ........................................................................................83
5.3. SETUP – DAS: Internal Data Acquisition System ....................................................................................84
5.4. SETUP – RNGE: Analog Output Reporting Range Configuration..........................................................84
06807F DCN7335
vii
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.4.1. Available Analog Output Signals ...........................................................................................................84
5.4.2. Physical Range versus Analog Output Reporting Ranges ....................................................................85
5.4.3. Reporting Range Modes: Single, Dual, Auto Ranges ...........................................................................86
5.4.4. Range Units ...........................................................................................................................................90
5.4.5. Dilution Ratio (Option)............................................................................................................................92
5.5. SETUP – PASS: Password Protection ......................................................................................................93
5.6. SETUP – CLK: Setting the Internal Time-of-Day Clock ...........................................................................96
5.7. SETUP – COMM: Communications Ports .................................................................................................98
5.7.1. ID (Instrument Identification) ..................................................................................................................98
5.7.2. INET (Ethernet) ......................................................................................................................................99
5.7.3. COM1 and COM2 (Mode, Baud Rate and Test Port) ............................................................................99
5.8. SETUP – VARS: Variables Setup and Definition ....................................................................................100
5.9. SETUP – DIAG: Diagnostics Functions ..................................................................................................102
5.9.1. Signal I/O .............................................................................................................................................104
5.9.2. Analog Output Step Test......................................................................................................................105
5.9.3. Analog I/O Configuration......................................................................................................................106
5.9.4. Optic Test .............................................................................................................................................119
5.9.5. Electrical Test ......................................................................................................................................120
5.9.6. Lamp Calibration ..................................................................................................................................121
5.9.7. Pressure Calibration ............................................................................................................................122
5.9.8. Flow Calibration ...................................................................................................................................123
5.9.9. Test Channel Output ............................................................................................................................124
6. COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION ............................................................ 127
6.1. Data Terminal / Communication Equipment (DTE DCE) .......................................................................127
6.2. Communication Modes, Baud Rate and Port testing ............................................................................127
6.2.1. Communication Modes ........................................................................................................................128
6.2.2. COMM Port Baud Rate ........................................................................................................................130
6.2.3. COMM Port Testing .............................................................................................................................131
6.3. RS-232 ........................................................................................................................................................131
6.4. RS-485 (Option) .........................................................................................................................................132
6.5. Ethernet ......................................................................................................................................................132
6.5.1. Configuring Ethernet Communication Manually (Static IP Address) ...................................................133
6.5.2. Configuring Ethernet Communication Using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) .............135
6.5.3. USB Port for Remote access ...............................................................................................................137
6.6. Communications Protocols .....................................................................................................................139
6.6.1. MODBUS .............................................................................................................................................139
6.6.2. HESSEN ..............................................................................................................................................141
7. DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS) AND APICOM ..................................................... 147
7.1. DAS Structure ............................................................................................................................................148
7.1.1. DAS Channels .....................................................................................................................................148
7.1.2. DAS Parameters ..................................................................................................................................149
7.1.3. DAS Triggering Events ........................................................................................................................150
7.2. Default DAS Channels ..............................................................................................................................150
7.2.1. Viewing DAS Data and Settings ..........................................................................................................153
7.2.2. 7.3Editing DAS Data Channels ............................................................................................................154
7.2.3. Trigger Events ......................................................................................................................................156
7.2.4. Editing DAS Parameters ......................................................................................................................157
7.2.5. Sample Period and Report Period .......................................................................................................159
7.2.6. Number of Records ..............................................................................................................................160
7.2.7. RS-232 Report Function ......................................................................................................................162
7.2.8. Compact Report ...................................................................................................................................162
7.2.9. Starting Date ........................................................................................................................................162
7.2.10. Disabling/Enabling Data Channels ....................................................................................................163
7.2.11. HOLDOFF Feature ............................................................................................................................164
7.3. APICOM Remote Control Program ..........................................................................................................165
7.4. Remote DAS Configuration via APICOM ................................................................................................166
viii
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
8. REMOTE OPERATION OF THE ANALYZER .................................................................. 169
8.1. Remote Operation Using the External Digital I/O ..................................................................................169
8.1.1. Status Outputs .....................................................................................................................................169
8.1.2. Control Inputs .......................................................................................................................................170
8.2. Remote Operation Using the External Serial I/O ...................................................................................172
8.2.1. Terminal Operating Modes ..................................................................................................................172
8.2.2. Help Commands in Terminal Mode .....................................................................................................172
8.2.3. Command Syntax ................................................................................................................................173
8.2.4. Data Types ...........................................................................................................................................173
8.2.5. Status Reporting ..................................................................................................................................174
8.3. Remote Access by Modem.......................................................................................................................175
8.4. COM Port Password Security ..................................................................................................................178
8.5. Additional Communications Documentation .........................................................................................178
9. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES ....................................................................................... 179
9.1. Calibration Preparations ..........................................................................................................................179
9.1.1. Required Equipment, Supplies, and Expendables ..............................................................................179
9.1.2. Data Recording Devices ......................................................................................................................181
9.2. Manual Calibration ....................................................................................................................................182
9.3. Manual Calibration Checks ......................................................................................................................185
9.4. Manual Calibration with Zero/Span Valves.............................................................................................186
9.5. Manual Calibration with IZS Option ........................................................................................................189
9.6. Manual Calibration Checks with IZS or Zero/Span Valves ...................................................................189
9.7. Manual Calibration in DUAL or AUTO Reporting Range Modes ..........................................................192
9.7.1. Calibration With Remote Contact Closures .........................................................................................192
9.8. Automatic Calibration (AutoCal) .............................................................................................................193
9.9. Calibration Quality ....................................................................................................................................196
9.10. Calibration of Optional Sensors ............................................................................................................197
9.10.1. O2 Sensor Calibration ........................................................................................................................197
9.10.2. CO2 Sensor Calibration ......................................................................................................................201
9.11. EPA Protocol Calibration .......................................................................................................................205
10. INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE .................................................................................... 207
10.1. Maintenance Schedule ...........................................................................................................................209
10.2. Predictive Diagnostics............................................................................................................................211
10.3. Maintenance Procedures........................................................................................................................212
10.3.1. Changing the Sample Particulate Filter .............................................................................................212
10.3.2. Changing the IZS Permeation Tube ..................................................................................................213
10.3.3. Changing the External Zero Air Scrubber ..........................................................................................213
10.3.4. Changing the Critical Flow Orifice .....................................................................................................214
10.3.5. Checking for Light Leaks ...................................................................................................................215
10.3.6. Detailed Pressure Leak Check ..........................................................................................................216
10.3.7. Performing a Sample Flow Check .....................................................................................................217
10.3.8. Hydrocarbon Scrubber (Kicker) .........................................................................................................217
11. TROUBLESHOOTING & SERVICE ............................................................................... 219
11.1. General Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................220
11.1.1. Fault Diagnostics with Warning Messages ........................................................................................220
11.1.2. Fault Diagnosis with Test Functions ..................................................................................................223
11.1.3. Using the Diagnostic Signal I/O Functions ........................................................................................225
11.2. Status LEDs .............................................................................................................................................227
11.2.1. Motherboard Status Indicator (Watchdog) .........................................................................................227
11.2.2. CPU Status Indicators........................................................................................................................227
11.2.3. Relay Board Status LEDs ..................................................................................................................228
11.3. Gas Flow Problems .................................................................................................................................228
11.3.1. Zero or Low Sample Flow ..................................................................................................................228
11.3.2. High Flow ...........................................................................................................................................229
11.4. Calibration Problems ..............................................................................................................................229
11.4.1. Negative Concentrations....................................................................................................................229
06807F DCN7335
ix
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
11.4.2. No Response .....................................................................................................................................229
11.4.3. Unstable Zero and Span ....................................................................................................................230
11.4.4. Inability to Span - No SPAN Button ...................................................................................................230
11.4.5. Inability to Zero - No ZERO Button ....................................................................................................231
11.4.6. Non-Linear Response ........................................................................................................................231
11.4.7. Discrepancy Between Analog Output and Display ............................................................................232
11.5. Other Performance Problems ................................................................................................................232
11.5.1. Excessive noise .................................................................................................................................232
11.5.2. Slow Response ..................................................................................................................................232
11.5.3. The Analyzer Doesn’t Appear on the LAN or Internet .......................................................................232
11.6. Subsystem Checkout..............................................................................................................................233
11.6.1. AC Power Configuration ....................................................................................................................233
11.6.2. DC Power Supply...............................................................................................................................234
2
11.6.3. I C Bus ...............................................................................................................................................235
11.6.4. Touch-screen Interface ......................................................................................................................235
11.6.5. LCD Display Module ..........................................................................................................................235
11.6.6. Relay Board .......................................................................................................................................236
11.6.7. Motherboard .......................................................................................................................................236
11.6.8. CPU....................................................................................................................................................238
11.6.9. RS-232 Communication .....................................................................................................................238
11.6.10. Shutter System ................................................................................................................................239
11.6.11. PMT Sensor .....................................................................................................................................240
11.6.12. PMT Preamplifier Board...................................................................................................................240
11.6.13. PMT Temperature Control PCA .......................................................................................................240
11.6.14. High Voltage Power Supply .............................................................................................................240
11.6.15. Pneumatic Sensor Assembly ...........................................................................................................241
11.6.16. Sample Pressure .............................................................................................................................242
11.6.17. IZS Option ........................................................................................................................................242
11.6.18. Box Temperature .............................................................................................................................242
11.6.19. PMT Temperature ............................................................................................................................242
11.7. Service Procedures.................................................................................................................................243
11.7.1. Disk-on-Module Replacement ...........................................................................................................243
11.7.2. Sensor Module Repair & Cleaning ....................................................................................................245
11.8. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) ....................................................................................................260
11.9. Technical Assistance..............................................................................................................................261
12. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION...................................................................................... 263
12.1. Sulfur Dioxide (SO2) Sensor Principles of operation ..........................................................................263
12.1.1. SO2 Ultraviolet Fluorescence Measurement Principle .......................................................................263
12.1.2. The UV Light Path ..............................................................................................................................266
12.1.3. UV Source Lamp................................................................................................................................267
12.1.4. The Reference Detector.....................................................................................................................268
12.1.5. The PMT ............................................................................................................................................268
12.1.6. UV Lamp Shutter & PMT Offset .........................................................................................................268
12.1.7. Optical Filters .....................................................................................................................................269
12.1.8. Optical Lenses ...................................................................................................................................271
12.1.9. Measurement Interferences ...............................................................................................................272
12.2. Oxygen (O2) Sensor Principles of Operation .......................................................................................273
12.2.1. Paramagnetic Measurement of O2.....................................................................................................273
12.2.2. O2 Sensor Operation within the T100 Analyzer .................................................................................274
12.3. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensor Principles of Operation .......................................................................275
12.3.1. NDIR Measurement of CO2 ...............................................................................................................275
12.3.2. CO2 Operation within the T100 Analyzer ...........................................................................................276
12.3.3. Electronic Operation of the CO2 Sensor ............................................................................................276
12.4. Pneumatic Operation ..............................................................................................................................277
12.4.1. Sample Gas Flow...............................................................................................................................277
12.4.2. Flow Rate Control ..............................................................................................................................278
12.4.3. Hydrocarbon Scrubber (Kicker) .........................................................................................................279
x
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
12.4.4. Pneumatic Sensors ............................................................................................................................280
12.5. Electronic Operation ...............................................................................................................................281
12.5.1. CPU....................................................................................................................................................283
12.5.2. Sensor Module ...................................................................................................................................284
12.5.3. Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) ..............................................................................................................286
12.5.4. PMT Cooling System .........................................................................................................................288
12.5.5. PMT Preamplifier ...............................................................................................................................289
12.5.6. Pneumatic Sensor Board ...................................................................................................................291
12.5.7. Relay Board .......................................................................................................................................291
12.5.8. Motherboard .......................................................................................................................................293
12.5.9. Analog Outputs ..................................................................................................................................294
12.5.10. External Digital I/O ...........................................................................................................................295
2
12.5.11. I C Data Bus ....................................................................................................................................295
12.5.12. Power up Circuit ...............................................................................................................................295
12.5.13. Power Supply/ Circuit Breaker .........................................................................................................295
12.6. Front Panel/Display Interface ................................................................................................................297
12.6.1. LVDS Transmitter Board ....................................................................................................................297
12.6.2. Front Panel Interface PCA .................................................................................................................297
12.7. Software Operation .................................................................................................................................298
12.7.1. Adaptive Filter ....................................................................................................................................298
12.7.2. Calibration - Slope and Offset ............................................................................................................299
12.7.3. Temperature and Pressure Compensation (TPC) Feature ...............................................................299
12.7.4. Internal Data Acquisition System (DAS) ............................................................................................300
GLOSSARY........................................................................................................................... 301
INDEX .................................................................................................................................... 305
APPENDIX A - VERSION SPECIFIC SOFTWARE DOCUMENTATION
APPENDIX B - SPARE PARTS
APPENDIX C - REPAIR QUESTIONNAIRE
APPENDIX D - INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 3-1:
Figure 3-2:
Figure 3-3:
Figure 3-4:
Figure 3-5:
Figure 3-6:
Figure 3-7:
Figure 3-8:
Figure 3-9:
Figure 3-10:
Figure 3-11:
Figure 3-12:
Figure 3-13:
Figure 3-14:
Figure 3-15:
Figure 3-16:
Figure 3-17:
Figure 3-18:
Figure 3-19:
Front Panel Layout .......................................................................................................................29
Display Screen and Touch Control ..............................................................................................30
Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts .............................................................32
Rear Panel Layout .......................................................................................................................33
Internal Layout, Basic (no Valve or Second Gas Options) ..........................................................35
Analog In Connector ....................................................................................................................37
Analog Output Connector ............................................................................................................38
Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard .....................................................................40
Status Output Connector .............................................................................................................41
Control Input Connector ...............................................................................................................43
Concentration Alarm Relay ..........................................................................................................44
Rear Panel Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode ......................................................................47
Default Pin Assignments for CPU Com Port Connector (RS-232) ..............................................48
Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode.......................................................................................50
RS-232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram .....................................................51
Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas .....................................55
Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator .............................55
T100 Gas Flow, Basic Configuration ...........................................................................................56
Pneumatic Layout with Zero/Span Valves Option .......................................................................57
06807F DCN7335
xi
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Figure 3-20:
Figure 3-21:
Figure 3-22:
Figure 3-23:
Figure 3-24:
Figure 3-25:
Figure 3-26:
Figure 3-27:
Figure 3-28:
Figure 3-29:
Figure 4-1:
Figure 4-2:
Figure 4-3:
Figure 5-1:
Figure 5-2:
Figure 5-3:
Figure 5-4:
Figure 5-5:
Figure 5-6:
Figure 5-7:
Figure 5-8:
Figure 5-9:
Figure 5-10:
Figure 5-11:
Figure 5-12:
Figure 5-13:
Figure 5-14:
Figure 5-15:
Figure 5-16:
Figure 5-17:
Figure 5-18:
Figure 5-19:
Figure 5-20:
Figure 5-21:
Figure 5-22:
Figure 5-23:
Figure 5-24:
Figure 5-25:
Figure 5-26:
Figure 5-27:
Figure 5-28:
Figure 5-29.
Figure 5-30:
Figure 5-31:
Figure 5-32:
Figure 5-33:
Figure 5-34:
Figure 5-35:
Figure 6-1:
Figure 6-2:
Figure 6-3:
Figure 6-4:
Figure 6-5:
Figure 6-6:
Figure 6-7:
Figure 6-8:
Figure 6-9:
xii
Pneumatic Layout with Pressurized Span/Ambient Zero Option .................................................58
Pneumatic Layout with IZS Options .............................................................................................59
Pneumatic Layout with O2 Sensor ...............................................................................................62
Pneumatic Layout with CO2 Sensor.............................................................................................63
Warning Messages ......................................................................................................................65
Functional Check .........................................................................................................................68
Reporting Range Verification .......................................................................................................70
Dilution Ratio Setup .....................................................................................................................71
SO2 Span Gas Setting .................................................................................................................72
Zero/Span Calibration Procedure ................................................................................................73
Front Panel Display......................................................................................................................76
Viewing T100 TEST Functions ....................................................................................................79
Viewing and Clearing T100 WARNING Messages ......................................................................80
SETUP – Configuration Information ............................................................................................83
SETUP – Analog Output Connector ............................................................................................84
SETUP RNGE – Reporting Range Mode ....................................................................................86
SETUP RNGE – Single Range Mode ..........................................................................................87
SETUP RNGE – Dual Range Mode ............................................................................................88
SETUP RNGE – Auto Range Mode ............................................................................................89
SETUP RNGE – Concentration Units Selection ..........................................................................90
SETUP RNGE – Dilution Ratio ....................................................................................................92
SETUP – Enable Password Security ...........................................................................................94
SETUP – Enter Calibration Mode Using Password .....................................................................95
SETUP – Clock ............................................................................................................................96
SETUP – Clock Speed Variable ..................................................................................................97
SETUP – COMM Menu................................................................................................................98
COMM – Machine ID ..................................................................................................................99
SETUP – VARS Menu ...............................................................................................................101
DIAG Menu ................................................................................................................................103
DIAG – Signal I/O Menu ............................................................................................................104
DIAG – Analog Output Menu .....................................................................................................105
DIAG – Analog I/O Configuration Menu.....................................................................................108
DIAG – Analog Output Calibration Mode ...................................................................................109
DIAG – Analog Output Calibration Mode – Single Analog Channel ..........................................110
DIAG – Analog Output – Auto Cal or Manual Cal Selection for Channels ................................111
Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs ........................................................................................112
Analog Output – Voltage Adjustment.........................................................................................113
Analog Output – Offset Adjustment ...........................................................................................114
Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs .......................................................................................115
Analog Output – Zero and Span Value Adjustment for Current Outputs ...................................116
DIAG – Analog Output – AIN Calibration ...................................................................................117
DIAG – Analog Inputs (Option) Configuration Menu .................................................................118
DIAG – Optic Test ......................................................................................................................119
DIAG – Electrical Test................................................................................................................120
DIAG – Lamp Calibration ...........................................................................................................121
DIAG – Pressure Calibration......................................................................................................122
DIAG – Flow Calibration ............................................................................................................123
DIAG – Test Channel Output .....................................................................................................124
COMM – Communication Modes Setup ....................................................................................129
COMM – COMM Port Baud Rate ..............................................................................................130
COMM – COM1 Test Port..........................................................................................................131
COMM – LAN / Internet Manual Configuration ..........................................................................134
COMM – LAN / Internet Automatic Configuration ......................................................................135
COMM – Change Hostname ....................................................................................................136
COMM – Activating Hessen Protocol ........................................................................................142
COMM – Select Hessen Protocol Type .....................................................................................143
COMM – Select Hessen Protocol Response Mode ...................................................................144
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Figure 6-10:
Figure 7-1:
Figure 7-2:
Figure 7-3:
Figure 7-4:
Figure 7-5:
Figure 7-6:
Figure 7-7:
Figure 7-8:
Figure 7-9:
Figure 7-10:
Figure 7-11:
Figure 7-12:
Figure 7-13:
Figure 7-14:
Figure 7-15:
Figure 8-1:
Figure 8-2:
Figure 8-3:
Figure 8-4:
Figure 8-5:
Figure 9-1:
Figure 9-2:
Figure 9-3:
Figure 9-4:
Figure 9-5:
Figure 9-6:
Figure 9-7:
Figure 9-8:
Figure 9-9:
Figure 9-10:
Figure 9-11:
Figure 9-12:
Figure 9-13:
Figure 9-14:
Figure 9-15:
Figure 9-16:
Figure 9-17:
Figure 9-18:
Figure 9-19:
Figure 9-20:
Figure 10-1:
Figure 10-2:
Figure 10-3:
Figure 10-4:
Figure 11-1:
Figure 11-2:
Figure 11-3:
Figure 11-4:
Figure 11-5:
Figure 11-6:
Figure 11-7:
Figure 11-8:
Figure 11-9:
Figure 11-10:
Figure 11-11:
Figure 11-12:
COMM – Status Flag Bit Assignment ........................................................................................146
Default DAS Channels Setup ....................................................................................................152
DAS – Data Acquisition Menu ...................................................................................................153
DAS – Editing DAS Data Channels ...........................................................................................154
DAS – Editing Data Channel Name ...........................................................................................155
DAS – Trigger Events ................................................................................................................156
DAS – Editing DAS Parameters ................................................................................................157
DAS – Configuring Parameters for a Specific Data Parameter .................................................158
DAS – Define the Report Period ................................................................................................160
DAS – Edit Number of Records .................................................................................................161
DAS – RS-232 Report Function .................................................................................................162
DAS – Disabling / Enabling Data Channels ...............................................................................163
DAS – Holdoff Feature ...............................................................................................................164
APICOM Remote Control Program Interface.............................................................................165
Sample APICOM User Interface for Configuring the DAS .........................................................166
DAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program.....................................................167
Status Output Connector ...........................................................................................................170
Control Inputs with Local 5 V Power Supply ..............................................................................171
Control Inputs with External 5 V Power Supply .........................................................................172
COMM – Remote Access by Modem ........................................................................................176
COMM – Initialize the Modem ...................................................................................................177
Setup for Manual Calibration without Z/S valve or IZS Option (Step 1) ....................................182
Setup for Manual Calibration without Z/S valve or IZS Option (Step 2) ....................................183
Setup for Manual Calibration without Z/S valve or IZS Option (Step 3) ....................................184
Setup for Manual Calibration Checks ........................................................................................185
Setup for Manual Calibration with Z/S Valve Option Installed (Step 1) .....................................186
Setup for Manual Calibration with Z/S Valve Option Installed (Step 2) .....................................187
Setup for Manual Calibration with Z/S Valve Option Installed (Step 3) .....................................188
Manual Calibration with IZS Option ...........................................................................................189
Setup for Manual Calibration Check with Z/S Valve or IZS Option (Step 1) .............................190
Setup for Manual Calibration Check with Z/S Valve or IZS Option (Step 2) .............................191
Manual Calibration in Dual/Auto Reporting Range Modes ........................................................192
AUTO CAL – User Defined Sequence .......................................................................................195
O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up ....................................................................................................197
O2 Span Gas Concentration Set Up ..........................................................................................198
Activate O2 Sensor Stability Function ........................................................................................199
O2 Zero/Span Calibration ...........................................................................................................200
CO2 Sensor Calibration Set Up..................................................................................................201
CO2 Span Gas Concentration Setup .........................................................................................202
Activate CO2 Sensor Stability Function .....................................................................................203
CO2 Zero/Span Calibration ........................................................................................................204
Sample Particulate Filter Assembly ...........................................................................................212
Critical Flow Orifice Assembly ...................................................................................................214
Simple Leak Check Fixture ........................................................................................................217
Hydrocarbon Scrubber Leak Check Setup ................................................................................218
Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages .................................................................................221
Example of Signal I/O Function .................................................................................................226
CPU Status Indicator .................................................................................................................227
Location of Relay Board Power Configuration Jumper ..............................................................234
Manual Activation of the UV Light Shutter .................................................................................239
Sensor Module Wiring and Pneumatic Fittings ..........................................................................245
Sensor Module Mounting Screws ..............................................................................................246
Sample Chamber Mounting Bracket ..........................................................................................247
Hex Screw Between Lens Housing and Sample Chamber .......................................................248
UV Lens Housing / Filter Housing ..............................................................................................249
PMT UV Filter Housing Disassembled ......................................................................................249
Disassembling the Shutter Assembly ........................................................................................251
06807F DCN7335
xiii
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Figure 11-13:
Figure 11-14.
Figure 11-15:
Figure 11-16:
Figure 11-17:
Figure 12-1:
Figure 12-2:
Figure 12-3:
Figure 12-4:
Figure 12-5:
Figure 12-6:
Figure 12-7:
Figure 12-8:
Figure 12-9:
Figure 12-10:
Figure 12-11:
Figure 12-12:
Figure 12-13:
Figure 12-14:
Figure 12-15:
Figure 12-16:
Figure 12-17:
Figure 12-18:
Figure 12-19:
Figure 12-20:
Figure 12-21:
Figure 12-22:
Figure 12-23:
Figure 12-24:
Figure 12-25:
Shutter Assembly .......................................................................................................................252
UV Lamp Adjustment .................................................................................................................253
Location of UV Reference Detector Potentiometer ...................................................................254
PMT Assembly - Exploded View ................................................................................................256
Pre-Amplifier Board (Preamp PCA) Layout ...............................................................................258
UV Absorption ............................................................................................................................264
UV Light Path .............................................................................................................................267
Source UV Lamp Construction ..................................................................................................268
Excitation Lamp UV Spectrum Before/After Filtration ................................................................269
PMT Optical Filter Bandwidth ....................................................................................................270
Effects of Focusing Source UV in Sample Chamber .................................................................271
Oxygen Sensor - Principles of Operation ..................................................................................274
CO2 Sensor Principles of Operation ..........................................................................................275
CO2 Sensor Option PCA Layout and Electronic Connections ...................................................276
Gas Flow and Location of Critical Flow Orifice ..........................................................................277
Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice...........................................................................278
T100 Hydrocarbon Scrubber (Kicker) ........................................................................................279
T100 Electronic Block Diagram .................................................................................................281
CPU Board Annotated ...............................................................................................................283
T100 Sensor Module..................................................................................................................284
T100 Sample Chamber ..............................................................................................................285
PMT Housing Assembly.............................................................................................................286
Basic PMT Design .....................................................................................................................287
PMT Cooling System .................................................................................................................288
PMT Preamp Block Diagram .....................................................................................................290
Relay Board Status LED Locations ...........................................................................................292
Power Distribution Block Diagram .............................................................................................296
Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram .....................................................................297
Basic Software Operation ..........................................................................................................298
Calibration Slope and Offset ......................................................................................................299
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1:
Table 2-1
Table 2-2:
Table 2-3:
Table 3-1:
Table 3-2:
Table 3-3:
Table 3-4:
Table 3-5:
Table 3-6:
Table 3-7:
Table 3-8:
Table 3-9:
Table 3-10:
Table 3-11:
Table 3-12:
Table 3-13:
Table 3-14:
Table 3-15:
Table 4-1:
Table 4-2:
Table 4-3:
xiv
Analyzer Options ..........................................................................................................................19
T100 Basic Unit Specifications ....................................................................................................23
O2 Sensor Option Specifications ..................................................................................................24
CO2 Sensor Option Specifications ...............................................................................................24
Ventilation Clearance ...................................................................................................................28
Display Screen and Touch Control Description ...........................................................................31
Rear Panel Description ................................................................................................................34
Electrical Connections References ..............................................................................................36
Analog Input Pin Assignments .....................................................................................................38
Analog Output Pin Assignments ..................................................................................................39
Status Output Signals ..................................................................................................................42
Control Input Signals ....................................................................................................................43
Pneumatic Layout Reference ......................................................................................................54
Zero/Span and Sample/Cal Valve Operating States ...................................................................57
Zero/Span and Sample/Cal Valve Operating States ...................................................................58
IZS Valve Operating States .........................................................................................................60
NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of SO2 Calibration Gases ...............................................64
Possible Startup Warning Messages – T100 Analyzers w/o Options .........................................66
Possible Startup Warning Messages – T100 Analyzers with Options .........................................67
Analyzer Operating Modes ..........................................................................................................76
Test Functions Defined ................................................................................................................78
List of Warning Messages............................................................................................................80
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Table 4-4:
Table 4-5:
Table 5-1:
Table 5-2:
Table 5-3:
Table 5-4:
Table 5-5:
Table 5-6:
Table 5-7:
Table 5-8:
Table 5-9:
Table 6-1:
Table 6-2:
Table 6-3:
Table 6-4:
Table 6-5:
Table 6-6:
Table 6-7:
Table 7-1:
Table 7-2:
Table 7-3:
Table 8-1:
Table 8-2:
Table 8-3:
Table 8-4:
Table 8-5:
Table 9-1:
Table 9-2:
Table 9-3:
Table 9-4:
Table 9-5:
Table 10-1:
Table 10-2:
Table 11-1:
Table 11-2:
Table 11-3:
Table 11-4:
Table 11-5:
Table 11-6:
Table 11-7:
Table 11-8:
Table 11-9:
Table 11-10:
Table 12-1:
Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions .............................................................................82
Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions ........................................................................82
Password Levels ..........................................................................................................................93
Variable Names (VARS) Revision 1.0.3 ....................................................................................100
T100 Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions ............................................................................................102
DIAG - Analog I/O Functions .....................................................................................................106
Analog Output Voltage Ranges .................................................................................................106
Analog Output Current Loop Range ..........................................................................................107
Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration ....................................................................112
Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor ..........................................................................116
Test Parameters Available for Analog Output A3 (standard configuration) ...............................125
COMM Port Communication Modes ..........................................................................................128
Ethernet Status Indicators..........................................................................................................132
LAN/Internet Default Configuration Properties ..........................................................................133
Hostname Editing Button Functions ..........................................................................................136
RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol ........................................................141
T100 Hessen Protocol Response Modes ..................................................................................144
Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments ....................................................................................145
Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS ...............................................................................148
DAS Data Channel Properties ...................................................................................................149
DAS Data Parameter Functions ................................................................................................150
Status Output Pin Assignments .................................................................................................170
Control Input Pin Assignments ..................................................................................................171
Terminal Mode Software Commands ........................................................................................172
Command Types ........................................................................................................................173
Serial Interface Documents........................................................................................................178
NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of SO2 Calibration Gases .............................................180
AutoCal Modes ..........................................................................................................................193
AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters..........................................................................................193
Example Auto-Cal Sequence .....................................................................................................194
Calibration Data Quality Evaluation ...........................................................................................196
T100 Preventive Maintenance Schedule ...................................................................................209
Predictive Uses for Test Functions ............................................................................................211
Warning Messages - Indicated Failures ....................................................................................222
Test Functions - Possible Causes for Out-Of-Range Values ....................................................224
Relay Board Status LEDs ..........................................................................................................228
DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code ............................................................................234
DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels ........................................................................................235
Relay Board Control Devices .....................................................................................................236
Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values ........................................................................237
Status Outputs Check Pin Out ...................................................................................................237
Example of HVPS Power Supply Outputs .................................................................................241
UV Lamp Signal Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................253
Relay Board Status LED’s .........................................................................................................292
06807F DCN7335
xv
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
This page intentionally left blank.
xvi
06807F DCN7335
1. INTRODUCTION, FEATURES AND OPTIONS
This section provides an overview of the Teledyne API Model T100 Analyzer, its
features and its options.
1.1. T100 OVERVIEW
The Model T100 (also referred to as T100) UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer is a
microprocessor controlled analyzer that determines the concentration of sulfur dioxide
(SO2), in a sample gas drawn through the instrument’s sample chamber where it is
exposed to ultraviolet light, which causes any SO2 present to fluoresce. The instrument
measures the amount of fluorescence to determine the amount of SO2 present in the
sample gas.
The T100’s exceptional stability is achieved with the use of an optical shutter to
compensate for sensor drift and a reference detector to correct for changes in UV lamp
intensity. Additionally, an advanced optical design combined with a special scrubber,
called a "kicker" that removes hydrocarbons (which fluoresce similarly to SO2), to
prevent inaccuracies caused by interferents.
Calibration is performed in software that stores SO2 concentration measurements made
when specific, known concentrations of SO2 are supplied to the analyzer. The
microprocessor uses these calibration values along with other performance parameters
such as the sensor offset, UV lamp intensity, amount of stray light present, and sample
gas temperature and pressure measurements to compute the final SO2 concentration.
Built-in data acquisition capability, using the analyzer's internal memory, allows the
logging of multiple parameters including averaged or instantaneous concentration
values, calibration data, and operating parameters such as pressure and flow rate. Stored
data are easily retrieved through the serial port or Ethernet port via our APICOM
software or from the front panel, allowing operators to perform predictive diagnostics
and enhanced data analysis by tracking parameter trends. Multiple averaging periods of
one minute to 365 days are available for over a period of one year.
06807F DCN7335
17
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Introduction, Features and Options
1.2. FEATURES
The features of your T100 UV Fluorescence Sulfur Dioxide Analyzer include:
•
LCD Graphical User Interface with capacitive touch screen
•
Ranges, 0-50 ppb to 0-20,000 ppb, user selectable
•
Dual ranges and auto ranging
•
Microprocessor control for versatility
•
Multi-tasking software to allow viewing test variables while operating
•
Continuous self checking with alarms
•
Bi-directional USB, RS-232, and 10/100Base-T Ethernet ports for remote operation
(optional RS-485)
•
Front panel USB ports for peripheral devices
•
Digital status outputs to indicate instrument operating conditions
•
Adaptive signal filtering to optimize response time
•
Temperature and Pressure compensation
•
Internal Zero and Span check (optional)
•
Internal data logging with 1 min to 365 day multiple averages
•
Critical flow orifices to provide flow stability
1.3. T100 DOCUMENTATION
In addition to this operation manual (part number 06807), the APICOM and DAS
manual (PN 07463) is available for download from Teledyne API’s website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/, to support the operation of this instrument.
1.4. OPTIONS
The options available for your analyzer are presented in Table 1-1. To order these
options or to learn more about them, please contact the Sales department of Teledyne
API at:
18
TOLL-FREE:
800-324-5190
TEL:
+1 858-657-9800
FAX:
+1 858-657-9816
E-MAIL:
Api-sales@teledyne.com
WEB SITE:
http://www.teledyne-api.com/
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Introduction, Features and Options
Table 1-1: Analyzer Options
OPTION
OPTION
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION/NOTES
REFERENCE
Pumps meet all typical AC power supply standards while exhibiting same pneumatic
performance.
Pumps
10A
External Pump 100V - 120V @ 60 Hz
N/A
10B
External Pump 220V - 240V @ 50 Hz
N/A
10C
External Pump 220V - 240V @ 60 Hz
N/A
10D
External Pump 100V - 120V @ 50 Hz
N/A
10E
External Pump 100V @ 60 Hz
N/A
11B
Pumpless, internal or external Pump Pack
N/A
13
High Voltage Internal Pump 240V @ 50Hz
N/A
Rack Mount
Kits
Options for mounting the analyzer in standard 19” racks
20A
Rack mount brackets with 26 in. chassis slides
N/A
20B
Rack mount brackets with 24 in. chassis slides
N/A
21
Rack mount brackets only (compatible with carrying strap, Option 29)
N/A
Rack mount for external pump pack (no slides)
N/A
23
Carrying Strap/Handle
29
Side-mounted strap for hand-carrying analyzer
Extends from “flat” position to accommodate hand for carrying.
Recesses to 9mm (3/8”) dimension for storage.
Can be used with rack mount brackets, Option 21.
Cannot be used with rack mount slides.
N/A
CAUTION
General Safety Hazard
A FULLY LOADED T100 WITH VALVE OPTIONS WEIGHS ABOUT 18 KG (40 POUNDS).
To avoid personal injury we recommend that two persons lift and carry the analyzer. Disconnect all
cables and tubing from the analyzer before moving it.
Used for connecting external voltage signals from other instrumentation (such as
meteorological instruments).
Analog Inputs
64
Current Loop Analog
Outputs
41
Parts Kits
Also can be used for logging these signals in the analyzer’s internal
DAS
Sections 3.3.1.2,
5.3, 5.9.3.7,and 7
Adds isolated, voltage-to-current conversion circuitry to the analyzer’s analog
outputs.
Can be configured for any output range between 0 and 20 mA.
May be ordered separately for any of the analog outputs.
Can be installed at the factory or retrofitted in the field.
Sections 3.3.1.4,
5.4.1, 5.9.3, and
5.9.3.5
Spare parts and expendables
42A
Expendables Kit includes a recommended set of expendables for
one year of operation of this instrument including replacement sample
particulate filters.
Appendix B
43
Expendables Kit with IZS includes the items needed to refurbish the
internal zero air scrubber (IZS) that is included.
Appendix B
45
Spare Parts Kit includes spares parts for one unit.
Appendix B
NO Optical Filter
Recommended for high NOX backgrounds.
47
06807F DCN7335
Required for EN Certification.
N/A
19
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Introduction, Features and Options
OPTION
OPTION
NUMBER
Calibration Valves
50A
Internal Zero/Span (IZS)
Gas Generator
51A
SO2 IZS Permeation Tubes
DESCRIPTION/NOTES
Used to control the flow of calibration gases generated from external sources, rather
than manually switching the rear panel pneumatic connections.
Two Teflon® solenoid valve sets located inside the analyzer:
Zero/Span valve switches between zero air and span gas;
Sample/Cal valve switches between sample gas and calibration gas.
Sections 3.3.2.3,
3.3.2.4, 9.4, 9.5
and 9.6
Generates internal zero air and span gas.
Includes heated enclosure for a permeation tube (tube not included –
see SO2 IZS Permeation Tubes options), an external scrubber for
producing zero air and a set of valves for switching between the
sample gas inlet and the output of the zero/span subsystem,
functionally very similar to the valves included in the zero/span valve
option.
Sections 3.3.2.4,
9.5, 10.3.2 and
11.6.17
Replacement tubes for the IZS option; identical size/shape; different effusion rates.
Effusion Rate (@ 50°C)
Approximate
Concentration
Specified Flow Rate (of
indicated perm tube rate)
52C
796 ng/min
0.3-0.5 ppm
0.76 ± 5% lpm
N/A
52H
1592 ng/min
0.8 ppm
0.76 ± 50% lpm
N/A
52M
220 ng/min
150 ppb
0.56 ± 25% lpm
N/A
Each tube comes with a calibration certificate, traceable to a NIST
standard, specifying its actual effusion rate of that tube to within ± 5%
when immersed in a gas stream moving at the specified flow rate. This
calibration is performed at a tube temperature of 50°C.
Communication Cables
Sections 3.3.2.4
and 9.1.1.3
For remote serial, network and Internet communication with the analyzer.
Type
Description
Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-25M cable, about
1.8 m long. Used to interface with older computers or code
activated switches with DB-25 serial connectors.
Section 3.3.1.8
and 6.3
60A
RS-232
60B
RS-232
Shielded, straight-through DB-9F to DB-9F cable of about
1.8 m length.
Sections 3.3.1.8,
and 6.3, and 7.2.7
60C
Ethernet
Patch cable, 2 meters long, used for Internet and LAN
communications.
Sections 3.3.1.8
and 6.5
60D
USB
Cable for direct connection between instrument (rear panel
USB port) and personal computer.
Sections3.3.1.8
and 6.5.1
Concentration Alarm
Relay
61
RS-232 Multidrop
62
20
REFERENCE
Issues warning when gas concentration exceeds limits set by user.
Four (4) “dry contact” relays on the rear panel of the instrument. This
relay option is different from and in addition to the “Contact Closures”
that come standard on all TAPI instruments.
Sections 3.3.1.7
and 3.4.4
Enables communications between host computer and up to eight analyzers.
Multidrop card seated on the analyzer’s CPU card.
Each instrument in the multidrop network requires this card and a
communications cable (Option 60B).
Section 3.3.1.8
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
OPTION
OPTION
NUMBER
Second Gas Sensors
65A
67A
Special Features
Introduction, Features and Options
DESCRIPTION/NOTES
REFERENCE
Choice of one additional gas sensor.
Oxygen (O2) Sensor
• Section 2.1 (specs)
• Section 3.3.2.9,
(pneumatic layout)
• Section 9.10.1
(calibration)
• Section 12.2 for
principles of
operation
Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Sensor
• Section 2.1 (specs)
• Section 3.3.2.10
(pneumatic layout)
• Section 9.10.2
(calibration)
• Section 12.3
(principles of
operation)
Built in features, software activated
N/A
Maintenance Mode Switch, located inside the instrument, places the
analyzer in maintenance mode where it can continue sampling, yet
ignore calibration, diagnostic, and reset instrument commands. This
feature is of particular use for instruments connected to Multidrop or
Hessen protocol networks.
N/A
Call Technical Support for activation.
N/A
N/A
Second Language Switch activates an alternate set of display
messages in a language other than the instrument’s default language.
Call Technical Support for a specially programmed Disk on Module containing
the second language.
Dilution Ratio Option allows the user to compensate for diluted
sample gas, such as in continuous emission monitoring (CEM) where
the quality of gas in a smoke stack is being tested and the sampling
method used to remove the gas from the stack dilutes the gas.
N/A
Section 3.4.4.1,
5.4.5 and 12.1.9.3
Call Technical Support for activation.
06807F DCN7335
21
Introduction, Features and Options
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
This page intentionally left blank.
22
06807F DCN7335
2. SPECIFICATIONS, APPROVALS & COMPLIANCE
This section presents specifications for the T100 analyzer and the O2 and CO2 sensor
options, Agency approvals, EPA equivalency designation, and CE mark compliance.
2.1. SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS
Table 2-1 T100 Basic Unit Specifications
Parameter
Ranges
(Physical Analog Output)
Measurement Units
1
Zero Noise
1
Span Noise
2
Lower Detectable Limit
Zero Drift
Span Drift
1
Lag Time
1
Rise/Fall Time
Linearity
1
Precision
Sample Flow Rate
Power Requirements
Analog Output Ranges
Recorder Offset
Standard I/O
Optional I/O
06807F DCN7335
Description
Min: 0-50 ppb Full Scale
Max: 0-20,000 ppb Full Scale (selectable, dual ranges and auto ranging supported)
3
3
ppb, ppm, µg/m , mg/m (selectable)
< 0.2 ppb (RMS)
< 0.5% of reading, above 50 ppb
0.4 ppb
< 0.5 ppb/24 hours
< 0.5% of full scale/24 hours
20 seconds
<100 sec to 95%
1% of full scale
0.5% of reading above 50 ppb
650 cc/min. ±10%
Power Rating
Typical Power Consumption
110-120 V~, 60 Hz 3.0A
165W
220-240 V~, 50/60 Hz 3.0A
140W
10 V, 5 V, 1 V, 0.1 V (selectable)
± 10 %
1 Ethernet: 10/100Base-T
2 RS-232 (300 – 115,200 baud)
2 USB device ports
8 opto-isolated digital outputs
6 opto-isolated digital inputs
4 analog outputs
1 USB com port
1 RS485
8 analog inputs (0-10V, 12-bit)
4 digital alarm outputs
Multidrop RS232
3 4-20mA current outputs
23
Specifications, Approvals & Compliance
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Parameter
Description
Environmental
Installation category (over-voltage category) II; Pollution degree 2
Intended for Indoor use only at altitudes ≤ 2000m
o
5 - 40 C (with EPA Equivalency)
0 - 95% RH, non-condensing
7" x 17" x 23.5" (178 mm x 432 mm x 597 mm)
31 lbs (14 kg); 35.7 lbs (16.2 kg) with internal pump
Operating Temperature
Humidity Range
Dimensions HxWxD
Weight
1
As defined by the USEPA.
2
Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA.
Table 2-2: O2 Sensor Option Specifications
Parameter
Description
Ranges
0-1% to 0-100% user selectable. Dual ranges and auto-ranging supported.
Zero Noise
1
<0.02% O2
Lower Detectable Limit
Zero Drift (24 hours)
2
3
<± 0.02% O2
Zero Drift (7 days)
Span Noise
<0.04% O2
<±- 0.05% O2
1
<± 0.05% O2
Span Drift (7 days)
<± 0.1% O2
Accuracy
(intrinsic error) <± 0.1% O2
Linearity
<± 0.1 % O2
Temp Coefficient
<± 0.05% O2 /°C,
Rise and Fall Time
<60 seconds to 95%
1
2
As defined by the USEPA
Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA
3
Note: zero drift is typically <± 0.1% O2 during the first 24 hrs of operation
Table 2-3: CO2 Sensor Option Specifications
Parameter
Description
Ranges
Zero Noise
0-1% to 0-20% user selectable. Dual ranges and auto-ranging supported.
1
<0.02% CO2
Zero Drift (24 hours)
<± 0.02% CO2
Zero Drift (7 days)
<± 0.05% CO2
Span Noise
1
<± 0.1% CO2
Span Drift (7 days)
Lower Detectable Limit
<± 0.1% CO2
2
<0.04% CO2
Accuracy
<± (0.02% CO2 + 2% of reading)
Linearity
<± 0.1% CO2
Temperature Coefficient
<± 0.01% CO2 /°C
Rise and Fall Time
<60 seconds to 95%
1
As defined by the USEPA
2
Defined as twice the zero noise level by the USEPA
24
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Specifications, Approvals & Compliance
2.2. EPA EQUIVALENCY DESIGNATION
The Model T100 Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer is officially designated as US EPA Federal
Equivalent Method Number EQSA-0495-100 for sulfur dioxide measurement. The
official List of Designated Reference and Equivalent Methods is published in the U.S.
Federal Register: http://www3.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/criteria.html.
2.3. APPROVALS AND CERTIFICATIONS
The Teledyne API Model T100 analyzer was tested and certified for Safety and
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC). This section presents the compliance statements
for those requirements and directives.
2.3.1. EMC
EN 61326-1 (IEC 61326-1), Class A Emissions/Industrial Immunity
EN 55011 (CISPR 11), Group 1, Class A Emissions
FCC 47 CFR Part 15B, Class A Emissions
CE: 2004/108/EC, Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
2.3.2. SAFETY
rd
IEC 61010-1:2010 (3 Edition), Safety requirements for electrical equipment for
measurement, control, and laboratory use.
CE: 2006/95/EC, Low-Voltage Directive
2.3.3. OTHER TYPE CERTIFICATIONS
MCERTS: Sira MC 050067/07
EN 15267 – Air Quality – Ambient Air Automated Measuring Systems
EN 14212 – Ambient Air Measurement for SO2
For additional certifications, please contact Technical Support:
Toll-free Phone:
+1 858-657-9800
Fax:
+1 858-657-9816
Email:
06807F DCN7335
800-324-5190
Phone:
sda_techsupport@teledyne.com
25
Specifications, Approvals & Compliance
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
This page intentionally left blank.
26
06807F DCN7335
3. GETTING STARTED
This section addresses the procedures for unpacking the instrument and inspecting for
damage, presents clearance specifications for proper ventilation, introduces the
instrument layout, then presents the procedures for getting started: making electrical and
pneumatic connections, and conducting an initial calibration check.
3.1. UNPACKING THE T100 ANALYZER
CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Avoid personal injury: always use two persons to lift and carry the T100.
ATTENTION
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Printed Circuit Assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static
discharges (ESD) too small to be felt by the human nervous system.
Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies
will void the instrument warranty. Refer to the manual on Fundamentals
of ESD, PN 04786, which can be downloaded from our website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com under Help Center > Product Manuals in
the Special Manuals section.
CAUTION
Do not operate this instrument until you’ve removed dust plugs from
SAMPLE and EXHAUST ports on the rear panel!
Note
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API recommends that you store shipping containers/materials
for future use if/when the instrument should be returned to the factory for
repair and/or calibration service. See Warranty section in this manual and
shipping procedures on our Website at http://www.teledyne-api.com
under Customer Support > Return Authorization.
27
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Verify that there is no apparent external shipping damage. If damage has occurred,
please advise the shipper first, then Teledyne API.
Included with your analyzer is a printed record of the final performance characterization
performed on your instrument at the factory. It is titled Final Test and Validation Data
Sheet (P/N 04551). This record is an important quality assurance and calibration record
for this instrument. It should be placed in the quality records file for this instrument.
With no power to the unit, carefully remove the top cover of the analyzer and check for
internal shipping damage by carrying out the following steps:
1. Remove the two flat head, Phillips screws on the sides of the instrument;
2. Slide the cover backwards until it clears the analyzer’s front bezel, and;
3. Lift the cover straight up.
4. Inspect the interior of the instrument to ensure that all circuit boards and other
components are in good shape and properly seated.
5. Check the connectors of the various internal wiring harnesses and pneumatic
hoses to ensure that they are firmly and properly seated.
6. Verify that all of the optional hardware ordered with the unit has been installed.
These are listed on the paperwork accompanying the analyzer.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Never disconnect PCAs, wiring harnesses or electronic subassemblies
while under power.
3.1.1. VENTILATION CLEARANCE
Whether the analyzer is set up on a bench or installed into an instrument rack, be sure to
leave sufficient ventilation clearance.
Table 3-1: Ventilation Clearance
AREA
MINIMUM REQUIRED
CLEARANCE
Back of the instrument
4 in.
Sides of the instrument
1 in.
Above and below the
instrument
1 in.
Various rack mount kits are available for this analyzer. Refer to Section 1.4 of this
manual for more information.
28
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.2. INSTRUMENT LAYOUT
Instrument layout includes illustrations and descriptions of front panel and display, rear
panel connectors, and internal chassis layout.
3.2.1. FRONT PANEL
Figure 3-1 shows the analyzer’s front panel layout, followed by a close-up of the
display screen in Figure 3-2, which is described in Table 3-2. The two USB ports on the
front panel are provided for the connection of peripheral devices:
•
plug-in mouse (not included) to be used as an alternative to the touchscreen
interface
•
thumb drive (not included) to download updates to instruction software (contact
TAPI Technical Support for information).
Figure 3-1: Front Panel Layout
06807F DCN7335
29
Getting Started
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Figure 3-2: Display Screen and Touch Control
The front panel liquid crystal display screen includes touch control. Upon analyzer startup, the interface shows a splash screen and other initialization indicators before the
main display appears, similar to Figure 3-2 above (may or may not display a Fault
alarm). The LEDs on the display screen indicate the Sample, Calibration and Fault
states; also on the screen is the gas concentration field (Conc), which displays real-time
readouts for the primary gas and for the secondary gas if installed. The display screen
also shows what mode the analyzer is currently in, as well as messages and data
(Param). Along the bottom of the screen is a row of touch control buttons; only those
that are currently applicable will have a label. Table 3-2 provides detailed information
for each component of the screen.
ATTENTION
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Do not use hard-surfaced instruments such as pens to touch the control
buttons.
30
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Table 3-2: Display Screen and Touch Control Description
Field
Status
Description/Function
LEDs indicating the states of Sample, Calibration and Fault, as follows:
Name
Color
SAMPLE
Green
State
Off
On
Blinking
CAL
Yellow
Off
On
Blinking
FAULT
Red
Off
Blinking
Definition
Unit is not operating in sample mode, DAS is disabled.
Sample Mode active; Front Panel Display being updated; DAS data
being stored.
Unit is operating in sample mode, front panel display being updated,
DAS hold-off mode is ON, DAS disabled
Auto Cal disabled
Auto Cal enabled
Unit is in calibration mode
No warnings exist
Warnings exist
Conc
Displays the actual concentration of the sample gas currently being measured by the analyzer in the
currently selected units of measure
Mode
Displays the name of the analyzer’s current operating mode
Param
Displays a variety of informational messages such as warning messages, operational data, test function
values and response messages during interactive tasks.
Control Buttons
Displays dynamic, context sensitive labels on each button, which is blank when inactive until applicable.
Figure 3-3 shows how the front panel display is mapped to the menu charts illustrated in
this manual. The Mode, Param (parameters), and Conc (gas concentration) fields in the
display screen are represented across the top row of each menu chart. The eight touch
control buttons along the bottom of the display screen are represented in the bottom row
of each menu chart.
06807F DCN7335
31
Getting Started
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Figure 3-3: Display/Touch Control Screen Mapped to Menu Charts
Note
32
The menu charts in this manual contain condensed representations of the
analyzer’s display during the various operations being described. These
menu charts are not intended to be exact visual representations of the
actual display.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.2.2. REAR PANEL
Figure 3-4: Rear Panel Layout
Table 3-3 provides a description of each component on the rear panel.
06807F DCN7335
33
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Table 3-3: Rear Panel Description
Component
Function
cooling fan Pulls ambient air into chassis through side vents and exhausts through rear.
Connector for three-prong cord to apply AC power to the analyzer.
AC power CAUTION! The cord’s power specifications (specs) MUST comply with the power
connector specs on the analyzer’s rear panel Model number label
Model/specs label Identifies the analyzer model number and provides power specs
TO CONV (not used in this model)
FROM CONV (not used in this model)
Connect a gas line from the source of sample gas here.
SAMPLE Calibration gases are also inlet here on units without zero/span/shutoff valve options
installed.
Connect an exhaust gas line of not more than 10 meters long here that leads outside
EXHAUST the shelter or immediate area surrounding the instrument.
On units with zero/span/shutoff valve options installed, connect a gas line to the source
SPAN 1 of calibrated span gas here.
Used as a second cal gas input line when instrument is configured with zero/span
SPAN2/VENT valves and a dual gas option, or as a cal gas vent line when instrument is configured
with a pressurized span option (Call factory for details).
Internal Zero Air: On units with zero/span/shutoff valve options installed but no internal
ZERO AIR zero air scrubber attach a gas line to the source of zero air here.
RX TX LEDs indicate receive (RX) and transmit (TX) activity on the when blinking.
COM 2 Serial communications port for RS-232 or RS-485.
RS-232 Serial communications port for RS-232 only.
Switch to select either data terminal equipment or data communication equipment
DCE DTE during RS-232 communication. (Section 6.1).
STATUS For outputs to devices such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs).
ANALOG OUT For voltage or current loop outputs to a strip chart recorder and/or a data logger.
CONTROL IN For remotely activating the zero and span calibration modes.
ALARM Option for concentration alarms and system warnings.
ETHERNET Connector for network or Internet remote communication, using Ethernet cable
Option for external voltage signals from other instrumentation and for logging these
ANALOG IN signals
USB Connector for direct connection to personal computer, using USB cable.
Information Label Includes voltage and frequency specifications
34
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.2.3. INTERNAL CHASSIS LAYOUT
Figure 3-5 illustrates the internal layout of the chassis without options. Section 3.3.2
shows pneumatic diagrams for the basic configuration and for options.
Figure 3-5: Internal Layout, Basic (no Valve or Second Gas Options)
06807F DCN7335
35
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.3. CONNECTIONS AND SETUP
This section presents the electrical (Section 3.3.1) and pneumatic (Section 3.3.2)
connections for setup and preparing for instrument operation.
3.3.1. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Note
To maintain compliance with EMC standards, it is required that the cable
length be no greater than 3 meters for all I/O connections, which include
Analog In, Analog Out, Status Out, Control In, Ethernet/LAN, USB, RS-232,
and RS-485.
This section provides instructions for basic connections and for options. Table 3-4
provides a direct link to the instructions for the subsections that apply to your analyzer’s
configuration.
Table 3-4: Electrical Connections References
Connection
Section
Power
3.3.1.1
Analog Inputs (Option)
3.3.1.2
Analog Outputs
3.3.1.3
Current Loop Analog Outputs (Option),
and converting current to voltage output
3.3.1.4
Status Outputs
3.3.1.5
Control Inputs
3.3.1.6
Concentration Alarm Relay (Option)
3.3.1.7
Communications (Ethernet, USB,
RS-232, Multidrop, RS-485)*
3.3.1.8
* USB is an option with exceptions.
* RS-485 is an option and requires special setup (contact the Factory).
Either USB or RS-485 can be used; not both.
36
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.3.1.1. CONNECTING POWER
Attach the power cord to the analyzer and plug it into a power outlet capable of carrying
at least 10 Amps of current at your AC voltage and that it is equipped with a functioning
earth ground.
WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
High Voltages are present inside the analyzer’s case.
Power connection must have functioning ground connection.
Do not defeat the ground wire on power plug.
Power off analyzer before disconnecting or connecting electrical
subassemblies.
Do not operate analyzer with the cover off.
CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
To avoid damage to your analyzer, ensure that the AC power voltage
matches the voltage indicated on the Analyzer’s model identification label
on the rear panel before plugging the T100 into line power.
3.3.1.2. CONNECTING ANALOG INPUTS (OPTION)
The Analog In connector is used for connecting external voltage signals from other
instrumentation (such as meteorological instruments) and for logging these signals in the
analyzer’s internal Data Acquisition System (DAS). The input voltage range for each
analog input is 1-10 VDC, and input impedance is nominally 20kΩ in parallel with
0.1µF.
Figure 3-6: Analog In Connector
Pin assignments for the Analog In connector are presented in Table 3-5 .
06807F DCN7335
37
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Table 3-5: Analog Input Pin Assignments
PIN
1
Analog input # 1
AIN 1
2
Analog input # 2
AIN 2
3
Analog input # 3
AIN 3
4
Analog input # 4
AIN 4
5
Analog input # 5
AIN 5
6
Analog input # 6
AIN 6
7
Analog input # 7
AIN 7
8
Analog input # 8
AIN 8
Analog input Ground
N/A
GND
1
DAS
1
PARAMETER
DESCRIPTION
See Section 7 for details on setting up the DAS.
3.3.1.3. CONNECTING ANALOG OUTPUTS
The T100 is equipped with several analog output channels accessible through a
connector on the rear panel of the instrument. The standard configuration for these
outputs is mVDC. An optional current loop output is available for each (Section
3.3.1.4).
In default configuration, Channels A1 and A2 output a signal proportional to the SO2
concentration of the sample gas. Either can be used for connecting the analog output
signal to a chart recorder or for interfacing with a datalogger.
Channel A3 is only used on the T100 if the optional O2 or CO2 sensor is installed.
Channel A4 is special. It can be set by the user (refer to Section 5.9.9) to output any
one of the parameters accessible through the <TST TST> buttons of the unit’s sample
display.
To access these signals attach a strip chart recorder and/or data-logger to the appropriate
analog output connections on the rear panel of the analyzer.
ANALOG OUT
A1
+
A2
-
+
A3
-
+
A4
-
+
-
Figure 3-7: Analog Output Connector
38
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Table 3-6: Analog Output Pin Assignments
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ANALOG OUTPUT
A1
A2
A3
(Only used if an
optional O2 or CO2
sensor is installed)
A4
VOLTAGE SIGNAL
CURRENT SIGNAL
V Out
I Out +
Ground
I Out -
V Out
I Out +
Ground
I Out -
V Out
I Out +
Ground
I Out -
V Out
I Out +
Ground
I Out -
3.3.1.4. CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS (OPTION 41) SETUP
If your analyzer had this option installed at the factory, there are no further connections
to be made. The current loop option can be configured for any output range between 0
and 20 mA. Section 5.9.3.5 provides information on calibrating or adjusting these
outputs.
This section provides instructions for setting up the analog outputs for voltage and/or
current output. Figure 3-8 provides installation instructions and illustrates a sample
combination of one current output and two voltage outputs configuration.
•
For current output install the Current Loop option PCA on J19, on J21 or on J23 of
the motherboard.
•
For voltage output, install jumpers on J19, J21 and/or J23.
Following Figure 3-8 are instructions for converting current loop analog outputs to
standard 0-to-5 VDC outputs.
CAUTION – AVOID INVALIDATING WARRANTY
Servicing or handling of circuit components requires electrostatic
discharge protection (ESD), i.e. ESD grounding straps, mats and
containers. Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic
assemblies will void the instrument warranty. Refer to the manual on
Fundamentals of ESD, PN 04786, which can be downloaded from our
website at http://www.teledyne-api.com under Help Center > Product
Manuals in the Special Manuals section.
06807F DCN7335
39
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Figure 3-8: Current Loop Option Installed on the Motherboard
CONVERTING CURRENT LOOP ANALOG OUTPUTS TO STANDARD
VOLTAGE OUTPUTS
To convert an output configured for current loop operation to the standard 0 to 5 VDC
output operation:
1. Turn off power to the analyzer.
2. If a recording device was connected to the output being modified, disconnect it.
3. Remove the top cover
•
Remove the side-panel screw fastening the top cover to the unit.
•
Lift the cover straight up.
4. Disconnect the current loop option PCA from the appropriate connector on the
motherboard (refer to Figure 3-8).
5. Each connector, J19 and J23, requires two shunts. Place one shunt on the
two left most pins and the second shunt on the two pins next to it (refer to
Figure 3-8).
6. Reattach the top case to the analyzer.
The analyzer is now ready to have a voltage-sensing, recording device attached to that
output.
Calibrate the analog output as described in Section 5.9.3
40
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.3.1.5. CONNECTING THE STATUS OUTPUTS
The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors,
which sink up to 50 mA of DC current. These outputs can be used interface with
devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as Programmable Logic Controllers
(PLCs). Each status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC.
All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at the “D”
connector pin.
ATTENTION
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Most PLCs have internal provisions for limiting the current that the input
will draw from an external device. When connecting to a unit that does
not have this feature, an external dropping resistor must be used to limit
the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA. At 50 mA,
the transistor will drop approximately 1.2V from its collector to emitter.
The status outputs are accessed via a 12-pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel
labeled STATUS (Figure 3-9). Pin-outs for this connector are presented in Table 3-7.
5
6
7
8
D
+
DIAG MODE
4
SPAN CAL
3
HIGH RANGE
2
CONC VALI D
SYSTEM OK
1
ZERO CAL
STATUS
Figure 3-9: Status Output Connector
06807F DCN7335
41
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Table 3-7: Status Output Signals
REAR PANEL
LABEL
STATUS
DEFINITION
1
SYSTEM OK
ON if no faults are present.
2
CONC VALID
OFF any time the HOLD OFF feature is active, such as during calibration or when
other faults exist possibly invalidating the current concentration measurement
(example: sample flow rate is outside of acceptable limits).
ON if concentration measurement is valid.
3
HIGH RANGE
ON if unit is in high range of either the DUAL or Auto range modes.
4
ZERO CAL
ON whenever the instrument’s ZERO point is being calibrated.
5
SPAN CAL
ON whenever the instrument’s SPAN point is being calibrated.
6
DIAG MODE
CONDITION
ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode
7&8
D
SPARE
EMITTER BUS
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are bussed together.
SPARE
+
DC POWER
Digital Ground
+ 5 VDC, 300 mA source (combined rating with Control Output, if used).
The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies
3.3.1.6. CONNECTING THE CONTROL INPUTS
If you wish to use the analyzer to remotely activate the zero and span calibration modes,
several digital control inputs are provided through a 10-pin connector labeled
CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear panel.
There are two methods for energizing the control inputs. The internal +5V available
from the pin labeled “+” is the most convenient method (Figure 3-10, left). However, if
full isolation is required, an external 5 VDC power supply should be used (Figure 3-10,
right).
42
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
CONTROL IN
CONTROL IN
D
E
F
U
+
A
B
C
D
E
F
U
+
SPAN CAL
C
ZERO CAL
B
SPAN CAL
ZERO CAL
A
-
5 VDC Power
Supply
+
External Power Connections
Local Power Connections
Figure 3-10:
Control Input Connector
Table 3-8: Control Input Signals
Input #
Status Definition
ON Condition
A
REMOTE ZERO CAL
The analyzer is placed in Zero Calibration mode. The mode field of the
display will read ZERO CAL R.
B
REMOTE SPAN CAL
The analyzer is placed in span calibration mode as part of performing a low
span (midpoint) calibration. The mode field of the display will read LO CAL
R.
C, D, E & F
SPARE
Digital Ground
U
+
06807F DCN7335
External Power input
5 VDC output
The ground level from the analyzer’s internal DC power supplies (same as
chassis ground)
Input pin for +5 VDC is required to activate pins A – F.
Internally generated 5V DC power. To activate inputs A – F, place a jumper
between this pin and the “U” pin. The maximum amperage through this port
is 300 mA (combined with the analog output supply, if used).
43
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.3.1.7. CONNECTING THE CONCENTRATION ALARM RELAY (OPTION 61)
The concentration alarm option is comprised of four (4) “dry contact” relays on the rear
panel of the instrument. This relay option is different from and in addition to the
“Contact Closures” that come standard on all Teledyne API instruments. Each relay has
3 pins: Normally Open (NO), Common (C) and Normally Closed (NC).
Figure 3-11:
Alarm 1
“System OK 2”
Alarm 2
“Conc 1”
Alarm 3
“Conc 2”
Alarm 4
“Range Bit”
Concentration Alarm Relay
“ALARM 1” RELAY
Alarm 1, which is “System OK 2” (system OK 1 is the status bit), is in the energized
state when the instrument is “OK” and there are no warnings. If there is a warning
active or if the instrument is put into the “DIAG” mode, Alarm 1 will change states.
This alarm has “reverse logic” meaning that if you put a meter across the Common and
Normally Closed pins on the connector, you will find that it is OPEN when the
instrument is OK. This is so that if the instrument should turn off or lose power, it will
change states and you can record this with a data logger or other recording device.
“ALARM 2” RELAY & “ALARM 3” RELAY
Alarm 2 relay is associated with the “Concentration Alarm 1” set point in the software;
Alarm 3 relay is associated with the “Concentration Alarm 2” set point in the software.
Alarm 2 Relay
SO2 Alarm 1 = xxx PPM
Alarm 3 Relay
SO2 Alarm 2 = xxx PPM
Alarm 2 Relay
SO2 Alarm 1 = xxx PPM
Alarm 3 Relay
SO2 Alarm 2 = xxx PPM
Alarm 2 relay will be turned on any time the concentration value exceeds the set-point,
and will return to its normal state when the concentration value returns below the
concentration set-point.
Even though the relay on the rear panel is a non-latching alarm and resets when the
concentration goes back below the alarm set point, the warning on the front panel of the
instrument will remain latched until it is cleared. You can clear the warning on the front
panel either manually by pressing the CLR button on the front panel touch-screen or
remotely through the serial port.
44
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
It is possible to configure the alarms to have two alarm levels for each concentration.
SO2 Alarm 1 = 20 PPM
SO2 Alarm 2 = 100 PPM
SO2 Alarm 1 = 20 PPM
SO2 Alarm 2 = 100 PPM
In this example, SO2 Alarm 1 and SO2 Alarm 1 will both be associated with the “Alarm
2” relay on the rear panel. This allows you to have multiple alarm levels for individual
concentrations.
A more likely configuration for this would be to put one concentration on the “Alarm 1”
relay and the other concentration on the “Alarm 2” relay.
SO2 Alarm 1 = 20 PPM
SO2 Alarm 2 = Disabled
SO2 Alarm 1 = Disabled
SO2 Alarm 2 = 100 PPM
“ALARM 4” RELAY
This relay is connected to the “range bit”. If the instrument is configured for “Auto
Range” and the reading goes up into the high range, it will turn this relay on.
3.3.1.8. CONNECTING THE COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES
Available remote communications interfaces are: Ethernet, USB, RS-232, RS-232
Multidrop and RS-485. Use appropriate cables, and configure each type of
communication method through the SETUP>COMM menu, Section 6. Although
Ethernet is DHCP-enabled by default, it can also be configured manually (Section 6.5.1)
to set up a static IP address, which is the recommended setting when operating the
instrument via Ethernet.
ETHERNET CONNECTION
For network or Internet communication with the analyzer, connect an Ethernet cable
from the analyzer’s rear panel Ethernet interface connector to an Ethernet port. Please
refer to Section 6.5 for a description of the default configuration and setup instructions.
Configuration: Section 6.5
06807F DCN7335
•
manual configuration: Section 6.5.1
•
automatic configuration (default): Section 6.5.2
45
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
USB CONNECTION
For direct communication between the analyzer and a PC, connect a USB cable between
the analyzer rear panel and desktop or laptop USB ports, and ensure that their baud rates
match (Section 6.2.2).
Note
If this option is installed, the COM2 port cannot be used for anything
other than Multidrop communication.
Configuration: Section 6.5.3
RS-232 CONNECTION
For RS-232 communications with data terminal equipment (DTE) or with data
communication equipment (DCE) connect either a DB9-female-to-DB9-female cable
(Teledyne API part number WR000077) or a DB9-female-to-DB25-male cable (Option
60A, Section 1.4), as applicable, from the analyzer’s rear panel RS-232 port to the
device. Adjust the DCE-DTE switch (Figure 3-4) to select DTE or DCE as appropriate.
Configuration: Sections 5.7 and 6.3
IMPORTANT
46
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Cables that appear to be compatible because of matching connectors
may incorporate internal wiring that makes the link inoperable. Check
cables acquired from sources other than Teledyne API for pin
assignments (Figure 3-12) before using.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
RS-232 COM PORT CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS
Figure 3-12:
Rear Panel Connector Pin-Outs for RS-232 Mode
The signals from these two connectors are routed from the motherboard via a wiring
harness to two 10-pin connectors on the CPU card, J11 and J12 (Figure 3-13).
06807F DCN7335
47
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Figure 3-13:
Default Pin Assignments for CPU Com Port Connector (RS-232)
RS-232 COM PORT DEFAULT SETTINGS
As received from the factory, the analyzer is set up to emulate a DCE (Section 6.1) or
modem, with Pin 3 of the DB-9 connector designated for receiving data and Pin 2
designated for sending data.
RS-232: RS-232 (fixed) DB-9 male connector
•
Baud rate: 115200 bits per second (baud)
•
Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit
•
Parity: None
COM2: RS-232 (configurable to RS 485), DB-9 female connector.
•
Baud rate: 19200 bits per second (baud).
•
Data Bits: 8 data bits with 1 stop bit.
•
Parity: None.
Configuration: Section 6.3
48
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
RS-232 MULTIDROP (OPTION 62) CONNECTION
When the RS-232 Multidrop option is installed, connection adjustments and
configuration through the menu system are required. This section provides instructions
for the internal connection adjustments, then for external connections, and ends with
instructions for menu-driven configuration.
Note
ATTENTION
Because the RS-232 Multidrop option uses both the RS232 and COM2
DB9 connectors on the analyzer’s rear panel to connect the chain of
instruments, COM2 port is no longer available for separate RS-232 or
RS-485 operation.
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Printed Circuit Assemblies (PCAs) are sensitive to electro-static
discharges (ESD) too small to be felt by the human nervous system.
Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies
will void the instrument warranty. Refer to the manual on Fundamentals
of ESD, PN 04786, which can be downloaded from our website at
http://www.teledyne-api.com under Help Center > Product Manuals in
the Special Manuals section.
In each instrument with the Multidrop option there is a shunt that jumpers two pins on
the serial Multidrop and LVDS printed circuit assembly (PCA), as shown in Figure
3-14. This shunt must be removed from all instruments except that designated as last in
the multidrop chain, which must remain terminated. This requires powering off and
opening each instrument and making the following adjustments:
1. With NO power to the instrument, remove its top cover and lay the rear panel open
for access to the multidrop/LVDS PCA, which is seated on the CPU.
2. On the multidrop PCA’s JP2 connector, remove the shunt that jumpers Pins 21 ↔
22 as indicated in Figure 3-14. (Do this for all but the last instrument in the chain
where the shunt should remain at Pins 21 ↔ 22).
3. Check that the following cable connections are made in all instruments (again refer
to Figure 3-14):
• J3 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to the CPU’s COM1 connector
(Note that the CPU’s COM2 connector is not used in Multidrop)
• J4 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA to J12 on the motherboard
• J1 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCS to the front panel LCD
06807F DCN7335
49
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Figure 3-14:
Jumper and Cables for Multidrop Mode
Note: If you are adding an instrument to the end of a previously configured chain,
remove the shunt between Pins 21 ↔ 22 of JP2 on the Multidrop/LVDS PCA in the
instrument that was previously the last instrument in the chain.
4. Close the instrument.
5. Referring to Figure 3-15 use straight-through DB9 male  DB9 female cables to
interconnect the host RS232 port to the first analyzer’s RS232 port; then from the
first analyzer’s COM2 port to the second analyzer’s RS232 port; from the second
analyzer’s COM2 port to the third analyzer’s RS232 port, etc., connecting in this
fashion up to eight analyzers, subject to the distance limitations of the RS-232
standard.
6. On the rear panel of each analyzer, adjust the DCE DTE switch so that the green
and the red LEDs (RX and TX) of the COM1 connector (labeled RS232) are both lit.
(Ensure you are using the correct RS-232 cables internally wired specifically for RS232 communication; see Section 3.3.1.8 under “RS-232 Connection”.
7. BEFORE communicating from the host, power on the instruments and check that
the Machine ID code is unique for each (Section 5.7.1).
a. In the SETUP Mode menu go to SETUP>MORE>COMM>ID. The default ID is
typically the model number or “0”.
50
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
b. To change the identification number, press the button below the digit to be
changed.
c.
Press/select ENTER to accept the new ID for that instrument.
8. Next, in the SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM1 menu (do not use the COM2 menu for
multidrop), edit the COM1 MODE parameter as follows: press/select EDIT and set
only QUIET MODE, COMPUTER MODE, and MULTIDROP MODE to ON. Do not
change any other settings.
9. Press/select ENTER to accept the changed settings, and ensure that COM1 MODE
now shows 35.
10. Press/select SET> to go to the COM1 BAUD RATE menu and ensure it reads the
same for all instruments (edit as needed so that all instruments are set at the same
baud rate).
Note
The (communication) Host instrument can address only one instrument
at a time, each by its unique ID (see step 7 above).
Note
Teledyne API recommends setting up the first link, between the Host and
the first analyzer, and testing it before setting up the rest of the chain.
Female DB9
Host
Male DB9
RS-232 port
Analyzer
Analyzer
Analyzer
Last Analyzer
COM2
COM2
COM2
COM2
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
RS-232
Ensure jumper is
installed between
JP2 pins 21 ↔ 22
in last instrument
of multidrop chain.
Figure 3-15:
06807F DCN7335
RS-232-Multidrop PCA Host/Analyzer Interconnect Diagram
51
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
RS-485 CONNECTION (OPTION)
As delivered from the factory, COM2 is configured for RS-232 communications. This
port can be reconfigured for operation as a non-isolated, half-duplex RS-485 port. Using
COM2 for RS-485 communication disables the USB port. To reconfigure this port for
RS-485 communication, please contact the factory.
3.3.2. PNEUMATIC CONNECTIONS
This section provides not only pneumatic connection information, but also important
information about the gases required for accurate calibration (Section 3.3.2.11); it also
illustrates the pneumatic layouts for the analyzer in its basic configuration and with
options.
Before making the pneumatic connections, carefully note the following cautionary and
additional messages:
CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
SULFUR DIOXIDE (SO2) IS A TOXIC GAS.
DO NOT vent calibration gas and sample gas into enclosed areas. Obtain
a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for this material. Read and
rigorously follow the safety guidelines described there.
CAUTION
GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Sample and calibration gases should only come into contact with PTFE
(Teflon) or glass tubes and fixtures.
They SHOULD NOT come in contact with brass or stainless steel fittings
prior to the reaction cell.
The exhaust from the analyzer’s internal pump MUST be vented outside
the immediate area or shelter surrounding the instrument.
It is important to conform to all safety requirements regarding exposure
to SO2.
52
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
ATTENTION
Getting Started
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Maximum Pressure:
Ideally the maximum pressure of any gas at the sample inlet should
equal ambient atmospheric pressure and should NEVER exceed 1.5 inhg above ambient pressure.
Venting Pressurized Gas:
In applications where any gas (span gas, zero air supply, sample gas
is) received from a pressurized manifold, a vent must be provided to
equalize the gas with ambient atmospheric pressure before it enters
the analyzer to ensure that the gases input do not exceed the
maximum inlet pressure of the analyzer, as well as to prevent back
diffusion and pressure effects. These vents should be:
• at least 0.2m long
• no more than 2m long
• vented outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding the
instrument.
Dust Plugs:
Remove dust plugs from rear panel exhaust and supply line fittings
before powering on/operating instrument. These plugs should be kept
for reuse in the event of future storage or shipping to prevent debris
from entering the pneumatics.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
EPA Requirements:
US EPA requirements state that zero air and span gases must be
supplied at twice the instrument’s specified gas flow rate. Therefore,
the T100 zero and span gases should be supplied to their respective
inlets in excess of 1300 cc3/min (650 cc3/min. x 2).
Leak Check:
Run a leak check once the appropriate pneumatic connections have
been made; check all pneumatic fittings for leaks using the
procedures defined in Section 10.3.6.
CAUTION – GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Gas flow though the analyzer must be maintained at all time for units with
a permeation tube installed. Insufficient gas flow allows gas to build up
to levels that will contaminate the instrument or present a safety hazard
to personnel.
06807F DCN7335
53
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Section 3.3.2.1 provides external pneumatic connection instructions, and Table 3-9
provides links to the location of various internal pneumatic layout illustrations.
Table 3-9: Pneumatic Layout Reference
Pneumatic Layout
Section
Basic
3.3.2.2
Zero/Span Valves
3.3.2.3
Internal Zero/Span (IZS)
3.3.2.4
Basic with O2 Sensor
3.3.2.9
Basic with CO2 Sensor
3.3.2.10
3.3.2.1. BASIC CONNECTIONS INCLUDING W/SPAN GAS AND W/GAS DILUTION CALIBRATOR
Refer to Figure 3-4 and Table 3-3 while making the pneumatic connections as follows:
SAMPLE inlet
Connect ¼” gas line not more than 2 m long, from sample gas
source to this inlet.
When no zero/span/shutoff valve options, also connect line from
calibration gas source to this inlet, but only when a calibration
operation is actually being performed.
EXHAUST outlet
Connect exhaust line made of PTEF tubing; minimum O.D ¼”, to
this fitting. The exhaust line should be no longer than 10 meters,
and should lead outside the shelter or immediate area surrounding
the instrument.
Figure 3-16 and Figure 3-17 illustrate pneumatic connections for two of the possible
basic configurations.
54
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Calibrated
SO2 Gas at
VENT here if input
is pressurized
(Remove during
calibration)
span gas
concentration
MODEL T701
Zero Gas
Generator
Figure 3-16:
SAMPLE
VENT
EXHAUST
Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Bottled Span Gas
Source of
SAMPLE GAS
Calibrated
SO2 Gas
at ≥ span gas
concentration
Figure 3-17:
06807F DCN7335
Model T700 Gas
Dilution
Calibrator
VENT here if input
is pressurized
(Remove during
calibration)
SAMPLE
VENT
MODEL T701
Zero Gas
Generator
Chassis
Chassis
EXHAUST
Pneumatic Connections–Basic Configuration–Using Gas Dilution Calibrator
55
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.3.2.2. PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR BASIC CONFIGURATION
Chassis
HYDROCARBON
SCRUBBER
Particulate
Filter
SAMPLE
gas inlet
(Kicker)
EXHAUST
gas outlet
PMT
PUMP
UV
LAMP
VACUUM MANIFOLD
REACTION
CELL
FLOW
SENSOR
FLOW PRESSURE
SENSOR PCA
Figure 3-18:
56
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
T100 Gas Flow, Basic Configuration
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.3.2.3. PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR ZERO/SPAN VALVES OPTION
Figure 3-19 shows the internal, pneumatic connections for a T100 with the zero/span
valve option installed.
EXHAUST GAS
OUTLET
Chassis
KICKER EXHAUST
TO PUMP
PUMP
HYDROCARBON
SCRUBBER
(KICKER)
SAMPLE/CAL
VALVE
SAMPLE GAS
INLET
SAMPLE
CHAMBER
COM
NO
NC
UV
LAMP
SAMPLE FILTER
PMT
ZERO/SPAN
VALVE
SPAN 1 INLET
COM
NO
EXHAUST TO OUTER
LAYER OF KICKER
VACUUM MANIFOLD
NC
ZERO AIR INLET
Figure 3-19:
FLOW
CONTROL
ASSY
FLOW
SENSOR
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
FLOW / PRESSURE
SENSOR PCA
Pneumatic Layout with Zero/Span Valves Option
Table 3-10 describes the state of each valve during the analyzer’s various operational
modes.
Table 3-10: Zero/Span and Sample/Cal Valve Operating States
MODE
SAMPLE
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
VALVE
CONDITION
Sample/Cal
Open to SAMPLE inlet
Zero/Span
Open to ZERO AIR inlet
Sample/Cal
Open to zero/span inlet
Zero/Span
Open to ZERO AIR inlet
Sample/Cal
Open to zero/span inlet
Zero/Span
Open to SPAN GAS inlet
The state of the zero/span valves can also be controlled by any of the following means:
06807F DCN7335
•
manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls
located within the DIAG Menu (refer to Section 5.9.1)
•
by activating the instrument’s AutoCal feature (refer to Section 9.8)
57
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
•
remotely by using the external digital control inputs (refer to Section 8.1.2 and
Section 9.7.1)
•
remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (refer to Appendix A-6 for the
appropriate commands)
Sources of zero and span gas must be capable of supplying at least 1.55 L/min.
(maximum 2.5L/min). Both supply lines should be vented outside of the analyzer’s
enclosure. In order to prevent back-diffusion and pressure effects, these vent lines
should be between 2 and 10 meters in length.
3.3.2.4. PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR PRESSURIZED SPAN/AMBIENT ZERO OPTION
Figure 3-21 shows the internal, pneumatic connections for the analyzer with the
pressurized span ambient zero option installed.
Figure 3-20:
Pneumatic Layout with Pressurized Span/Ambient Zero Option
Table 3-11 describes the state of each valve during the analyzer’s various operational
modes.
Table 3-11: Zero/Span and Sample/Cal Valve Operating States
MODE
SAMPLE
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
58
VALVE
CONDITION
Sample/Cal
Open to SAMPLE inlet
Zero/Span
Open to ZERO AIR inlet
Sample/Cal
Open to zero/span inlet
Zero/Span
Open to ZERO AIR inlet
Sample/Cal
Open to zero/span inlet
Zero/Span
Open to SPAN GAS inlet
Press Span
Open to SPAN GAS inlet
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
The state of the zero/span valves can also be controlled by any of the following means:
•
manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls
located within the DIAG Menu (refer to Section 5.9.1)
•
by activating the instrument’s AutoCal feature (refer to Section 9.8)
•
remotely by using the external digital control inputs (refer to Section 8.1.2 and
Section 9.7.1)
•
remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (refer to Appendix A-6 for the
appropriate commands)
Sources of zero and span gas must be capable of supplying at least 1.55 L/min.
(maximum 2.5L/min). The supply line should be vented outside of the analyzer’s
enclosure. In order to prevent back-diffusion and pressure effects, these vent lines
should be between 2 and 10 meters in length.
3.3.2.5. PNEUMATIC LAYOUT FOR INTERNAL ZERO/SPAN (IZS) GAS GENERATOR OPTION
Figure 3-21 shows the internal, pneumatic connections for the analyzer with the IZS
option installed.
EXHAUST GAS
OUTLET
Chassis
KICKER EXHAUST
TO PUMP
PUMP
HYDROCARBON
SCRUBBER
SAMPLE GAS
INLET
COM
NO
NC
SAMPLE FILTER
(KICKER)
SAMPLE/CAL
VALVE
SAMPLE
CHAMBER
UV
LAMP
PMT
ZERO/SPAN
VALVE
COM
NO
EXHAUST TO OUTER LAYER
OF KICKER
VACUUM MANIFOLD
ZERO AIR
SCRUBBER
NC
IZS
Permeation
Tube
SO2 Source
CRITICAL
FLOW
ORIFICE
FLOW
SENSOR
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
CRITICAL
FLOW
ORIFICE
FLOW / PRESSURE
SENSOR PCA
ZERO AIR INLET
Figure 3-21:
06807F DCN7335
Pneumatic Layout with IZS Options
59
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
The internal zero air and span gas generator (IZS) option includes a heated enclosure
(Section 3.3.2.6) for a permeation tube (permeation tube must be purchased separately;
see Section 1.4, in SO2 IZS Permeation Tubes option), an external scrubber (Section
3.3.2.8) for producing zero air and a set of valves for switching between the sample gas
inlet and the output of the zero/span subsystem, functionally very similar to the valves
included in the zero/span valve option.
Table 3-12 describes the operational state of the valves associated with the IZS option
during the analyzer’s various operating modes.
Table 3-12: IZS Valve Operating States
MODE
SAMPLE
ZERO CAL
SPAN CAL
VALVE
CONDITION
Sample/Cal
Open to SAMPLE inlet
Zero/Span
Open to ZERO AIR inlet
Sample/Cal
Open to zero/span valve
Zero/Span
Open to ZERO AIR inlet
Sample/Cal
Open to zero/span valve
Zero/Span
Open to SPAN GAS inlet
The state of the IZS valves can also be controlled by any of the following means:
Note
•
Manually from the analyzer’s front panel by using the SIGNAL I/O controls under
the DIAG Menu (refer to Section 5.9.1),
•
By activating the instrument’s AutoCal feature (refer to Section 9.8),
•
Remotely by using the external digital control inputs (refer to Section 8.1.2 and
Section 9.7.1),
•
Remotely through the RS-232/485 serial I/O ports (refer to Appendix A-6 for the
applicable commands), or
•
Remotely via Ethernet
The permeation tube is not included in the IZS Option and must be
ordered separately. Refer to Section 1.4 for permeation tube options.
3.3.2.6. PERMEATION TUBE HEATER
In order to keep the permeation rate constant, the IZS enclosure is heated to a constant
50 C (10° above the maximum operating temperature of the instrument). The IZS heater
is controlled by a precise PID (Proportional/Integral/Derivative) temperature control
loop. A thermistor measures the actual temperature and reports it to the CPU for control
feedback.
The IZS option includes an external zero air scrubber assembly that removes all SO2 the
zero air source. The scrubber is filled with activated charcoal.
60
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.3.2.7. SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION VARIATION
Span gas is created when zero air passes over a permeation tube containing liquid SO2
under high pressure, which slowly permeates through a PTFE membrane into the
surrounding air. The speed at which the SO2 permeates the membrane is called the
effusion rate. The concentration of the span gas is determined by three factors:
•
Size of the membrane: The larger the area of the membrane, the more permeation
occurs.
•
Temperature of the SO2: Increasing the temperature of the increases the pressure
inside the tube and therefore increases the effusion rate.
•
Flow rate of the zero air: If the previous two variables are constant, the permeation
rate of air into the zero air stream will be constant. Therefore, a lower flow rate of
zero air produces higher concentrations of SO2. The T100 usually has a constant
flow rate and a constant permeation rate; hence, variations in concentration can be
achieved by changing the IZS temperature.
3.3.2.8. EXTERNAL ZERO AIR SCRUBBER
The IZS option includes an external zero air scrubber assembly that removes all SO2
from the zero air source. The scrubber is filled with activated charcoal.
06807F DCN7335
61
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.3.2.9. PNEUMATIC LAYOUT WITH O2 SENSOR OPTION
Figure 3-22 shows the internal, pneumatic connections for the analyzer with the oxygen
(O2) sensor option installed. Pneumatically, the O2 sensor draws a flow of 80 cm³/min in
addition to the normal sample flow rate. It is separately controlled with its own critical
flow orifice.
SAMPLE
GAS INLET
HYDROCARBON
SCRUBBER
Particulate
Filter
(Kicker)
O2 Sensor
Flow Control
Chassis
with O2 Sensor Option
O2
Sensor
PMT
EXHAUST
GAS OUTLET
REACTION
CELL
VACUUM MANIFOLD
PUMP
FLOW
SENSOR
FLOW PRESSURE
SENSOR PCA
Figure 3-22:
62
UV
LAMP
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
Pneumatic Layout with O2 Sensor
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.3.2.10. PNEUMATIC LAYOUT WITH CO2 SENSOR OPTION
Figure 3-23 shows the internal, pneumatic connections for the analyzer with the carbon
dioxide (CO2) sensor option installed. Pneumatically, the CO2 sensor is placed in line
with the sample gas line between the particulate filter and the analyzer’s sample
chamber. It does not alter the gas flow rate of the sample through the analyzer.
SAMPLE
GAS INLET
Particulate
Filter
HYDROCARBON
SCRUBBER
CO2
Probe
(Kicker)
Chassis
with CO2 Sensor Option
PMT
EXHAUST
GAS OUTLET
UV
LAMP
REACTION
CELL
VACUUM MANIFOLD
PUMP
FLOW
SENSOR
FLOW PRESSURE
SENSOR PCA
Figure 3-23:
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
Pneumatic Layout with CO2 Sensor
3.3.2.11. ABOUT ZERO AIR AND CALIBRATION (SPAN) GASES
Zero air and span gas are required for accurate calibration.
ZERO AIR
Zero air is a gas that is similar in chemical composition to the earth’s atmosphere but
without the gas being measured by the analyzer, in this case SO2. If your analyzer is
equipped with an Internal Zero Span (IZS) or an external zero air scrubber option, it is
capable of creating zero air.
For analyzers without an IZS or external zero air scrubber option, a zero air generator
such as the Teledyne API Model 701 can be used (Figure 3-16).
06807F DCN7335
63
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
CALIBRATION (SPAN) GAS
Calibration gas is specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the type of
gas being measured at near full scale of the desired measurement range. In this case,
SO2 measurements made with the Teledyne API T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer,
it is recommended that you use a span gas with a SO2 concentration equal to 80% of the
measurement range for your application.
EXAMPLE: If the application is to measure between 0 ppm and 500 ppb, an appropriate
span gas concentration would be 450 ppb SO2.
Cylinders of calibrated SO2 gas traceable to NIST-Standard Reference Material
specifications (also referred to as SRM’s or EPA protocol calibration gases) are
commercially available. Table 3-13 lists specific NIST-SRM reference numbers for
various concentrations of SO2.
Table 3-13: NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of SO2 Calibration Gases
NIST-SRM
Type
Nominal Concentration
1693a
Sulfur dioxide in N2
50 ppm
1694a
Sulfur dioxide in N2
100 pp
1661a
Sulfur dioxide in N2
500 ppm
2659a
O2 in N2
21% by weight
2626a
CO2 in N2
4% by weight
2
CO2 in N2
16% by weight
1
2745
1
2
Used to calibrate optional O2 sensor.
Used to calibrate optional CO2 sensor.
SPAN GAS FOR MULTIPOINT CALIBRATION
Some applications, such as EPA monitoring, require a multipoint calibration procedure
where span gases of different concentrations are needed. We recommend using a bottle
of calibrated SO2 gas of higher concentration in conjunction with a gas dilution
calibrator such as a Teledyne API Model T700 (Figure 3-17). This type of calibrator
precisely mixes a high concentration gas with zero air (both supplied externally) to
accurately produce span gas of the correct concentration. Linearity profiles can be
automated with this model and run unattended over night.
If a dynamic dilution system is used to dilute high concentration gas standards to low,
ambient concentrations, ensure that the SO2 concentration of the reference gas matches
the dilution range of the calibrator.
Choose the SO2 gas concentration so that the dynamic dilution system operates in its
mid-range and not at the extremes of its dilution capabilities.
EXAMPLE:
64
•
A dilution calibrator with 10-10000 dilution ratio will not be able to accurately
dilute a 5000 ppm SO2 gas to a final concentration of 500 ppb, as this would operate
at the very extreme dilution setting.
•
A 100 ppm SO2 gas in nitrogen is much more suitable to calibrate the T100 analyzer
(dilution ratio of 222, in the mid-range of the system’s capabilities).
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.4. STARTUP, FUNCTIONAL CHECKS, AND INITIAL
CALIBRATION
If you are unfamiliar with the T100 principles of operation, we recommend that you
read Section 12. For information on navigating the analyzer’s software menus, refer to
the menu trees provided in Appendix A.
CAUTION - GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Do not look at the UV lamp while the unit is operating. UV light can
cause eye damage. Always use safety glasses made from UV blocking
material whenever working with the UV Lamp. (Generic plastic glasses
are not adequate).
3.4.1. STARTUP
After the electrical and pneumatic connections are made, run an initial functional
check. Turn on the instrument. The pump and exhaust fan should start immediately.
The display will show a momentary splash screen of the Teledyne API logo and other
information during the initialization process while the CPU loads the operating system,
the firmware and the configuration data.
The analyzer should automatically switch to Sample Mode after completing the boot-up
sequence and start monitoring the gas. However, there is an approximately one hour
warm-up period before reliable gas measurements can be taken. During the warm-up
period, the front panel display may show messages in the Parameters field.
3.4.2. WARNING MESSAGES
Because internal temperatures and other conditions may be outside the specified limits
during the analyzer’s warm-up period, the software will suppress most warning
conditions for 30 minutes after power up. If warning messages persist after the 60
minutes warm up period is over, investigate their cause using the troubleshooting
guidelines in Section 11.1.1.
To view and clear warning messages, press:
Suppresses the
warning messages
SAMPLE
TEST
SAMPLE
<TST TST>
NOTE:
If a warning message persists after
several attempts to clear it, the message
may indicate a real problem and not an
artifact of the warm-up period
Once the last warning has been cleared,
the RANGE function will be displayed in
the analyzer’s Param field.
SAMPLE
TEST
SAMPLE
<TST TST>
Figure 3-24:
06807F DCN7335
SYSTEM RESET
CAL
CLR SETUP
RANGE=500.0 PPB
CAL
MSG
SETUP
SYSTEM RESET
CAL
CLR SETUP
RANGE=500.0 PPB
CAL
MSG returns the active
warnings to the message
field.
Press CLR to clear the current
message.
(If more than one warning is
active, the next message will
take its place until all warning
messages have been cleared.)
SETUP
Warning Messages
65
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Table 3-14 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start
up for T100 analyzers with no options installed.
Table 3-14:
Possible Startup Warning Messages – T100 Analyzers w/o Options
Message
Meaning
ANALOG CAL WARNING
BOX TEMP WARNING
Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to
turned on.
CANNOT DYN ZERO
3
Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned
on.
CONFIG INITIALIZED
Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased.
DARK CAL WARNING
Dark offset above limit specified indicating that too much stray light is present in
the sample chamber.
DATA INITIALIZED
HVPS WARNING
PMT DET WARNING
PMT TEMP WARNING
66
High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified limits.
PMT detector output is outside of operational limits.
PMT temperature is outside of specified limits.
Sample chamber temperature is outside of specified limits.
REAR BOARD NOT DET
CPU unable to communicate with motherboard.
RELAY BOARD WARN
CPU is unable to communicate with the relay PCA.
SAMPLE FLOW WARN
The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
SAMPLE PRESS WARN
Sample gas pressure outside of operational parameters.
1
UV LAMP WARNING
3
DAS data storage was erased.
RCELL TEMP WARNING
SYSTEM RESET
2
The temperature inside the T100 chassis is outside the specified limits.
2
CANNOT DYN SPAN
1
The instrument's A/D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated.
The computer was rebooted.
The UV lamp intensity measured by the reference detector reading too low or
too high.
Clears 45 minutes after power up.
Clears the next time successful zero calibration is performed.
Clears the next time successful span calibration is performed.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
Table 3-15 lists brief descriptions of the warning messages that may occur during start
up for T100 analyzers with optional second gas options or alarms installed.
Table 3-15:
Possible Startup Warning Messages – T100 Analyzers with Options
Message
Meaning
1
O2 CELL TEMP WARN
On units with IZS options installed: The permeation tube temperature is outside
of specified limits.
2
IZS TEMP WARNING
1, 4
O2 Alarm limit #1 has been triggered.
1, 4
O2 Alarm limit #2 has been triggered.
4
O2 ALARM 1 WARN
4
O2 ALARM 2 WARN
3, 4
CO2 Alarm limit #1 has been triggered.
4
3, 4
CO2 Alarm limit #2 has been triggered.
4
CO2 ALARM 1 WARN
CO2 ALARM 2 WARN
SO2 Alarm limit #1 has been triggered.
4
4
SO2 Alarm limit #2 has been triggered.
4
SO2 ALARM2 WARN
2
3
4
`
4
SO2 ALARM1 WARN
1
O2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits.
Only appears when the optional O2 sensor is installed.
Only appears when the optional internal zero span (IZS) option is installed.
Only appears when the optional CO2 sensor is installed.
Only appears when the optional gas concentration alarms are installed
3.4.3. FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
After the analyzer’s components have warmed up for at least 60 minutes, verify that the
software properly supports any hardware options that were installed.
For information on navigating through the analyzer’s software menus, refer to the menu
trees described in Appendix A.
Check to ensure that the analyzer is functioning within allowable operating parameters.
06807F DCN7335
•
Appendix C includes a list of test functions viewable from the analyzer’s front panel
as well as their expected values.
•
These functions are also useful tools for diagnosing performance problems with
your analyzer (refer to Section 11.1.2).
•
The Final Test and Validation Data Sheet (P/N 04551) included in the shipment
lists these values before the instrument left the factory.
67
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
To view the current values of these parameters press the following control button
sequence on the analyzer’s front panel. Remember until the unit has completed its
warm up these parameters may not have stabilized.
SAMPLE
<TST
RANGE=500.00 PPB
TST> CAL
SO2=XXXX
SETUP
Toggle <TST TST> buttons
to scroll through list of
functions
1
2
3
4
5
6
This will match the currently selected units of measure for
the range being displayed.
Only appears if the CO2 sensor option is installed.
Only appears if the O2 sensor option is installed.
The STABIL function can be set to display data related to
any of the gasses the analyzer measures, e.g. (if either
the CO2 option or the O2 sensor option is installed).
Only appears if the IZS option is installed.
Only appears if analog output A4 is actively reporting a
TEST FUNCTION
Figure 3-25:
68
• RANGE=[Value]PPB 1
• RANGE1=[Value]PPB 1
• RANGE2=[Value]PPB 1
• SO2 RNG=[Value]PPB1, 2, 3
• SO2 RN1=[Value]PPB1, 2, 3
• SO2 RN2=[Value]PPB1, 2, 3
• CO2 RNG=[Value]%2
• O2 RNG=[Value]%3
• STABIL=[Value]PPM4
• RSP=[Value] SEC
• PRES=[Value]IN-HG-A
• SAMP FL=[Value]CC/M
• PMT =[Value]MV
• NORM PMT=[Value]MV
• UV LAMP=[Value]MV
• LAMP RATIO=[Value]%
• STR LGT=[Value]PPB
• DRK PMT=[Value]MV
• DRK LMP =[Value]MV
• SLOPE=[Value]
• OFFSET=[Value]MV
• CO2 SLOPE=[Value]2
• CO2 OFFSET=[Value]MV2
• O2 SLOPE=[Value]3
• O2 OFFSET=[Value]MV3
• HVPS =[Value]VOLTS
• RCELL ON=[Value]SEC
• RCELL TEMP=[Value]ºC
• O2 CELL TEMP=[Value]ºC2
• BOX TEMP=[Value]ºC
• PMT TEMP=[Value]º
• IZS TEMP=[Value]ºC5
• PHT DRIVE =[Value]MV
• TEST=[Value]MV6
• TIME=[HH:MM:SS]
Functional Check
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
3.4.4. INITIAL CALIBRATION
To perform the following calibration you must have sources for zero air and span gas
available for input into the sample port on the back of the analyzer. Refer to Section
3.3.2 for instructions for connecting these gas sources.
The initial calibration should be carried out using the same reporting range set-up as
used during the analyzer’s factory calibration. This will allow you to compare your
calibration results to the factory calibration as listed on the Final Test and Validation
Data Sheet, P/N 04551.
If both available DAS parameters for a specific gas type are being reported via the
instrument’s analog outputs (e.g. CONC1 and CONC2 when the DUAL range mode is
activated), separate calibrations should be carried out for each parameter.
•
Use the LOW button when calibrating for CONC1 (equivalent to RANGE1).
•
Use the HIGH button when calibrating for CONC2 (equivalent to RANGE2).
Refer to the Configurable Analog Output Addendum, P/N 06270 for more information
on the configurable analog output reporting ranges.
Note
The following procedure assumes that the instrument does not have any
of the available valve options installed. Refer to Section 9.4 for
instructions for calibrating instruments possessing valve options
Note
The T100 analyzer has been tested for its ability to reject interference for
most sources. See Section 12.1.9 for more information on this topic.
3.4.4.1. INITIAL CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR BASIC ANALYZERS (NO 2ND GAS OPTION)
The following procedure assumes that:
•
The instrument DOES NOT have any of the available calibration valve or gas inlet
options installed;
•
Cal gas will be supplied through the SAMPLE gas inlet on the back of the analyzer
(refer to Figure 3-4);
•
The pneumatic setup matches that described in Section 3.3.2.
VERIFYING THE REPORTING RANGE SETTINGS
While it is possible to perform the following procedure with any range setting we
recommend that you perform this initial checkout using following reporting range
settings:
06807F DCN7335
•
Unit of Measure: PPB
•
Analog Output Reporting Range: 500.0 ppb
•
Mode Setting: SNGL
69
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
While these are the default settings for the T100 analyzer, it is recommended that you
verify them before proceeding with the calibration procedure, by pressing:
SAMPLE
<TST
RANGE=500.0 PPB
SO2= XXXX
TST> CAL
SETUP
SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
Verify that the MODE
is set for SNGL.
If it is not, press
SINGL then ENTR
Verify that the RANGE is
set for 500.0
If it is not, toggle each
numeric button until the
proper range is set, then
press ENTR.
Verify that the UNITs
is set for PPM
If it is not, press
PPM then ENTR
SETUP
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET
UNIT
SETUP
RANGE MODE:SNGL
ENTR EXIT
SETUP
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET
UNIT
SETUP
RANGE: 500.0 Conc
0
5
EXIT
0
0
.0
SETUP
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET
UNIT
SETUP
CONC UNITS:PPM
PPB
Figure 3-26:
70
EXIT
SNGL DUAL AUTO
0
EXIT
PPM UGM MGM
ENTR EXIT
EXIT
Press EXIT
3x’s to return
the unit to the
SAMPLE mode
ENTR EXIT
Reporting Range Verification
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
DILUTION RATIO SETUP
If the dilution ratio option is enabled on your T100 and your application involves
diluting the sample gas before it enters the analyzer, set the dilution ratio as follows:
SAMPLE
<TST
RANGE=500.0 PPB
SO2= XXXX
TST> CAL
SETUP
SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP
Toggle these buttons to
set the dilution factor.
This is the number by
which the analyzer will
multiply the SO2
concentration of the gas
passing through the
reaction cell.
UNIT
Only appears if the
optional O 2 sensor
is installed.
DIL
EXIT
SO2 DIL FACTOR:1.0 Gain
0
0
SETUP
1
.0
ENTR EXIT
SO2 DIL FACTOR 20.0 Gain
0
SETUP
0
0
2
0
.0
ENTR EXIT
CO2 DIL FACTOR:1.0 Gain
0
0
0
1
.0
EXIT ignores the
new setting.
ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the
new setting.
SETUP
0
O2 DIL FACTOR:1.0 Gain
0
0
Figure 3-27:
06807F DCN7335
0
EXAMPLE
0
Only appears if the
optional CO2 sensor
is installed.
RANGE CONTROL MENU
SETUP
0
EXIT
0
1
.0
ENTR EXIT
Dilution Ratio Setup
71
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
SET SO2 SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION
Set the expected SO2 span gas concentration. This should be 80% of the concentration
range for which the analyzer’s analog output range is set.
SAMPLE
<TST
Only appears if either
the optional O2 or CO2
sensors are installed.
RANGE=500.0 PPB
SO2= XXXX
TST> CAL
SAMPLE
CO
SETUP
GAS TO CAL:CO
O2
ENTR EXIT
SAMPLE
RANGE TO CAL:LOW
LOW HIGH
M-P CAL
ENTR EXIT
RANGE=400.0 PPB
SO2= XXXX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC
M-P CAL
The SO2 span concentration value
is automatically default to
400.0 PPB.
If this is not the the concentration of
the span gas being used, toggle
these buttons to set the correct
concentration of the SO2 calibration
gas.
0
0
0
.0
0
ENTR EXIT
EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the
CONCENTRATION
MENU.
Figure 3-28:
72
EXIT
SO2 SPAN CONC:400.0 Conc
4
Only appears if either
the analyzer is set for
DUAL range mode.
SO2 Span Gas Setting
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Getting Started
ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION
To perform the zero/span calibration procedure (see Section 9 for manual and automatic
calibration procedures, including with valve options), press:
SAMPLE
RANGE=500.0 PPB
< TST TST >
SO2= XXXX
CAL
SETUP
Set the Display to show
the STABIL test function.
This function calculates
the stability of the SO2
measurement.
Toggle TST> button until ...
SAMPLE
STABIL= XXXX PPB
< TST TST >
SO2=XXX.X
CAL
SETUP
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until STABIL
falls below 0.5 ppb.
This may take several
minutes.
SAMPLE
STABIL= XXXX PPB
< TST TST >
M-P CAL
M-P CAL
SETUP
STABIL= XXXX PPB
<TST TST>
SO2=XXX.X
CAL
SO2=XXX.X
ZERO CONC
STABIL= XXXX PPB
<TST TST> ENTR
EXIT
SO2=XXX.X
CONC
EXIT
Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for the SO2
measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.
Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until STABIL
falls below 0.5 ppb.
This may take several
minutes.
SAMPLE
< TST TST >
STABIL= XXXX PPB
CAL
SO2=XXX.X
SETUP
The SPAN button now
appears during the transition
from zero to span.
You may see both buttons.
If either the ZERO or SPAN
buttons fail to appear see the
Troubleshooting section for
tips.
M-P CAL
STABIL= XXXX PPB
SO2=XXX.X
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC
EXIT
M-P CAL
STABIL= XXXX PPB
<TST TST> ENTR
M-P CAL
CONC
EXIT
STABIL= XXXX PPB
SO2=XXX.X
<TST TST> ENTR
Figure 3-29:
06807F DCN7335
SO2=XXX.X
CONC
EXIT
Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for the SO2
measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.
EXIT at this point
returns to the
SAMPLE menu.
Zero/Span Calibration Procedure
73
Getting Started
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
3.4.4.2. CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR THE O2 OPTION
If your analyzer is equipped with the optional O2 sensor, this sensor should be calibrated
during installation of the instrument. Refer to Section 9.10.1 for instructions.
3.4.4.3. CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR THE CO2 OPTION
If your analyzer is equipped with the optional CO2 sensor, this sensor should be
calibrated during installation of the instrument. Refer to Section 9.10.2 for instructions.
Note
74
Once you have completed the above set-up procedures, please fill out
the Quality Questionnaire that was shipped with your unit and return it
to Teledyne API. This information is vital to our efforts in continuously
improving our service and our products. THANK YOU.
06807F DCN7335
4. OVERVIEW OF OPERATING MODES
To assist in navigating the analyzer’s software, a series of menu trees can be found in
Appendix A of this manual.
Note
Some control buttons on the touch screen do not appear if they are not
applicable to the menu that you’re in, the task that you are performing, the
command you are attempting to send, or to incorrect settings input by the
user. For example, the ENTR button may disappear if you input a setting
that is invalid or out of the allowable range for that parameter, such as
trying to set the 24-hour clock to 25:00:00. Once you adjust the setting to
an allowable value, the ENTR button will re-appear.
The T100 software has a variety of operating modes. Most commonly, the analyzer will
be operating in SAMPLE mode. In this mode, a continuous read-out of the SO2
concentration can be viewed on the front panel and output as an analog voltage from
rear panel terminals, calibrations can be performed, and TEST functions and
WARNING messages can be examined.
The second most important operating mode is SETUP mode. This mode is used for
performing certain configuration operations, such as for the DAS system, the reporting
ranges, or the serial (RS-232 / RS-485 / Ethernet) communication channels. The SET
UP mode is also used for performing various diagnostic tests during troubleshooting.
06807F DCN7335
75
Overview of Operating Modes
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Figure 4-1: Front Panel Display
The Mode field of the front panel display indicates to the user which operating mode the
unit is currently running.
In addition to SAMPLE and SETUP, other modes available are presented in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1: Analyzer Operating Modes
MODE
EXPLANATION
DIAG
One of the analyzer’s diagnostic modes is active (refer to Section 5.9).
1
Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer’s
AUTOCAL feature
LO CAL R
1
Unit is performing LOW SPAN (midpoint) calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or
digital control inputs.
1
This is the basic calibration mode of the instrument and is activated by pressing the CAL button.
LO CAL A
M-P CAL
SAMPLE
Sampling normally, flashing text indicates adaptive filter is on.
SAMPLE A
Indicates that unit is in SAMPLE mode and AUTOCAL feature is activated.
SETUP
SETUP mode is being used to configure the analyzer. The gas measurement will continue during
this process.
2
Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated automatically by the analyzer’s AUTOCAL feature
2
Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated manually by the user.
2
Unit is performing SPAN calibration initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital control
inputs.
2
Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated automatically by the AUTOCAL feature
2
Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated manually by the user.
2
Unit is performing ZERO calibration procedure initiated remotely through the COM ports or digital
control inputs.
SPAN CAL A
SPAN CAL M
SPAN CAL R
ZERO CAL A
ZERO CAL M
ZERO CAL R
1
2
76
Other calibration procedures under CAL mode are described separately in Section 9.
Only Appears on units with Z/S valve or IZS options.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Overview of Operating Modes
4.1. SAMPLE MODE
This is the analyzer’s standard operating mode. In this mode, the instrument is analyzing
SO2 and calculating concentrations.
4.1.1. TEST FUNCTIONS
A series of test functions is available at the front panel while the analyzer is in
SAMPLE mode. These parameters provide information about the present operating
status of the instrument and are useful during troubleshooting (refer to Section 11.1.2).
They can also be recorded in one of the DAS channels (refer to Section 7) for data
analysis. To view the test functions, press one of the <TST TST> buttons repeatedly in
either direction.
06807F DCN7335
77
Overview of Operating Modes
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Table 4-2: Test Functions Defined
DISPLAY
PARAMETER
UNITS
RANGE
RANGE
--
PPB, PPM,
UGM & MGM
RANGE1
RANGE2
DESCRIPTION
The Full Scale limit at which the reporting range of the analyzer’s
ANALOG OUTPUTS is currently set.
THIS IS NOT the Physical Range of the instrument. Refer to Section
5.4 for more information.
If DUAL or AUTO Range modes have been selected, two RANGE
functions will appear, one for each range.
STABIL
STABILITY
mV
PRES
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
in-Hg-A
The current pressure of the sample gas as it enters the sample
chamber, measured between the SO2 and Auto-Zero valves.
SAMP FL
SAMPLE FLOW
cm³/min
(cc/m)
The flow rate of the sample gas through the sample chamber. This
value is not measured but calculated from the sample pressure.
PMT
PMT Signal
mV
The raw output voltage of the PMT.
NORM PMT
NORMALIZED
PMT Signal
mV
The output voltage of the PMT after normalization for offset and
temperature/pressure compensation (if activated).
UV LAMP
Source UV Lamp
Intensity
mV
The output voltage of the UV reference detector.
LAMP
RATIO
UV Source lamp
ratio
%
The current output of the UV reference detector divided by the reading
stored in the CPU’s memory from the last time a UV Lamp calibration
was performed.
STR. LGT
Stray Light
ppb
The offset due to stray light recorded by the CPU during the last zeropoint calibration performed.
DRK PMT
Dark PMT
mV
The PMT output reading recorded the last time the UV source lamp
shutter was closed.
DRK LMP
Dark UV Source
Lamp
mV
The UV reference detector output reading recorded the last time the
UV source lamp shutter was closed.
SLOPE
SO2
measurement
Slope
-
OFFSET
SO2
measurement
Offset
mV
Standard deviation of SO2 Concentration readings. Data points are
recorded every ten seconds. The calculation uses the last 25 data
points.
The sensitivity of the instrument as calculated during the last
calibration activity. The slope parameter is used to set the span
calibration point of the analyzer.
The overall offset of the instrument as calculated during the last
calibration activity. The offset parameter is used to set the zero point
of the analyzer response.
HVPS
HVPS
V
The PMT high voltage power supply.
RCELL
TEMP
SAMPLE
CHAMBER TEMP
°C
The current temperature of the sample chamber.
BOX TEMP
BOX
TEMPERATURE
°C
The ambient temperature of the inside of the analyzer case.
PMT TEMP
PMT
TEMPERATURE
°C
The current temperature of the PMT.
IZS
1
TEMPERATURE
°C
The current temperature of the internal zero/span option. Only
appears when IZS option is enabled.
mV
Signal of a user-defined test function on output channel A4.
1
IZS TEMP
TEST
2
TIME
TEST SIGNAL
CLOCK TIME
2
hh:mm:ss
The current day time for DAS records and calibration events.
1
Only appears if Internal Gas Span Generator option is installed.
2
Only appears if analog output A3 is actively reporting a test function.
78
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Overview of Operating Modes
To view the TEST Functions press the following button sequence:
SAMPLE
<TST
RANGE=500.00 PPB
TST> CAL
SO2=XXXX
SETUP
Toggle <TST TST> buttons
to scroll through list of
functions
1
2
Only appears if the IZS option is installed.
Only appears if analog output A4 is actively reporting a
TEST FUNCTION
• RANGE
• STABIL
• RSP
• PRES
• SAMP FL
• PMT
• NORM PMT
• UV LAMP
• LAMP RATIO
• STR LGTB
• DRK PMT
• DRK LMP
• SLOPE
• OFFSET
• HVPS
• RCELL ON
• RCELL TEMP
• BOX TEMP
• PMT TEMP
• IZS TEMP1
• PHT DRIVE
• TEST2
• TIME
Figure 4-2: Viewing T100 TEST Functions
IMPORTANT
06807F DCN7335
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of the TEST functions indicates an
out-of-range reading or the analyzer’s inability to calculate it. All
pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute pressure.
Absolute, atmospheric pressure is 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It
decreases about 1 in-Hg per 300 m gain in altitude. A variety of factors
such as air conditioning and passing storms can cause changes in the
absolute atmospheric pressure.
79
Overview of Operating Modes
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
4.1.2. WARNING MESSAGES
The most common instrument failures will be reported as a warning on the analyzer’s
front panel and through the COMM ports. Section 11.1.1 explains how to use these
messages to troubleshoot problems. Section 11.1.3 shows how to view and clear
warning messages. Table 4-3 lists the warning messages for the current version of
software.
Table 4-3: List of Warning Messages
MESSAGE
ANALOG CAL WARNING
BOX TEMP WARNING
CANNOT DYN SPAN
CANNOT DYN ZERO
CONFIG INITIALIZED
DARK CAL WARNING
DATA INITIALIZED
HVPS WARNING
IZS TEMP WARNING
PMT DET WARNING
PMT TEMP WARNING
RCELL TEMP WARNING
REAR BOARD NOT DET
RELAY BOARD WARN
SAMPLE FLOW WARN
SAMPLE PRESS WARN
SYSTEM RESET
UV LAMP WARNING
MEANING
The instrument's A/D circuitry or one of its analog outputs is not calibrated.
The temperature inside the T100 chassis is outside the specified limits.
Remote span calibration failed while the dynamic span feature was set to turned on
Remote zero calibration failed while the dynamic zero feature was set to turned on
Configuration was reset to factory defaults or was erased.
Dark offset above limit specified indicating that too much stray light is present in the
sample chamber.
DAS data storage was erased.
High voltage power supply for the PMT is outside of specified limits.
On units with IZS options installed: The permeation tube temperature is outside of
specified limits.
PMT detector output outside of operational limits.
PMT temperature is outside of specified limits.
Sample chamber temperature is outside of specified limits.
The CPU is unable to communicate with the motherboard.
The firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
The flow rate of the sample gas is outside the specified limits.
Sample pressure outside of operational parameters.
The computer was rebooted.
The UV lamp intensity measured by the reference detector reading too low or too
high
To view and clear warning messages, press:
SAMPLE
TEST ignores warning messages
TEST
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
CAL
SAMPLE
MSG
RANGE=500.000 PPM
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
NOTE:
If the warning message persists
after several attempts to clear it,
the message may indicate a real
problem and not an artifact of the
warm-up period.
TEST
MSG
HVPS WARNING
CAL
Make sure warning messages are
not due to real problems.
MSG
SO2 =XXX.X
CLR
SETUP
SO2=XXX.X
CLR
SETUP
SO2=XXX.X
CLR
SETUP
MSG activates warning
messages.
<TST TST> buttons replaced with
TEST button
Press CLR to clear the current
message.
If more than one warning is active, the
next message will take its place
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE mode.
Figure 4-3: Viewing and Clearing T100 WARNING Messages
80
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Overview of Operating Modes
4.2. CALIBRATION MODE
Pressing the CAL button switches the analyzer into calibration mode. In this mode, the
user can calibrate the instrument with the use of calibrated zero or span gases.
If the instrument includes either the zero/span valve option or IZS option, the display
will also include CALZ and CALS buttons. Pressing either of these buttons also puts
the instrument into multipoint calibration mode.
•
The CALZ button is used to initiate a calibration of the zero point.
•
The CALS button is used to calibrate the span point of the analyzer. It is
recommended that this span calibration is performed at 80% of full scale of the
analyzer’s currently selected reporting range.
Because of their critical importance and complexity, calibration operations are described
in detail in other sections of the manual:
IMPORTANT
•
Section 9 details basic calibration and calibration check operations.
•
Section 0 provides references for performing an EPA protocol calibration.
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
To avoid inadvertent adjustments to critical settings, activate calibration
security by enabling password protection in the SETUP – PASS menu
(5.5).
4.3. SETUP MODE
The SETUP mode is used to configure the analyzer’s hardware and software features,
perform diagnostic procedures, gather information on the instrument’s performance and
configure or access data from the internal data acquisition system (DAS). For a visual
representation of the software menu trees, refer to Appendix A. Setup Mode is divided
between Primary and Secondary Setup menus and can be protected through password
security.
4.3.1. PASSWORD SECURITY
Setup Mode can be protected by password security through the SETUP>PASS menu
(Section 5.5) to prevent unauthorized or inadvertent configuration adjustments.
06807F DCN7335
81
Overview of Operating Modes
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
4.3.2. PRIMARY SETUP MENU
Table 4-4: Primary Setup Mode Features and Functions
MODE OR FEATURE
CONTROL
BUTTON
Analyzer Configuration
CFG
Auto Cal Feature
ACAL
Used to set up and operate the AutoCal feature.
Only appears if the analyzer has one of the internal valve
options installed.
5.2 & 9.8
Internal Data Acquisition
(DAS)
DAS
Used to set up the DAS system and view recorded data.
5.3 & 7
Analog Output Reporting
Range Configuration
RNGE
Used to configure the output signals generated by the
instrument’s Analog outputs.
5.4
Calibration Password Security
PASS
Turns the calibration password protection feature ON/OFF.
5.5
Internal Clock Configuration
CLK
Used to Set or adjust the instrument’s internal clock.
5.6
Advanced SETUP features
MORE
MANUAL
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
Lists key hardware and software configuration information.
This button accesses the instruments secondary setup menu.
5.1
See
Table 4-5
4.3.3. SECONDARY SETUP MENU (SETUP>MORE)
Table 4-5: Secondary Setup Mode Features and Functions
MODE OR FEATURE
MENU
ITEM
External Communication
Channel Configuration
COMM
Used to set up and operate the analyzer’s various external I/O
channels including RS-232; RS 485, modem communication
and/or Ethernet access.
System Status Variables
VARS
Used to view various variables related to the instrument’s current
operational status
5.8
System Diagnostic Features
DIAG
Used to access a variety of functions that are used to configure,
test or diagnose problems with a variety of the analyzer’s basic
systems
5.9
IMPORTANT
82
MANUAL
SECTION
DESCRIPTION
5.7 & 6
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Any changes made to a variable during the SETUP procedures are not
acknowledged by the instrument until the ENTR button is pressed. If the
EXIT button is pressed before the ENTR button, the analyzer will beep,
alerting the user that the newly entered value has not been accepted.
06807F DCN7335
5. SETUP MENU
The SETUP menu is used to set instrument parameters for performing configuration,
calibration, reporting and diagnostics operations according to user needs.
5.1. SETUP – CFG: CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
Pressing the CFG button displays the instrument configuration information. This display
lists the analyzer model, serial number, firmware revision, software library revision,
CPU type and other information. Use this information to identify the software and
hardware when contacting Technical Support. Special instrument or software features or
installed options may also be listed here.
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8
Press NEXT of PREV to move back
and forth through the following list
of Configuration information:
• MODEL NAME
• SERIAL NUMBER
• SOFTWARE REVISION
• LIBRARY REVISION
•
iCHIP SOFTWARE REVISION1
•
HESSEN PROTOCOL REVISION1
•
ACTIVE SPECIAL SOFTWARE
OPTIONS1
• CPU TYPE
• DATE FACTORY CONFIGURATION
SAVED
SETUP
1
SAMPLE
8
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SAMPLE
NEXT
EXIT
T100 SO2 ANALYZER
PREV
EXIT
Press EXIT at
any time to
return to the
SAMPLE display
Press EXIT at
any time to
return to
SETUP menu
1
Only appears if relevant option of Feature is active.
Figure 5-1: SETUP – Configuration Information
5.2. SETUP – ACAL: AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION OPTION
The menu button for this option appears only when the instrument has the zero span
and/or IZS options. See Section 9.8 for details.
06807F DCN7335
83
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.3. SETUP – DAS: INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM
Use the SETUP>DAS menu to capture and record data. Refer to Section 7 for
configuration and operation details.
5.4. SETUP – RNGE: ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING RANGE
CONFIGURATION
Use the SETUP>RNGE menu to configure output reporting ranges, including scaled
reporting ranges to handle data resolution challenges. This section describes
configuration for Single, Dual, and Auto Range modes.
5.4.1. AVAILABLE ANALOG OUTPUT SIGNALS
The analyzer has three active analog output signals, accessible through a connector on
the rear panel.
ANALOG OUT
SO2 concentration
outputs
+
A1
-
LOW range when
DUAL mode is selected
+
A2
-
Test output
+
A3
-
A4
+
-
(not used in
standard
configuration)
HIGH range when
DUAL mode is selected
Figure 5-2: SETUP – Analog Output Connector
All three outputs can be configured either at the factory or by the user for full scale
outputs of 0.1 VDC, 1VDC, 5VDC or 10VDC. Additionally A1 and A2 may be
equipped with optional 0-20 mA DC current loop drivers and configured for any current
output within that range (e.g. 0-20, 2-20, 4-20, etc.). The user may also adjust the signal
level and scaling of the actual output voltage or current to match the input requirements
of the recorder or data logger (Refer to Section 5.9.3.3 and 5.9.3.5).
In its basic configuration, the A1 and A2 channels of the T100 output a signal that is
proportional to the SO2 concentration of the sample gas. Several operating modes are
available which allow:
84
•
Single range mode (SNGL Mode, refer to Section 5.4.3.1): Both outputs are slaved
together and will represent the same concentration span (e.g. 0-50 ppm); however
their electronic signal levels may be configured for different ranges (e.g. 0-10 VDC
vs. 0-.1 VDC – Refer to Section 5.9.3).
•
Dual range mode (DUAL mode, refer to Section 5.4.3.2): The two outputs can to
configured for separate and independent units of measure and measurement spans as
well as separate electronic signal levels.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
•
SETUP Menu
Auto range mode (AUTO mode, refer to Section 5.4.3.3) gives the analyzer the
ability to automatically switch the A1 and A2 analog outputs between two ranges
(low and high) dynamically as the concentration value fluctuates.
EXAMPLE:
A1 OUTPUT: Output Signal = 0-5 VDC representing 0-1000 ppm concentration values
A2 OUTPUT: Output Signal = 0 – 10 VDC representing 0-500 ppm concentration values.
A3 OUTPUT: Test channel; e.g., PMT signal = 0-5V
Output A4 is not available on the T100 Analyzer in standard configuration.
5.4.2. PHYSICAL RANGE VERSUS ANALOG OUTPUT REPORTING
RANGES
The entire measurement range of the T100 is 0 – 20,000 ppb, but many applications use
only a small part of the analyzer’s full measurement range. This creates two
performance challenges:
The width of the T100’s physical range can create data resolution problems for most
analog recording devices. For example, in an application where the expected
concentration of SO2 is typically less than 500 ppb, the full scale of expected values is
only 0.25% of the instrument’s full 20,000 ppb measurement range. Unmodified, the
corresponding output signal would also be recorded across only 0.25% of the range of
the recording device.
The T100 solves this problem by allowing the user to select a scaled reporting range for
the analog outputs that only includes that portion of the physical range relevant to the
specific application. Only the reporting range of the analog outputs is scaled, the
physical range of the analyzer and the readings displayed on the front panel remain
unaltered.
Applications where low concentrations of SO2 are measured require greater sensitivity
and resolution than typically necessary for measurements of higher concentrations.
The T100 solves this issue by using two hardware physical ranges that cover the
instrument’s entire 0 and 20,000 ppb measurement range: a 0 to 2,000 ppb physical
range for increased sensitivity and resolution when measuring very low SO2
concentrations, and a 0 to 20,000 ppb physical range for measuring higher SO2
concentrations. The analyzer’s software automatically selects which physical range is in
effect based on the analog output reporting range selected by the user.
•
•
If the high end of the selected reporting range is ≤ 2,000 ppb. The low physical range is
selected.
If the high end of the selected reporting range is ≥ 2,001 ppb. The high physical range
is selected.
Once properly calibrated, the analyzer’s front panel display will accurately report
concentrations along the entire span of its 0 and 20,000 ppb physical range regardless of
which reporting range has been selected for the analog outputs and which physical range
is being used by the instrument’s software.
06807F DCN7335
85
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.4.3. REPORTING RANGE MODES: SINGLE, DUAL, AUTO RANGES
The T100 provides three analog output range modes to choose from:
•
Single range (SNGL) mode sets a single maximum range for the analog output. If
single range is selected (refer to Section 5.4.3.1) both outputs are slaved together
and will represent the same measurement span (e.g. 0-50 ppm); however, their
electronic signal levels may be configured for different ranges (e.g. 0-10 VDC vs. 0.1 VDC – Refer to Section 5.9.3.1).
•
Dual range (DUAL) allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with different
measurement spans (refer to Section 5.4.3.2).
•
Auto range (AUTO) mode gives the analyzer to ability to output data via a low
range and high range. When this mode is selected (refer to Section 5.4.3.3) the T100
will automatically switch between the two ranges dynamically as the concentration
value fluctuates.
Also, in this mode the RANGE Test function displayed on the front panel during
SAMPLE mode will be replaced by two separate functions, Range1 and Range2.
Range status is also output via the External Digital I/O Status Bits (refer to Section
8.1.1).
To select the Analog Output Range Type press:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
8
SETUP
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
8
ENTR EXIT
RANGE CONTROL MENU
SETUP X.X
SETUP X.X
MODE SET UNIT
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
RANGE MODE: SNGL
SNGL DUAL AUTO
Only one of the
range modes may be
active at any time.
See the section on
Single Range Mode
See the section on
Dual Range Mode
ENTR EXIT
EXIT Returns
to the Main
SAMPLE Display
See the section on
Auto Range Mode
Figure 5-3: SETUP RNGE – Reporting Range Mode
86
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
5.4.3.1. SINGLE RANGE MODE (SNGL)
The default range mode for the analyzer is single range, in which all analog
concentration outputs are set to the same reporting range. This reporting range can be set
to any value between 0.1 ppb and 20,000 ppb.
While the two outputs always have the same reporting range, the span and scaling of
their electronic signals may also be configured differently (e.g., A1 = 0-10 V; A2 = 00.1 V).
To select SNGLE range mode and to set the upper limit of the range, press:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
8
SETUP X.X
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
SETUP X.X
8
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
SETUP X.X
SNGL IND
EXIT
RANGE MODE: SNGL
MODE SET UNIT
0
0
EXIT
RANGE: 500.0 Conc
5
SETUP X.X
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
RANGE CONTROL MENU
SETUP X.X
EXIT
AUTO
AUTO
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT
SNGL IND
RANGE MODE: SNGL
0
0
.0
ENTR EXIT
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT
EXIT
EXIT x 2 returns
to the main
SAMPLE display
Figure 5-4: SETUP RNGE – Single Range Mode
06807F DCN7335
87
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.4.3.2. DUAL RANGE MODE (DUAL)
Selecting Dual Range mode allows the A1 and A2 outputs to be configured with
different reporting ranges. The analyzer software calls these two ranges low and high.
The Low range setting corresponds with the analog output labeled A1 on the rear panel
of the instrument. The high range setting corresponds with the A2 output. While the
software names these two ranges low and high, they do not have to be configured that
way. For example: the low range can be set for a span of 0-150 ppb while the high range
is set for 0-50 ppb.
In DUAL range mode the RANGE test function displayed on the front panel will be
replaced by two separate functions:
•
RANGE1: The range setting for the A1 output.
•
RANGE2: The range setting for the A2 output.
To set the ranges, press the following control button sequence:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
SAMPLE
8
SETUP
1
SETUP X.X
8
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
EXIT
RANGE MODE: SNGL
SNGL DUAL AUTO
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT
0
0
0
0
SETUP X.X
ENTR EXIT
EXIT
LOW RANGE: 500.0 Conc
1
0
SETUP X.X
EXIT
ENTR EXIT
SNGL DUAL AUTO
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT
RANGE MODE: DUAL
SETUP X.X
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
SETUP X.X
0
.0
ENTR EXIT
HIGH RANGE: 500.0 Conc
5
0
0
.0
Toggle the
numeral buttons
to set the upper
limit of each
range.
ENTR EXIT
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT
EXIT
EXIT Returns
to the Main
SAMPLE Display
.
Figure 5-5: SETUP RNGE – Dual Range Mode
IMPORTANT
88
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
In DUAL range mode the LOW and HIGH ranges have separate slopes
and offsets for computing SO2 concentration. The two ranges must be
independently calibrated.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
5.4.3.3. AUTO RANGE MODE (AUTO)
In AUTO range mode, the analyzer automatically switches the reporting range between
two user-defined ranges (low and high). The unit will switch from low range to high
range when the SO2 concentration exceeds 98% of the low range span. The unit will
return from high range back to low range once both the SO2 concentration falls below
75% of the low range span.
In AUTO Range mode the instrument reports the same data in the same range on both
the A1 and A2 outputs and automatically switches both outputs between ranges as
described above. Also, the RANGE test function displayed on the front panel will be
replaced by two separate functions:
•
RANGE1: The LOW range setting for all analog outputs.
•
RANGE2: The HIGH range setting for all analog outputs.
The high/low range status is also reported through the external, digital status bits (refer
to Section 8.1.1).
To set individual ranges press the following control button sequence.
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP X.X
< TST TST > CAL
SNGL IND
SAMPLE
8
RANGE MODE: AUTO
SETUP
AUTO
ENTR EXIT
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
SETUP X.X
8
ENTR EXIT
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
EXIT
SETUP X.X
SETUP X.X
LOW RANGE: 500.0 Conc
RANGE CONTROL MENU
0
MODE SET UNIT
SETUP X.X
SNGL IND
EXIT
0
5
0
0
.0
ENTR EXIT
EXIT
RANGE MODE: SNGL
AUTO
EXIT x 2 returns
to the main
SAMPLE display
SETUP X.X
ENTR EXIT
0
0
HIGH RANGE: 500.0 Conc
5
0
0
.0
Toggle the numeral
buttons to set the
LOW and HIGH
range value.
ENTR accepts the
new setting, EXIT
ignores the new
setting.
ENTR EXIT
Figure 5-6: SETUP RNGE – Auto Range Mode
IMPORTANT
06807F DCN7335
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
In AUTO range mode, the LOW and HIGH ranges have separate slopes
and offsets for computing SO2 concentration. The two ranges must be
independently calibrated.
89
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.4.4. RANGE UNITS
The T100 can display concentrations in parts per billion (109 mols per mol, PPB), parts
per million (106 mols per mol, PPM), micrograms per cubic meter (µg/m3, UGM) or
milligrams per cubic meter (mg/m3, MGM). Changing units affects all of the display,
analog outputs, COM port and DAS values for all reporting ranges regardless of the
analyzer’s range mode.
To change the concentration units:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
8
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
SETUP X.X
8
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT
Select the preferred
concentration unit.
SETUP X.X
EXIT
CONC UNITS: PPB
PPM PPB UGM MGM
SETUP X.X
EXIT returns
to the main menu.
ENTER EXIT
CONC UNITS: PPM
PPM PPB UGM MGM
ENTER EXIT
ENTR accepts
the new unit,
EXIT returns
to the SETUP
menu.
Figure 5-7: SETUP RNGE – Concentration Units Selection
IMPORTANT
90
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Concentrations displayed in mg/m3 and µg/m3 use 0°C and 760 Torr as
standard temperature and pressure (STP). Consult your local regulations
for the STP used by your agency. See Section 5.4.4.1 for converting
volumetric to mass units
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
5.4.4.1. CONVERTING MICROGRAMS PER CUBIC METER TO PARTS PER MILLION
The conversion between micrograms per cubic meter and parts per million is based on
standard conditions (0oC and 101.325 kPa) where one mole of an ideal gas occupies
22.414 L. Thus, converting the mass of the pollutant Mp in grams to its equivalent
volume Vp in liters at standard temperature and pressure (STP) takes the following
equation:
.
-1
Vp = [(Mp)/(MW)] x 22.414 L mol
Where MW is the molecular weight of the pollutant in units of grams per mole. For
readings made at temperatures and pressures other than standard conditions, the standard
volume, 22.414 L.mol-1, must be corrected. The ideal gas law to make the correction can
be used:
.
-1
(22.414 L mol ) x [(T2)/(273 K)] x [(101.325 kPa)/(P2)]
Where T2 and P2 are the absolute temperature (in Kelvin) and absolute pressure (in
kilopascals) at which the readings were made. Because parts per million is a volume
ratio, it can be written as:
ppm = (Vp)/(Va + Vp)
where Va is the volume of the air in cubic meters at the temperature and pressure at
which the measurement was taken. Then combine equations to yield:
.
-1
ppm = {[(Mp)/(MW)] x (22.414 L mol ) x [(T2)/(273 K)] x [(101.325 kPa)/(P2)]}
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------. -3
(Va) x (1000 L m )
where Mp is the mass of the pollutant of interest in micrograms. The factors converting
micrograms to grams and liters to millions of liters cancel one another. Unless
otherwise stated, it is assumed that Va = 1.00 m3
Example:
A 1-m3 sample of air was found to contain 80 µg.m-3 of SO2. The temperature and
pressure were 25.0 oC and 103.193 kPa when the air sample was taken. What was the
SO2 concentration in parts per million?
Solution:
First, determine the MW of SO2:
.
-1
MW of SO2 = 32.06 + 2(15.9994) = 64.06 g mol
Next, convert the temperature from Celsius to Kelvin:
o
25 C + 273 K = 298 K
Using the equation derived above, Concentration is:
{[(80 µg)/(64.06 g.mol-1)] x (22.414 L.mol-1) x [(298 K)/(273 K)] x [(101.325 kPa)/(103.193 kPa)]} / [(1 m3) x (1000 L.m3)]
= 0.030 ppm of SO2
06807F DCN7335
91
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.4.5. DILUTION RATIO (OPTION)
The dilution ratio is a software option that allows the user to compensate for any dilution
of the sample gas before it enters the sample inlet. Once the degree of dilution is known,
add an appropriate scaling factor to the analyzer’s SO2 concentration calculation so that
the measurement range and concentration values reflect the undiluted values when
shown on the instrument’s front panel display screen and reported via the analog and
serial outputs.
Using the Dilution Ratio option is a 4-step process:
1. Select reporting range units: Follow the procedure in Section 5.4.4
2. Select the reporting range mode and set the reporting range upper limit (see Section
5.4).
•
Ensure that the upper span limit entered for the reporting range is the maximum
expected concentration of the undiluted gas.
3. Set the dilution factor as a gain (e.g., a value of 20 means 20 parts diluent and 1
part of sample gas):
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
8
SETUP
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
8
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
DIL only appears
if the dilution ratio
option has been
installed
SETUP
EXIT
RANGE CONTROL MENU
MODE SET UNIT DIL
EXIT
EXIT ignores the
new setting.
SETUP
DIL FACTOR: 1.0 GAIN
ENTR accepts the
new setting.
Toggle to set the dilution factor.
This is the number by which the
analyzer will multiply the SO2
concentrations of the gas passing
through the reaction cell.
0
0
0
SETUP
0
1
.0
ENTR
EXIT
DIL FACTOR: 20.0 GAIN
0
2
0
.0
ENTR
EXIT
Figure 5-8: SETUP RNGE – Dilution Ratio
4. Calibrate the analyzer.
•
92
Ensure that the calibration span gas is either supplied through the same dilution
system as the sample gas or has an appropriately lower actual concentration.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
EXAMPLE: If the reporting range limit is set for 100 ppm and the dilution ratio of
the sample gas is 20 gain, either:
•
a span gas with the concentration of 100 ppm can be used if the span gas passes
through the same dilution steps as the sample gas, or;
•
a 5 ppm span gas must be used if the span gas IS NOT routed through the
dilution system.
The analyzer multiplies the measured gas concentrations with this dilution factor and
displays the result.
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Once the above settings have been entered, the instrument needs to be
recalibrated using one of the methods discussed in Section 9.
5.5. SETUP – PASS: PASSWORD PROTECTION
The menu system provides password protection of the calibration and setup functions to
prevent unauthorized adjustments. When the passwords have been enabled in the PASS
menu, the system will prompt the user for a password anytime a password-protected
function (e.g., SETUP) is selected. This allows normal operation of the instrument, but
requires the password (101) to access to the menus under SETUP. When PASSWORD
is disabled (SETUP>OFF), any operator can enter the Primary Setup (SETUP) and
Secondary Setup (SETUP>MORE) menus. Whether PASSWORD is enabled or
disabled, a password (default 818) is required to enter the VARS or DIAG menus in the
SETUP>MORE menu.
Table 5-1: Password Levels
PASSWORD
LEVEL
Null (000)
Operation
101
Configuration/Maintenance
818
Configuration/Maintenance Access to Secondary SETUP Submenus VARS and DIAG whether
PASSWORD is enabled or disabled.
06807F DCN7335
MENU ACCESS ALLOWED
All functions of the main menu (top level (Primary) menu)
Access to Primary and Secondary SETUP Menus when PASSWORD is
enabled
93
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
To enable or disable passwords, press:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.0 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
8
SETUP
SETUP
ENTR accepts
displayed
password value
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
8
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
PASSWORD
default state is
OFF
SETUP
OFF
SETUP
ON
SETUP
ON
EXIT returns to
SAMPLE display
EXIT
PASSWORD ENABLE: OFF
Toggles
password
status On/Off
ENTR EXIT
PASSWORD ENABLE: ON
ENTR EXIT
PASSWORD ENABLE: ON
ENTR EXIT
EXIT ignores the
change.
ENTR accepts the
change.
Once Password is
enabled, exit back
out to the main
menu for this feature
to take effect.
Figure 5-9: SETUP – Enable Password Security
If the password feature is enabled, the default password displayed will be 000 upon
entering either Calibration or Setup Mode, and the new password must be input.
Example follows for Calibration Mode:
94
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SAMPLE
SETUP Menu
RANGE = 500.0 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
SAMPLE
Prompts
password
number
0
ENTER SETUP PASS : 0
0
0
SAMPLE
Press
individual
buttons to set
1
SETUP
ENTR EXIT
ENTER SETUP PASS : 0
0
1
ENTR EXIT
101
M-P CAL
RANGE = 500.0 PPB
< TST TST >
ZERO
CONC
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
Continue calibration process …
Figure 5-10:
06807F DCN7335
SETUP – Enter Calibration Mode Using Password
95
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.6. SETUP – CLK: SETTING THE INTERNAL TIME-OF-DAY
CLOCK
The T100 has a built-in clock for the AutoCal timer, Time TEST functions, and time
stamps on COM port messages and DAS data entries. To set the time-of-day, press:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
8
SETUP
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
SETUP X.X
8
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
EXIT
TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK
Enter Current
Time-of-Day
TIME DATE
SETUP X.X
1 2 :0 0
SETUP X.X3
1 2 :0 0
EXIT
SETUP X.X
TIME: 12:00
0 1
ENTR EXIT
JAN
DATE: 01-JAN-02
0 2
SETUP X.X
TIME: 12:00
0 1
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X
JAN
ENTR EXIT
DATE: 01-JAN-02
0 2
ENTR EXIT
TIME-OF-DAY CLOCK
TIME DATE
SETUP X.X
Enter Current
Date-of-Year
EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
Figure 5-11:
EXIT
EXIT returns
to the main
SAMPLE display
SETUP – Clock
In order to compensate for CPU clocks, which may run fast or slow, there is a variable
(in the SETUP>MORE>VARS menu) to speed up or slow down the clock by a fixed
amount every day. To change this variable, press:
96
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
SETUP
SETUP Menu
SETUPX.X
0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
Continue to press NEXT until …
8
1
ENTR EXIT
8
SETUP X.X
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
PREV
7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
JUMP
SETUP X.X
EDIT PRNT EXIT
CLOCK_ADJ:0 Sec/Day
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
+
COMM VARS DIAG
0
0
ENTR EXIT
EXIT
Enter sign and number of seconds per
day the clock gains (-) or loses (+).
SAMPLE
8
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
1
8
SETUP X.X
ENTR EXIT
8) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
3x EXIT returns
to the main SAMPLE display
Figure 5-12:
06807F DCN7335
SETUP – Clock Speed Variable
97
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.7. SETUP – COMM: COMMUNICATIONS PORTS
This section introduces the communications setup menu; Section 6 provides the setup
instructions and operation information. Press SETUP>ENTR>MORE>COMM to arrive
at the communications menu.
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
If the default password 818
is replaced by 000, then
Password Protection has
been enabled. Refer to
SETUP: PASS.
SAMPLE
8
SETUP
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
SETUP X.X
8
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
ID
Figure 5-13:
INET
EXIT
EXIT
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1 COM2
EXIT
SETUP – COMM Menu
5.7.1. ID (INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION)
In the SETUP>MORE>COMM menu press ID to display and/or change the Machine
ID, which must be changed to a unique identifier (number) when more than one
instrument of the same model is used in a multidrop configuration (Section 3.3.1.8) or
when applying MODBUS protocol (Section 6.6.1). The default ID is typically the same
as the model number; for the Model T100, the ID is 0100 (but could be 0000). Press any
button(s) in the MACHINE ID menu (Figure 5-14) until the Machine ID Parameter field
displays the desired identifier.
98
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP X.X
ID INET
EXIT
Toggle to cycle
through the available
character set: 0-9
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1
SETUP X.
0
1
SETUP Menu
COM2
ENTR accepts the new
settings
MACHINE ID: 100 ID
0
0
Figure 5-14:
ENTR EXIT
EXIT ignores the new
settings
COMM – Machine ID
The ID can be any 4-digit number and can also be used to identify analyzers in any
number of ways (e.g. location numbers, company asset number, etc.)
5.7.2. INET (ETHERNET)
Use SETUP>COMM>INET to configure Ethernet communications, whether manually
or via DHCP. Please see Section 6.5 for configuration details.
5.7.3. COM1 AND COM2 (MODE, BAUD RATE AND TEST PORT)
Use the SETUP>COMM>COM1[COM2] menus to:
•
configure communication modes (Section 6.2.1)
•
view/set the baud rate (Section 6.2.2)
•
test the connections of the com ports (Section 6.2.3).
Configuring COM1 or COM2 requires setting the DCE DTE switch on the rear panel.
Section 6.1 provides DCE DTE information.
06807F DCN7335
99
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.8. SETUP – VARS: VARIABLES SETUP AND DEFINITION
Through the SETUP>MORE>VARS menu there are several-user adjustable software
variables that define certain operational parameters. Usually, these variables are
automatically set by the instrument’s firmware, but can be manually re-defined using the
VARS menu. Table 5-2 lists the variables that are available within the 818 password
protected level.
Table 5-2: Variable Names (VARS) Revision 1.0.3
NO.
VARIABLE
DESCRIPTION
ALLOWED VALUES
0
DAS_HOLD_OFF
Changes the internal data acquisition system (DAS) hold-off time,
which is the duration when data are not stored in the DAS because
the software considers the data to be questionable. That is the
case during warm-up or just after the instrument returns from one
of its calibration modes to SAMPLE mode. DAS_HOLD_OFF can
be disabled entirely in each DAS channel.
Can be between 0.5
and 20 minutes
Default=15 min.
1
TPC_ENABLE
Enables or disables the temperature and pressure compensation
(TPC) feature (refer to Section 12.7.3).
ON/OFF
RCELL_SET
Sets the sample chamber temperature. Increasing or decreasing
this temperature will increase or decrease the rate at which SO2*
decays into SO2 (refer to Section 12.1.1).
Do not adjust this setting unless under the direction of Teledyne
API Technical Support personnel.
30º C - 70º C
Default= 50º C
3
IZS_SET
Sets the IZS option temperature. Increasing or decreasing this
temperature will increase or decrease the permeation rate of the
IZS source (refer to Sections 3.3.2.4, 9.5, 9.6).
30º C - 70º C
Default= 50º C
4
DYN_ZERO
Dynamic zero automatically adjusts offset and slope of the SO2
response when performing a zero point calibration during an
AutoCal (refer to Section 9).
ON/OFF
5
DYN_SPAN
Dynamic span automatically adjusts slope and slope of the SO2
response when performing a zero point calibration during an
AutoCal (refer to Section 9).
Note that the DYN_ZERO and DYN_SPAN features are not
allowed for applications requiring EPA equivalency.
ON/OFF
6
CONC_PRECISION
Allows the user to set the number of significant digits to the right of
the decimal point display of concentration and stability values.
AUTO, 1, 2, 3, 4
Default=AUTO
7
CLOCK_ADJ
Adjusts the speed of the analyzer’s clock. Choose the + sign if the
clock is too slow, choose the - sign if the clock is too fast. (See
Section 5.6).
-60 to +60 s/day
8
SERVICE_CLEAR
ON resets the service interval timer. Returns to OFF upon reset.
ON/OFF
9
TIME_SINCE_SVC
Number of hours since last service.
0-500000
10
SVC_INTERVAL
Sets the interval between service reminders.
0-100000
2
100
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
To access and navigate the VARS menu, use the following button sequence.
SAMPLE*
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =X.XXX
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
SAMPLE
8
1
SETUP X.X
ENTR EXIT
8
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
EXIT
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG
SETUP X.X
EXIT
EXIT ignores the new setting.
ENTER VARS PASS: 818
ENTR accepts the new setting.
8
1
8
SETUP X.X
ENTR EXIT
0 ) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
SETUP X.X
NEXT JUMP
1
SETUP X.X
DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
EDIT PRNT EXIT
5
.0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle to change setting
1 ) TPC_ENABLE=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
TPC_ENABLE=ON
ON
ENTR EXIT
Toggle to change setting
SETUP X.X
2)RCELL_SET=50.0 DegC
PREV NEXT JUMP
SETUP X.X
DO NOT change
theses set-points
unless
specifically
instructed to by
TAPI Customer
Service.
3) IZS_SET=50.0 DegC
PREV NEXT JUMP
SETUP X.X
EDIT PRNT EXIT
EDIT PRNT EXIT
4 ) DYN_ZERO=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
DYN_ZERO=ON
ON
SETUP X.X
ENTR EXIT
5) DYN_SPAN=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
Toggle to change setting
SETUP X.X
DYN_SPAN=ON
ON
ENTR EXIT
Toggle to change setting
SETUP X.X
6) CONC_PRECISION : 3
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
SETUP X.X
AUTO
CONC_PRECUISION : 3
0
1
2
3
4
ENTR EXIT
Toggle to change setting
SETUP X.X
7) CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
+
0
CLOCK_ADJ=0 Sec/Day
0
ENTR EXIT
Toggle to change setting
Figure 5-15:
06807F DCN7335
SETUP – VARS Menu
101
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.9. SETUP – DIAG: DIAGNOSTICS FUNCTIONS
The SETUP>MORE>DIAG menu provides a series of diagnostic functions whose
parameters are dependent on firmware revision (refer to the menu trees in Appendix A).
Table 5-3 describes the functions and provides a cross-reference to the details for each in
the remainder of this section. These functions can be used as tools in a variety of
troubleshooting and diagnostic procedures.
Table 5-3: T100 Diagnostic (DIAG) Functions
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION AND MEANING
FRONT
PANEL
MODE
INDICATOR
SECTION
SIGNAL I/O: Allows observation of all digital and analog
signals in the instrument. Allows certain digital signals such as
valves and heaters to be toggled ON and OFF.
DIAG I/O
5.9.1
ANALOG OUTPUT: When entered, the analyzer performs an
analog output step test. This can be used to calibrate a chart
recorder or to test the analog output accuracy.
DIAG AOUT
5.9.2
DIAG AIO
5.9.3
OPTIC TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs an optic
test, which turns on an LED located inside the sensor module
near the PMT (Fig. 10-15). This diagnostic tests the response
of the PMT without having to supply span gas.
DIAG OPTIC
5.9.4
ELECTRICAL TEST: When activated, the analyzer performs
an electric test, which generates a current intended to simulate
the PMT output to verify the signal handling and conditioning of
the PMT preamp board.
DIAG ELEC
5.9.5
LAMP CALIBRATION: The analyzer records the current
voltage output of the UV source reference detector. This value
is used by the CPU to calculate the lamp ration used in
determining the SO2 concentration
DIAG LAMP
5.9.6
PRESSURE CALIBRATION: The analyzer records the current
output of the sample gas pressure sensor. This value is used
by the CPU to compensate the SO2 concentration when the
TPC feature (Section 12.7.3) is enabled (Table 5-2).
DIAG PCAL
5.9.7
FLOW CALIBRATION: This function is used to calibrate the
gas flow output signals of sample gas and ozone supply.
These settings are retained when exiting DIAG.
DIAG FCAL
5.9.8
TEST CHAN OUTPUT: Configures the A4 analog output
channel.
DIAG TCHN
5.9.9
ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION: Analog input/output
parameters are available for viewing and configuration.
102
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
To access the DIAG functions press the following buttons:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
EXIT returns
to the main
SAMPLE
display
SAMPLE
8
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
EXIT returns
to the PRIMARY
SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
From this point
forward, EXIT returns
to the
SECONDARY
SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
If password
protection is
enabled, see
SETUP – PASS.
SETUP
8
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
DIAG
8
ENTR
PREV
PREV
DIAG
ANALOG OUTPUT
PREV
EXIT
ENTR
Figure 5-16:
06807F DCN7335
PREV
EXIT
EXIT
ENTR
EXIT
ELECTRICAL TEST
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
LAMP CALIBRATION
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
PRESSURE CALIBRATION
NEXT
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
NEXT
NEXT
DIAG
ENTR EXIT
NEXT
PREV
PREV
ENTR
OPTIC TEST
DIAG
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
NEXT
DIAG
EXIT
COMM VARS DIAG
8
PREV
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
DIAG
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SAMPLE
DIAG
ENTR
EXIT
FLOW CALIBRATION
NEXT
ENTR
DIAG
TEST CHAN OUTPUT
PREV
ENTR
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG Menu
103
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.9.1. SIGNAL I/O
The signal I/O diagnostic mode allows a user to review and change the digital and
analog input/output functions of the analyzer. Refer to Appendix A for a list of the
parameters available for review under this menu.
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Any changes of signal I/O settings will remain in effect only until the
signal I/O menu is exited. Exceptions are the ozone generator override
and the flow sensor calibration, which remain as entered when exiting.
Access the signal I/O test mode from the DIAG Menu (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
PREV NEXT JUMP
DIAG I / O
ENTR EXIT
0) EXT_ZERO_CAL=OFF
PREV NEXT JUMP
PRNT EXIT
EXAMPLE
DIAG I / O
1
ENTR EXIT
See Appendix A-4 for
a complete list of
available SIGNALS
EXAMPLE:
Enter 12 to Jump to
12) ST_SYSTEM_OK=ON
12) ST_SYSTEM_OK = ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
Toggle ON/(OFF) button to
change status.
Figure 5-17:
104
Press JUMP to go
directly to a specific
signal
JUMP TO: 12
2
DIAG I / O
Press NEXT & PREV to
move between signal
types.
ON PRNT EXIT
Exit to return
to the
DIAG menu
Pressing the PRNT button will send a formatted
printout to the serial port and can be captured
with a computer or other output device.
DIAG – Signal I/O Menu
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
5.9.2. ANALOG OUTPUT STEP TEST
Analog Output (DIAG AOUT) is used as a step test to check the accuracy and proper
operation of the analog outputs. The test forces all four analog output channels to
produce signals ranging from 0% to 100% of the full scale range in 20% increments.
This test is useful to verify the operation of the data logging/recording devices attached
to the analyzer.
Access the Analog Output Step Test from the DIAG Menu (refer to Figure 5-16), then
press:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
8
SETUP X.X
SETUP
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
8
ENTR EXIT
NEXT
ENTR EXIT
PREV
ANALOG OUTPUT
NEXT
DIAG AOUT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
EXIT
EXIT
ENTR
EXIT
ANALOG OUTPUT
0%
DIAG AOUT
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
DIAG
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
DIAG
EXIT
Exit-Exit
returns to the
DIAG menu
ANALOG OUTPUT
[0%]
Performs
analog output
step test.
0% - 100%
EXIT
Pressing the “0%” button while performing the test will
pause the test at that level. Brackets will appear around
the value: example: [20%] Pressing the same key again
will resume the test.
Figure 5-18:
06807F DCN7335
DIAG – Analog Output Menu
105
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.9.3. ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
Table 6-8 lists the analog I/O functions that are available in the T100.
Table 5-4: DIAG - Analog I/O Functions
SUB MENU
AOUTS CALIBRATED:
FUNCTION
Shows the status of the analog output calibration (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of all
analog output channels.
CONC_OUT_1
Sets the basic electronic configuration of the A1 analog output (SO2). There are three options:
•
RANGE: Selects the signal type (voltage or current loop) and full scale level of the
output.
•
REC_OFS: Allows setting a voltage offset (not available when RANGE is set to Current
Loop (CURR).
•
AUTO_CAL: Performs the same calibration as AOUT CALIBRATED, but on this one
channel only.
NOTE: Any change to RANGE or REC_OFS requires recalibration of this output.
CONC_OUT_2
Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel 2 (SO2)
TEST OUTPUT
Same as for CONC_OUT_1 but for analog channel 3 (TEST)
CONC_OUT_3
(Not available in the analyzer’s standard configuration; applies when optional sensor installed).
AIN CALIBRATED
Shows the calibration status (YES/NO) and initiates a calibration of the analog input channels.
XIN1
.
.
.
XIN8
For each of 8 external analog inputs channels, shows the gain, offset, engineering units, and
whether the channel is to show up as a Test function.
Table 5-5: Analog Output Voltage Ranges
RANGE
MINIMUM OUTPUT
MAXIMUM OUTPUT
0-0.1 V
-5 mV
+105 mV
0-1 V
-0.05 V
+1.05 V
0-5 V
-0.25 V
+5.25 V
0-10 V
-0.5 V
+10.5 V
The default offset for all ranges is 0 VDC.
106
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
The following DC current output limits apply to the current loop modules:
Table 5-6: Analog Output Current Loop Range
RANGE
MINIMUM OUTPUT
MAXIMUM OUTPUT
0-20 mA
0 mA
20 mA
These are the physical limits of the current loop modules, typical applications use 2-20 or 4-20
mA for the lower and upper limits. Please specify desired range when ordering this option.
The default offset for all ranges is 0 mA.
ANALOG OUT
+
A1
-
+
A2
-
+
A3
-
A4
+
-
Refer to Figure 3-4 for the location of the analog output connector on the instrument’s
rear panel and Table 3-6 for pin assignments.
06807F DCN7335
107
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.9.3.1. ANALOG OUTPUT SIGNAL TYPE AND RANGE SPAN SELECTION
To select an output signal type (DC Voltage or current) and level for one output channel,
activate the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU from the DIAG Menu (S),
then press:
DIAG
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
PREV
NEXT
DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO
1V
EDIT
EXIT
CONC_OUT_1 RANGE: 5V
5V
10V CURR
ENTR EXIT
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_1 RANGE: 10V
0.1V
5V
1V
Press SET> to select the
analog output channel to be
configured. Press EDIT to
continue
EXIT
EDIT
10V CURR
Figure 5-19:
108
EXIT
CONC_OUT_1 RANGE: 5V
SET>
0.1V
CAL
CONC_OUT_1:5V,OVR,CAL
< SET SET>
DIAG AIO
EXIT
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
< SET SET>
These buttons set
the signal level
and type for the
selected channel
ENTR
ENTR EXIT
Pressing ENTR records the new setting
and returns to the previous menu.
Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and
returns to the previous menu.
DIAG – Analog I/O Configuration Menu
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
5.9.3.2. ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION MODE
Analog output calibration should to be carried out on first startup of the analyzer
(performed in the factory as part of the configuration process) or whenever recalibration
is required. The analog outputs can be calibrated automatically, either as a group or
individually, or adjusted manually.
In its default mode, the instrument is configured for automatic calibration of all
channels, which is useful for clearing any analog calibration warnings associated with
channels that will not be used or connected to any input or recording device, e.g.,
datalogger.
Manual calibration should be used for the 0.1V range or in cases where the outputs must
be closely matched to the characteristics of the recording device. Manual calibration
requires the AUTOCAL feature to be disabled.
To calibrate the outputs as a group, activate the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION
MENU from the DIAG Menu (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
DIAG
Exit at any time
to return to the
main DIAG
menu
PREV
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
NEXT
DIAG AIO
EXIT
ENTR
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
< SET SET>
CAL
EXIT
DIAG AIO AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_1
(continues for any active channels)
AUTO CALIBRATING TEST_OUTPUT
If any of the channels have
not been calibrated this
message will read NO.
DIAG AIO
AOUTS CALIBRATED:
< SET SET>
Figure 5-20:
06807F DCN7335
CAL
If AutoCal has been
turned off for any
channel, the message
for that channel will be
similar to:
NOT AUTO CAL
CONC_OUT_1
Exit to return to
the I/O
configuration
menu
YES
EXIT
DIAG – Analog Output Calibration Mode
109
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
To automatically calibrate a single analog channel from the DIAG Menu (refer to Figure
5-16), press:
DIAG
PREV
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
NEXT
ENTR
DIAG AIO
<
EXIT
EXIT to Return
to the main
Sample Display
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
SET>
CAL
DIAG AIO
EXIT
Press SET> to select the
Analog Output channel to
be configured. Then Press
EDIT to continue
CONC_OUT_2:5V, CAL
< SET SET>
EDIT
DIAG AIO
EXIT
CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
DIAG AIO
SET>
EDIT
<SET
DIAG AIO
< SET SET>
EDIT
EXIT
EDIT
Figure 5-21:
AUTO CALIBRATING CONC_OUT_2
EXIT
CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL: ON
< SET SET>
110
CAL
CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV
DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: NO
EXIT
DIAG AIO
EXIT
<SET
CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES
CAL
EXIT
DIAG – Analog Output Calibration Mode – Single Analog Channel
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
To select manual output calibration for a particular channel, access the Analog I/O
Configuration from the DIAG Menu (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
DIAG
Exit to return to
the main
sample display
PREV
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
NEXT
DIAG AIO
ENTR
EXIT
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
< SET SET>
CAL
EXIT
CONC_OUT_2:5V, CAL
< SET SET>
DIAG AIO
EDIT
CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV
< SET SET>
DIAG AIO
Press SET> to select the analog output channel to
be configured. Then press EDIT to continue
DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO
EDIT
CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL: ON
< SET SET>
DIAG AIO
EXIT
EDIT
CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL: ON
ON
EXIT
EXIT
ENTR EXIT
Toggle to OFF to enable manual
cal adjustments to the selected
output channel only.
CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
DIAG AIO
SET>
EDIT
CONC_OUT_2 AUTO CAL: OFF
EXIT
OFF
ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the new setting
and returns to the previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting and
returns to the previous menu.
Figure 5-22:
DIAG – Analog Output – Auto Cal or Manual Cal Selection for Channels
Now the analog output channels should either be automatically calibrated or they should
be set to manual calibration, which is described next.
06807F DCN7335
111
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.9.3.3. MANUAL ANALOG OUTPUT CALIBRATION AND VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT
For highest accuracy, the voltages of the analog outputs can be manually calibrated.
Calibration is done through the instrument software with a voltmeter connected across
the output terminals (refer to Figure 5-23). Adjustments are made using the control
buttons by setting the zero-point first and then the span-point (refer to Table 5-7).
The software allows this adjustment to be made in 100, 10 or 1 count increments.
Table 5-7: Voltage Tolerances for Analog Output Calibration
IMPORTANT
FULL SCALE
ZERO TOLERANCE
SPAN VOLTAGE
SPAN TOLERANCE
0.1 VDC
±0.0005V
90 mV
±0.001V
1 VDC
±0.001V
900 mV
±0.001V
5 VDC
±0.002V
4500 mV
±0.003V
10 VDC
±0.004V
4500 mV
±0.006V
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Outputs configured for 0.1V full scale should always be calibrated
manually.
See Table 3-1 for
pin assignments
of Analog Out
connector on the
rear panel
V
+DC
V OUT +
V IN +
V OUT -
V IN -
ANALYZER
Figure 5-23:
112
Gnd
Recording
Device
Setup for Calibrating Analog Outputs
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
To make these manual adjustments, turn off the AOUT auto-calibration feature (refer to
Section 5.9.3.2). Activate the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU from the
SETUP>MORE>DIAG Menu (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
DIAG
DIAG AIO
PREV
NEXT
ENTR
CONC_OUT_1 OVERRANGE: ON
EXIT
SET>
DIAG AIO
EDIT
EXIT
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
< SET SET>
CAL
EXIT
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_1 REC OFS: 0 mV
< SET SET>
EDIT
EXIT
If AutoCal is ON, go to
Section 6.7.3
Press SET> to select the analog output channel to be configured:
DISPLAYED AS =
CONC_OUT_1 =
CONC_OUT_2 =
TEST OUTPUT =
CHANNEL
A1
A2
A4
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_1 AUTO CAL: OFF
< SET SET>
DIAG AIO
< SET SET>
DIAG AIO
SET>
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_1 :5V, NO CAL
EDIT
< SET
EXIT
CONC_OUT_1 RANGE: 5V
EXIT
CONC_OUT_1 CALIBRATED: NO
EXIT
CAL
DIAG AIO
EXIT
EDIT
EDIT
CONC_OUT_1 VOLT–Z : 0 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
These control buttons increase / decrease the
analog output by 100, 10 or 1 counts.
Continue adjustments until the voltage measured
at the output of the analyzer and/or the input of
the recording device matches the value in the
upper right hand corner of the display to the
tolerance listed in Table 6-10.
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_1 VOLT–S : 4500 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
EXIT ignores the
new setting.
ENTR accepts the
new setting.
The concentration display will not change. Only
the voltage reading of your voltmeter will change.
DIAG AIO
< SET
Figure 5-24:
06807F DCN7335
CONC_OUT_1 CALIBRATED: YES
CAL
EXIT
Analog Output – Voltage Adjustment
113
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.9.3.4. ANALOG OUTPUT OFFSET ADJUSTMENT
Some analog signal recorders require that the zero signal to be significantly different
from the baseline of the recorder in order to record slightly negative readings from noise
around the zero point. This can be achieved in the T100 by defining a zero offset, a
small voltage (e.g., 10% of span), which can be added to the signal of individual output
channels by activating the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU from the DIAG
Menu (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
DIAG
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
PREV
NEXT
ENTR
DIAG AIO
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
< SET SET>
CAL
< SET SET>
EDIT
DIAG AIO
EXIT
CONC_OUT_2 OVERRANGE: ON
SET>
EDIT
DIAG AIO
EXIT
CONC_OUT_2 REC OFS: 0 mV
< SET SET>
EDIT
DIAG AIO
EXIT
RECORD OFFSET: 0 MV
0
Figure 5-25:
114
EXIT
EDIT
DIAG AIO
0
Press SET> to select the
analog output channel to
be configured. Then press
EDIT to continue
CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: 5V
SET>
+
EXIT
CONC_OUT_2:5V, CAL
DIAG AIO
Set the recorder
offset (in mV) of
the selected
channel
EXIT
0
0
Pressing ENTR accepts the
new setting and returns to the
previous menu.
Pressing EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
ENTR EXIT
Analog Output – Offset Adjustment
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
5.9.3.5. CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT
A current loop option is available and can be installed as a retrofit for each of the analog
outputs of the analyzer (refer to Section 3.3.1.4). This option converts the DC voltage
analog output to a current signal with 0-20 mA output current. The outputs can be scaled
to any set of limits within that 0-20 mA range. However, most current loop applications
call for either 2-20 mA or 4-20 mA range. All current loop outputs have a +5% overrange. Ranges with the lower limit set to more than 1 mA (e.g., 2-20 or 4-20 mA) also
have a -5% under-range.
To switch an analog output from voltage to current loop after installing the current
output printed circuit assembly, follow the instructions in Section 5.9.3.1 and select
CURR from the list of options on the “Output Range” menu.
Adjusting the signal zero and span values of the current loop output is done by raising or
lowering the voltage of the respective analog output. This proportionally raises or lowers
the current produced by the current loop option.
Similar to the voltage calibration, the software allows this current adjustment to be made
in 100, 10 or 1 count increments. Since the exact current increment per voltage count
varies from output to output and from instrument to instrument, you will need to
measure the change in the current with a current meter placed in series with the output
circuit (refer to Figure 5-26).
Figure 5-26:
Setup for Calibrating Current Outputs
WARNING
Do not exceed 60 V between current loop outputs and instrument ground.
06807F DCN7335
115
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
To adjust the zero and span values of the current outputs, activate the ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION MENU from the DIAG Menu (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
DIAG AIO
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
DIAG
PREV
NEXT
ENTR
< SET
CAL
EXIT
EXIT
DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: NO
AIN A/C FREQUENCY: 60 HZ
SET> EDIT
CONC_OUT_2 ZERO: 0 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
EXIT
EXAMPLE
DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO
AIN CALIBRATED: NO
SET> EDIT
DIAG AIO
EXIT
CONC_OUT_2 ZERO: 27 mV
Increase or decrease the current
output by 100, 10 or 1 counts. The
resulting change in output voltage is
displayed in the upper line.
Continue adjustments until the correct
current is measured with the current
meter.
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
AOUT CALIBRATED: NO
< SET SET>
CAL
EXIT
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_2 SPAN: 10000 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
Press SET> to select the analog output channel
to be configured:. Then press EDIT to continue
EXAMPLE
DIAG AIO
DIAG AIO
CONC_OUT_CURR, NO CAL
< SET SET>
DIAG AIO
<SET SET>
EDIT
EDIT
Figure 5-27:
CONC_OUT_2 ZERO: 9731 mV
U100 UP10 UP DOWN DN10 D100 ENTR EXIT
EXIT
CONC_OUT_2 RANGE: CURR
EXIT
ENTR returns
to the previous
menu.
DIAG AIO
< SET
EXIT ignores the
new setting, ENTR
accepts the new
setting.
CONC_OUT_2 CALIBRATED: YES
CAL
EXIT
Analog Output – Zero and Span Value Adjustment for Current Outputs
If a current meter is not available, an alternative method for calibrating the
current loop outputs is to connect a 250 Ω ±1% resistor across the current loop
output. Using a voltmeter, connected across the resistor, follow the procedure
above but adjust the output to the following values:
Table 5-8: Current Loop Output Calibration with Resistor
116
FULL SCALE
VOLTAGE FOR 2-20 MA
(MEASURED ACROSS
RESISTOR)
VOLTAGE FOR 4-20 MA
(MEASURED ACROSS RESISTOR)
0%
0.5 V
1.0 V
100%
5.0 V
5.0 V
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
5.9.3.6. AIN CALIBRATION
This is the sub-menu to conduct the analog input calibration. This calibration should
only be necessary after major repair such as a replacement of CPU, motherboard or
power supplies. Navigate to the ANALOG I/O CONFIGURATION MENU from the
DIAG Menu (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
DIAG
PREV
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
Exit at any time to
return to the main
DIAG menu
Continue pressing SET> until …
DIAG AIO
AIN CALIBRATED: NO
< SET SET>
DIAG AIO
Instrument
calibrates
automatically
CAL
EXIT
CALIBRATING A/D ZERO
CALIBRATING A/D SPAN
DIAG AIO
AIN CALIBRATED: YES
< SET SET>
Figure 5-28:
CAL
EXIT
Exit to return to the
ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION
MENU
DIAG – Analog Output – AIN Calibration
5.9.3.7. ANALOG INPUTS (XIN1…XIN8) OPTION CONFIGURATION
To configure the analyzer’ optional analog inputs define for each channel:
06807F DCN7335
•
gain (number of units represented by 1 volt)
•
offset (volts)
•
engineering units to be represented in volts (each press of the touchscreen button
scrolls the list of alphanumeric characters from A-Z and 0-9)
•
whether to display the channel in the Test functions
117
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
To adjust settings for the Analog Inputs option parameters press:
DIAG
PREV
ANALOG I / O CONFIGURATION
NEXT
DIAG AIO
< SET SET>
DIAG AIO
< SET SET>
ENTR
AOUTS CALIBRATED: NO
CAL
Press SET> to scroll to the first
channel. Continue pressing SET>
to view each of 8 channels.
EXIT
XIN1:1.00,0.00,V,OFF
EDIT
Press EDIT at any channel
to to change Gain, Offset,
Units and whether to display
the channel in the Test
functions (OFF/ON).
EXIT
DIAG AIO
XIN1 GAIN:1.00V/V
SET>
DIAG AIO
EXIT
EDIT
EXIT
XIN1 OFFSET:0.00V
DIAG AIO
< SET
SET>
EDIT
+
DIAG AIO
< SET
SET>
DIAG AIO
< SET
0
0
1
.0
0
ENTR EXIT
XIN1 UNITS:V
EDIT
EXIT
XIN1 DISPLAY:OFF
EDIT
EXIT
Figure 5-29.
118
XIN1 GAIN:1.00V/V
EXIT
Press to change
Gain value
Pressing ENTR records the new setting
and returns to the previous menu.
Pressing EXIT ignores the new setting and
returns to the previous menu.
DIAG – Analog Inputs (Option) Configuration Menu
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
5.9.4. OPTIC TEST
The optic test function tests the response of the PMT sensor by turning on an LED
located in the cooling block of the PMT (refer to Figure 12-18). The analyzer uses the
light emitted from the LED to test its photo-electronic subsystem, including the PMT
and the current to voltage converter on the pre-amplifier board. To ensure that the
analyzer measures only the light coming from the LED, the analyzer should be supplied
with zero air. The optic test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000±1000 mV.
Access the Optic Test from the DIAG Menu (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
PREV NEXT JUMP
ENTR
EXIT
Press NEXT until…
DIAG
OPTIC TEST
PREV NEXT
DIAG OPTIC
ENTR EXIT
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
<TST TST>
SO2=XXX.X
EXIT
Press TST until…
While the optic test is
activated, PMT should be
2000 mV ± 1000 mV
DIAG ELEC
<TST TST>
Figure 5-30:
IMPORTANT
06807F DCN7335
PMT = 2751 MV
SO2=XXX.X
EXIT
DIAG – Optic Test
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
This is a coarse test for functionality and not an accurate calibration tool.
The resulting PMT signal can vary significantly over time and also
changes with low-level calibration.
119
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.9.5. ELECTRICAL TEST
The electrical test function creates a current, which substitutes the PMT signal, and
feeds it into the preamplifier board. This signal is generated by circuitry on the preamplifier board itself and tests the filtering and amplification functions of that assembly
along with the A/D converter on the motherboard. It does not test the PMT itself. The
electrical test should produce a PMT signal of about 2000 ±1000 mV.
Access the Electrical Test from the DIAG Menu (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
SIGNAL I / O
DIAG
PREV NEXT JUMP
ENTR
EXIT
Press NEXT until…
DIAG
ELECTRICAL TEST
PREV NEXT
DIAG ELEC
ENTR EXIT
RANGE = 500.0 PPB
<TST TST>
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
Press TST until…
While the electrical test is
activated, PMT should equal:
2000 mV ± 1000 mV
DIAG ELEC
<TST TST>
Figure 5-31:
120
PMT = 1732 MV
SO2=X.XXX
EXIT
DIAG – Electrical Test
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
5.9.6. LAMP CALIBRATION
An important factor in accurately determining SO2 concentration is the amount of UV
light available to transform the SO2 into SO2* (refer to Section 12.1.1). The T100
compensates for variations in the intensity of the available UV light by adjusting the SO2
concentration calculation using a ratio (LAMP RATIO) that results from dividing the
current UV lamp (UV LAMP) intensity by a value stored in the CPU’s memory
(LAMP_CAL). Both LAMP Ratio and UV Lamp are test functions viewable from the
instruments front panel.
To cause the analyzer to measure and record a value for LAMP_CAL, access the Signal
I/O from the DIAG Menu (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
Repeat Pressing NEXT until . . .
DIAG
LAMP CALIBRATION
PREV NEXT
DIAG FCAL
4
2
ENTR EXIT
LAMP CAL VALUE:4262.4 mV
6
2
.4
The value displayed is the
current output of the UV
source reference detector
Figure 5-32:
06807F DCN7335
ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the
new value
EXIT ignores the new
value
DIAG – Lamp Calibration
121
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.9.7. PRESSURE CALIBRATION
A sensor at the exit of the sample chamber continuously measures the pressure of the
sample gas. This data is used to compensate the final SO2 concentration calculation for
changes in atmospheric pressure when the instrument’s TPC feature is turned on (refer
to Section 5.8, Table 5-2) and is stored in the CPU’s memory as the test function PRES
(also viewable via the front panel).
Ensure to use a barometer that measures actual barometric pressure.
To cause the analyzer to measure and record a value for PRES, access the Signal I/O
from the DIAG Menu, SETUP>MORE>DIAG (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
Repeat Pressing NEXT until . . .
DIAG
PRESSURE CALIBRATION
PREV NEXT
ENTR EXIT
DIAG PCAL ACTUAL PRES :27.20 IN-HG-A
2
7
.2
0
Adjust these values until the
displayed pressure equals the
pressure measured by the
independent pressure meter.
Figure 5-33:
122
ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the
new value
EXIT ignores the new
value
DIAG – Pressure Calibration
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
5.9.8. FLOW CALIBRATION
The flow calibration allows the user to adjust the values of the sample flow rates as they
are displayed on the front panel and reported through COM ports to match the actual
flow rate measured at the Sample inlet. This does not change the hardware measurement
of the flow sensors, only the software calculated values.
To carry out this adjustment, connect an external, sufficiently accurate flow meter to the
SAMPLE inlet (refer to Section 10.3.7 for more details).
Once the flow meter is attached and is measuring actual gas flow, access the Signal I/O
from the DIAG Menu, SETUP>MORE>DIAG (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
Repeat Pressing NEXT until . . .
DIAG
FLOW CALIBRATION
ENTR EXIT
PREV NEXT
DIAG FCAL
0
6
ACTUAL FLOW: 607 CC / M
0
7
ENTR EXIT
Adjust these values until the
displayed flow rate equals the
flow rate being measured by the
independent flow meter.
Figure 5-34:
06807F DCN7335
ENTR accepts the
new value
EXIT ignores the new
value
DIAG – Flow Calibration
123
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5.9.9. TEST CHANNEL OUTPUT
When activated, output channel A3 can be used in the standard configuration to report
one of the test functions viewable from the SAMPLE mode display.
To activate the A3 channel and select a test function, access the Signal I/O from the
DIAG Menu, SETUP>MORE.DIAG (refer to Figure 5-16), then press:
DIAG
SIGNAL I / O
ENTR EXIT
PREV NEXT
Continue to press NEXT until …
DIAG
PREV
TEST CHAN OUTPUT
NEXT
DIAG TCHN
NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
TEST CHANNEL: NONE
ENTR
EXIT
DIAG TCHN TEST CHANNEL: PMT READING
PREV
NEXT
Press PREV or NEXT
to move through the
list of available
parameters
(Table 6-9)
Figure 5-35:
124
ENTR
Press ENTR to
select the displayed
parameter and to
activate the test
channel.
EXIT
Press EXIT to
return to the
DIAG menu
DIAG – Test Channel Output
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SETUP Menu
Table 5-9: Test Parameters Available for Analog Output A3 (standard configuration)
Test Channel
Test parameter range
NONE
Test channel is turned off
PMT READING
0-5000 mV
UV READING
0-5000 mV
SAMPLE PRESSURE
0-40 in-Hg-A
SAMPLE FLOW
0-1000 cm³/min
RCELL TEMP
0-70° C
CHASSIS TEMP
0-70° C
IZS TEMP
0-70° C
PMT TEMP
0-50° C
HVPS VOLTAGE
0-5000 V
Once a TEST function is selected, the instrument begins to report a signal on the A3
output and adds TEST to the list of test functions viewable on the display (just before
the TIME test function).
06807F DCN7335
125
SETUP Menu
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
This page intentionally left blank.
126
06807F DCN7335
6. COMMUNICATIONS SETUP AND OPERATION
This instrument rear panel connections include an Ethernet port, a USB port (option) and
two serial communications ports (labeled RS232, which is the COM1 port, and COM2)
located on the rear panel (refer to Figure 3-4). These ports give the user the ability to
communicate with, issue commands to, and receive data from the analyzer through an
external computer system or terminal.
This section provides pertinent information regarding communication equipment,
describes the instrument’s communications modes, presents configuration instructions
for the communications ports, and provides instructions for their use, including
communications protocol. Data acquisition is presented in Section 7.
6.1. DATA TERMINAL / COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT (DTE DCE)
RS-232 was developed for allowing communications between data terminal equipment
(DTE) and data communication equipment (DCE). Basic terminals always fall into the
DTE category whereas modems are always considered DCE devices. The difference
between the two is the pin assignment of the Data Receive and Data Transmit functions.
•
DTE devices receive data on pin 2 and transmit data on pin 3.
•
DCE devices receive data on pin 3 and transmit data on pin 2.
To allow the analyzer to be used with terminals (DTE), modems (DCE) and computers
(which can be either), a switch mounted below the serial ports on the rear panel allows
the user to set the RS-232 configuration for one of these two data devices. This switch
exchanges the Receive and Transmit lines on RS-232 emulating a cross-over or nullmodem cable. The switch has no effect on COM2.
6.2. COMMUNICATION MODES, BAUD RATE AND PORT TESTING
Use the SETUP>MORE>COMM menu to configure COM1 (labeled RS232 on
instrument rear panel) and/or COM2 (labeled COM2 on instrument rear panel) for
communication modes, baud rate and/or port testing for correct connection. If using a
USB option communication connection, setup requires configuring the COM2 baud rate
(Section 6.2.2).
06807F DCN7335
127
Communications Setup and Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
6.2.1. COMMUNICATION MODES
Either of the analyzer’s serial ports (RS232 or COM2 on rear panel) can be configured
to operate in a number of different modes, which are described in .
Table 6-1: COMM Port Communication Modes
1
MODE
ID
DESCRIPTION
1
Quiet mode suppresses any feedback from the analyzer (DAS reports, and warning
messages) to the remote device and is typically used when the port is communicating with
a computer program such as APICOM. Such feedback is still available but a command
must be issued to receive them.
COMPUTER
2
Computer mode inhibits echoing of typed characters and is used when the port is
communicating with a computer program, such as APICOM.
HESSEN
PROTOCOL
16
QUIET
E, 7, 1
2048
Allows the COMM port settings to be set between either
No parity; 8 data bits; 1 stop bit (ON/OFF)
to
Even parity; 7 data bits; 1 stop bit (ON/OFF)
1024
Configures the COM2 Port for RS-485 communication. RS-485 mode has precedence
over Multidrop mode if both are enabled. When the COM2 port is configured for RS-485
communication, the rear panel USB port is disabled.
RS-485
SECURITY
4
When enabled, the serial port requires a password before it will respond. The only
command that is active is the help screen (? CR).
MULTIDROP
PROTOCOL
32
Multidrop protocol allows a multi-instrument configuration on a single communications
channel. Multidrop requires the use of instrument IDs.
ENABLE
MODEM
64
Enables sending a modem initialization string at power-up. Asserts certain lines in the RS232 port to enable the modem to communicate.
ERROR
2
CHECKING
128
Fixes certain types of parity errors at certain Hessen protocol installations.
XON/XOFF
2
HANDSHAKE
256
Disables XON/XOFF data flow control also known as software handshaking.
HARDWARE
HANDSHAKE
8
HARDWARE
2
FIFO
512
COMMAND
PROMPT
4096
1
2
128
The Hessen communications protocol is used in some European countries. Teledyne
API’s part number 02252 contains more information on this protocol.
Enables CTS/RTS style hardwired transmission handshaking. This style of data
transmission handshaking is commonly used with modems or terminal emulation protocols
as well as by Teledyne Instrument’s APICOM software.
Improves data transfer rate when one of the COMM ports.
Enables a command prompt when in terminal mode.
Modes are listed in the order in which they appear in the
SETUP  MORE  COMM  COM[1 OR 2]  MODE menu
The default setting for this feature is ON. Do not disable unless instructed to by Teledyne API’s Technical Support personnel.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Communications Setup and Operation
To turn on or off the communication modes for either COM1 or COM2, access the
SETUP>MORE>[COM1 or COM2] menu and at the COM1[2] Mode menu press
EDIT.
Select which COM
port to configure
ID
The sum of the mode
IDs of the selected
modes is displayed
here
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
SETUP X.X
INET
COM1
COM1 MODE: 32
SETUP X.X
SET>
SETUP X.X
EXIT
COM2
EDIT
EXIT
COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF
NEXT OFF
ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT to scroll through the
available Modes and press the ON or OFF button
to enable or disable each mode.
Figure 6-1: COMM – Communication Modes Setup
06807F DCN7335
129
Communications Setup and Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
6.2.2. COMM PORT BAUD RATE
To select the baud rate of either COMM Port, go to SETUP>MORE>COMM and select
either COM1 or COM2 as follows (use COM2 to view/match your personal computer
baud rate when using the USB port, Section 6.5.3):
Select which COM
port to configure.
(COM1 for example).
SETUP X.X
ID
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
INET COM1
EXIT
SETUP X.X
Press SET> until you
reach the COM1
BAUD RATE
SET>
COM2
COM1 MODE:0
EDIT
EXIT
EXAMPLE
Use PREV and NEXT
to move between
available baud rates.
300
1200
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
SETUP X.X
<SET SET>
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
EDIT
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
NEXT ON
EXIT
EXIT
ignores
the new
setting
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
ENTR
EXIT
ENTR
accepts
the new
setting
COM1 BAUD RATE:9600
ENTR
EXIT
Figure 6-2: COMM – COMM Port Baud Rate
130
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Communications Setup and Operation
6.2.3. COMM PORT TESTING
The serial ports can be tested for correct connection and output in the COMM menu.
This test sends a string of 256 ‘w’ characters to the selected COM port. While the test is
running, the red LED on the rear panel of the analyzer should flicker.
To initiate the test press, access the COMMUNICATIONS Menu (refer to Figure 5-13),
then press:
SETUP X.X
ID
INET
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1
SETUP X.X
SET>
SETUP X.X
<SET SET>
SETUP X.X
<SET
SETUP X.X
Test runs
automatically
<SET
COM2
EXIT
Select which
COMM port to
test.
COM1 MODE:0
EDIT
EXIT
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
EDIT
EXIT
COM1 : TEST PORT
TEST
EXIT
TRANSMITTING TO COM1
TEST
EXIT returns to
COMM menu
EXIT
Figure 6-3: COMM – COM1 Test Port
6.3. RS-232
The RS232 and COM2 communications (COMM) ports operate on the RS-232 protocol
(default configuration). Possible configurations for these two COMM ports are
summarized as follows:
•
RS232 port can also be configured to operate in single or RS-232 Multidrop mode
(Option 62); refer to Section 3.3.1.8.
•
COM2 port can be left in its default configuration for standard RS-232 operation
including multidrop, or it can be reconfigured for half-duplex RS-485 operation
(please contact the factory for this configuration).
Note that when the rear panel COM2 port is in use, except for multidrop
communication, the rear panel USB port cannot be used. (Alternatively, when the USB
port is enabled, COM2 port cannot be used except for multidrop).
06807F DCN7335
131
Communications Setup and Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
A code-activated switch (CAS), can also be used on either port to connect typically
between 2 and 16 send/receive instruments (host computer(s) printers, data loggers,
analyzers, monitors, calibrators, etc.) into one communications hub. Contact Teledyne
API Sales for more information on CAS systems.
To configure the analyzer’s communication ports, use the SETUP>MORE>COMM
menu. Refer to Section 5.7 for initial setup, and to Section 6.2 for additional
configuration information.
6.4. RS-485 (OPTION)
The COM2 port of the instrument’s rear panel is set up for RS-232 communication but
can be reconfigured for RS-485 communication. Contact Technical Support. If this
option was elected at the time of purchase, the rear panel was preconfigured at the
factory.
6.5. ETHERNET
When using the Ethernet interface, the analyzer can be connected to any standard
10BaseT or 100BaseT Ethernet network via low-cost network hubs, switches or routers.
The interface operates as a standard TCP/IP device on port 3000. This allows a remote
computer to connect through the network to the analyzer using APICOM, terminal
emulators or other programs.
The Ethernet cable connector on the rear panel has two LEDs indicating the Ethernet’s
current operating status.
Table 6-2: Ethernet Status Indicators
LED
FUNCTION
amber (link)
On when connection to the LAN is valid.
green (activity
Flickers during any activity on the LAN.
The analyzer is shipped with DHCP enabled by default. This allows the instrument to be
connected to a network or router with a DHCP server. The instrument will automatically
be assigned an IP address by the DHCP server (Section 6.5.2). This configuration is
useful for quickly getting an instrument up and running on a network. However, for
permanent Ethernet connections, a static IP address should be used. Section 6.5.1 below
details how to configure the instrument with a static IP address.
132
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Communications Setup and Operation
6.5.1. CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATION MANUALLY (STATIC
IP ADDRESS)
1. Connect a cable from the analyzer’s Ethernet port to a Local Area Network (LAN) or
Internet port.
2. From the analyzer’s front panel touchscreen, access the Communications Menu
(SETUP>MORE>COMM as shown in Figure 5-13.
3. Follow the setup sequence as shown in Figure 6-4, and edit the Instrument and
Gateway IP addresses and Subnet Mask to the desired settings.
4. From the computer, enter the same information through an application such as
HyperTerminal.
Table 6-3 shows the default Ethernet configuration settings.
Table 6-3: LAN/Internet Default Configuration Properties
PROPERTY
DHCP
DEFAULT STATE
DESCRIPTION
ON
This displays whether the DHCP is turned ON or OFF. Press
EDIT and toggle ON for automatic configuration after first
consulting network administrator. (
INSTRUMENT IP
ADDRESS
GATEWAY IP
ADDRESS
SUBNET MASK
TCP PORT
1
HOST NAME
1
This string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.
192.168.76.55.) is the address of the analyzer itself.
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF.
A string of numbers very similar to the Instrument IP address
(e.g. 192.168.76.1.) that is the address of the computer used
by your LAN to access the Internet.
Can only be edited when DHCP is set to OFF.
Also a string of four packets of 1 to 3 numbers each (e.g.
255.255.252.0) that identifies the LAN to which the device is
connected.
All addressable devices and computers on a LAN must have
the same subnet mask. Any transmissions sent to devices
with different subnets are assumed to be outside of the LAN
and are routed through the gateway computer onto the
Internet.
3000
This number defines the terminal control port by which the
instrument is addressed by terminal emulation software, such
as Internet or Teledyne API’s APICOM.
T100
The name by which your analyzer will appear when
addressed from other computers on the LAN or via the
Internet. To change, see Section 6.5.2.1.
Do not change the setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne API’s Technical Support
personnel.
06807F DCN7335
133
Communications Setup and Operation
SETUP X.X
ID
INET
SAMPLE
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Internet Configuration Button Functions
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1
COM2
BUTTON
FUNCTION
[0]
Location of cursor. Press to cycle through the range of
numerals and available characters (“0 – 9” & “ . ”)
EXIT
<CH CH> Moves the cursor one character left or right.
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
DEL
8
DHCP: ON is
default setting.
Skip this step
if it has been
set to OFF.
1
8
SETUP X.X
ENTR
DHCP: ON
SETUP X.X
Deletes a character at the cursor location.
ENTR
Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.
EXIT
Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous
menu.
Some buttons appear only when relevant.
SET> EDIT
EXIT
DHCP: OFF
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
EXIT
EXIT
INST IP: 000.000.000.000
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
Cursor
location is
indicated by
brackets
INST IP: [0] 00.000.000
<CH CH>
DEL [0]
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X GATEWAY IP: 000.000.000.000
<SET
SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
GATEWAY IP: [0] 00.000.000
<CH CH>
DEL [?]
ENTR EXIT
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:255.255.255.0
<SET
SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X SUBNET MASK:[2]55.255.255.0
SETUP X.X TCP PORT 3000
<SET
Pressing EXIT from
any of the above
display menus
causes the Ethernet
option to reinitialize
its internal interface
firmware
<CH CH>
EDIT
DEL [?]
ENTR EXIT
EXIT
The PORT number must remain at 3000.
Do not change this setting unless instructed to by
Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel.
SETUP X.X
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZING INET 0%
…
INITIALIZING INET 100%
INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED
SETUP X.X
ID
INET
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZATION FAILED
Contact your IT
Network Administrator
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1
COM2
EXIT
Figure 6-4: COMM – LAN / Internet Manual Configuration
134
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Communications Setup and Operation
6.5.2. CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATION USING DYNAMIC
HOST CONFIGURATION PROTOCOL (DHCP)
1. Consult with your network administrator to affirm that your network server is running
DHCP.
2. Access the Communications Menu as shown in Figure 5-13.
3. Follow the setup sequence as shown in Figure 6-5.
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
SETUP X.X
From this point on,
EXIT returns to
COMMUNICATIONS
MENU
ID
INET
SAMPLE
COM1
COM2
EXIT
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
8
1
8
SETUP X.X
ENTR
EXIT
DHCP: ON
SET>
EDIT
EXIT
DHCP: ON is
default setting.
If it has been
set to OFF,
press EDIT
and set to ON.
SETUP X.X
SETUP X.X
ON
SET>
SETUP X.X
<SET
<SET
GATEWAY IP: 0.0.0.0
<SET
EXIT
TCP PORT: 3000
SET>
EDIT
EXIT
Do not alter unless
directed to by Teledyne
Instruments Customer
Service personnel
TCP PORT2: 502
SET>
SETUP X.X
EDIT button
disabled
EXIT
SET>
SETUP X.X
<SET
ENTR EXIT
SUBNET MASK: 0.0.0.0
SETUP X.X
<SET
DHCP: ON
EXIT
SET>
SETUP X.X
ENTR EXIT
INST IP: 0.0.0.0
SETUP X.X
<SET
DHCP: OFF
OFF
EDIT
EXIT
HOSTNAME:
EDIT
EXIT
Figure 6-5: COMM – LAN / Internet Automatic Configuration
06807F DCN7335
135
Communications Setup and Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
6.5.2.1. CHANGING THE ANALYZER’S HOSTNAME
The HOSTNAME is the name by which the analyzer appears on your network. The
typical default name for all Teledyne API’s T100 analyzers is 100 but could be 0. To
change this name (particularly if you have more than one T100 analyzer on your
network), access the COMMUNICATIONS Menu (refer to Figure 5-13), then press:
SETUP X.X
HOSTNAME: T100
<SET
SETUP X.X
INET
ID
SAMPLE
8
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1
COM2
SETUP X.X
<CH CH>
EXIT
8
HOSTNAME: T100
INS
DEL
[?]
ENTR EXIT
Use these buttons (See
Table 5-3) to edit HOSTNAME
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
EXIT
EDIT
ENTR
EXIT
SETUP X.X
<SET
Continue pressing SET> UNTIL …
SETUP X.X
HOSTNAME: T100-FIELD1
EXIT
EDIT
INITIALIZING INET
0%
…
INITIALIZING INET 100%
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZATI0N SUCCEEDED
SETUP X.X
ID
INET
SETUP X.X
INITIALIZATION FAILED
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1
COM2
Contact your IT Network
Administrator
EXIT
Figure 6-6: COMM – Change Hostname
Table 6-4: Hostname Editing Button Functions
Button
Function
<CH
Moves the cursor one character to the left.
CH>
Moves the cursor one character to the right.
INS
Inserts a character before the cursor location.
DEL
Deletes a character at the cursor location.
[?]
Press this button to cycle through the range of numerals and characters
available for insertion.:
0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
ENTR
Accepts the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
EXIT
Ignores the new setting and returns to the previous menu.
Buttons only appear when applicable.
136
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Communications Setup and Operation
6.5.3. USB PORT FOR REMOTE ACCESS
The analyzer can be operated through a personal computer by downloading the TAPI
USB driver and directly connecting their respective USB ports.
1. Install the Teledyne T-Series USB driver on your computer, downloadable from the
Teledyne API website under Help Center>Software Downloads (www.teledyneapi.com/software).
2. Run the installer file: “TAPIVCPInstaller.exe”
3. Connect the USB cable between the USB ports on your personal computer and your
analyzer. The USB cable should be a Type A – Type B cable, commonly used as a
USB printer cable.
4. Determine the Windows XP Com Port number that was automatically assigned to
the USB connection. (Start → Control Panel → System → Hardware → Device
Manager). This is the com port that should be set in the communications software,
such as APIcom or Hyperterminal.
Refer to the Quick Start (Direct Cable Connection) section of the Teledyne APIcom
Manual, PN 07463.
5. In the instrument’s SETUP>MORE>COMM>COM2 menu, make the following settings:
06807F DCN7335
137
Communications Setup and Operation
Baud Rate: 115200
COM2 Mode Settings:
Quiet Mode
Computer Mode
MODBUS RTU
MODBUS ASCII
E,8,1 MODE
E,7,1 MODE
RS-485 MODE
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SECURITY MODE
MULTIDROP MODE
ENABLE MODEM
ERROR CHECKING
XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE
HARDWARE HANDSHAKE
HARDWARE FIFO
COMMAND PROMPT
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
6. Next, configure your communications software, such as APIcom. Use the COM port
determined in Step 4 and the baud rate set in Step 5. The figures below show how
these parameters would be configured in the Instrument Properties window in
APIcom when configuring a new instrument. See the APIcom manual (PN 07463)
for more details.
Note
138
•
USB configuration requires that the baud rates of the instrument and
the PC match; check the PC baud rate and change if needed.
•
Using the USB port disallows use of the rear panel COM2 port except
for multidrop communication.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Communications Setup and Operation
6.6. COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOLS
6.6.1. MODBUS
The following set of instructions assumes that the user is familiar with MODBUS
communications, and provides minimal information to get started. For additional
instruction, please refer to the Teledyne API MODBUS manual, PN 06276. Also refer to
www.modbus.org for MODBUS communication protocols.
Minimum Requirements
•
•
Instrument firmware with MODBUS capabilities installed.
MODBUS-compatible software (TAPI uses MODBUS Poll for testing; see
www.modbustools.com)
• Personal computer
• Communications cable (Ethernet or USB or RS232)
• Possibly a null modem adapter or cable
MODBUS Setup:
Set Com Mode parameters
Comm Ethernet:
Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – INET; scroll through the INET
submenu until you reach TCP PORT 2 (the standard setting is 502), then continue to TCP
PORT 2 MODBUS TCP/IP; press EDIT and toggle the menu button to change the setting
to ON, then press ENTR. (Change Machine ID if needed: see “Slave ID”).
USB/RS232: Using the front panel menu, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – COM2 – EDIT; scroll through
the COM2 EDIT submenu until the display shows COM2 MODBUS RTU: OFF (press
OFF to change the setting to ON. Scroll NEXT to COM2 MODBUS ASCII and ensure it is
set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the new settings. (If RTU is not available with your
communications equipment, set the COM2 MODBUS ASCII setting to ON and ensure that
COM2 MODBUS RTU is set to OFF. Press ENTR to keep the new settings).
Slave ID A MODBUS slave ID must be set for each instrument. Valid slave ID’s are in the range of 1 to 247. If
your analyzer is connected to a serial network (i.e., RS-485), a unique Slave ID must be assigned to each
instrument. To set the slave ID for the instrument, go to SETUP – MORE – COMM – ID. The default
MACHINE ID is the same as the model number. Toggle the menu buttons to change the ID.
Reboot analyzer
For the settings to take effect, power down the analyzer, wait 5 seconds, and power up the analyzer.
Make appropriate cable
connections
Connect your analyzer either:
• via its Ethernet or USB port to a PC (this may require a USB-to-RS232 adapter for your PC; if so, also
install the software driver from the CD supplied with the adapter, and reboot the computer if required), or
• via its COM2 port to a null modem (this may require a null modem adapter or cable).
Specify MODBUS software
settings
(examples used here are for
MODBUS Poll software)
1. Click
Read the Modbus Poll Register
06807F DCN7335
Setup / [Read / Write Definition] /.
In the Read/Write Definition window (see example that follows) select a Function (what you wish
to read from the analyzer).
b. Input Quantity (based on your firmware’s register map).
c. In the View section of the Read/Write Definition window select a Display (typically Float Inverse).
d. Click OK.
2. Next, click Connection/Connect.
a. In the Connection Setup window (see example that follows), select the options based on your
computer.
b. Press OK.
Use the Register Map to find the test parameter names for the values displayed (see example that follows
If desired, assign an alias for each.
a.
139
Communications Setup and Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Example Read/Write Definition window:
Example Connection Setup window:
Example MODBUS Poll window:
140
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Communications Setup and Operation
6.6.2. HESSEN
The Hessen protocol is a Multidrop protocol, in which several remote instruments are
connected via a common communications channel to a host computer. The remote
instruments are regarded as slaves of the host computer. The remote instruments are
unaware that they are connected to a Multidrop bus and never initiate Hessen protocol
messages. They only respond to commands from the host computer and only when they
receive a command containing their own unique ID number.
The Hessen protocol is designed to accomplish two things: to obtain the status of remote
instruments, including the concentrations of all the gases measured; and to place remote
instruments into zero or span calibration or measure mode. API’s implementation
supports both of these principal features.
The Hessen protocol is not well defined; therefore while API’s application is completely
compatible with the protocol itself, it may be different from implementations by other
companies.
The following subsections describe the basics for setting up your instrument to operate
over a Hessen Protocol network. For more detailed information as well as a list of host
computer commands and examples of command and response message syntax,
download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from the Teledyne API’s website:
http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp.
6.6.2.1. HESSEN COMM PORT CONFIGURATION
Hessen protocol requires the communication parameters of the T100’s COMM ports to
be set differently than the standard configuration as shown in the table below.
Table 6-5: RS-232 Communication Parameters for Hessen Protocol
Parameter
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Standard
Hessen
8
7
1
2
Parity
None
Even
Duplex
Full
Half
To change the rest of the COMM port parameters and modes, refer to Section 6.
To change the baud rate of the T100’s COMM ports, refer to Section 6.2.2.
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Ensure that the communication parameters of the host computer are also
properly set.
Note
The instrument software has a 200 ms latency before it responds to
commands issued by the host computer. This latency should present no
problems, but you should be aware of it and not issue commands to the
instrument too quickly.
06807F DCN7335
141
Communications Setup and Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
6.6.2.2. ACTIVATING HESSEN PROTOCOL
The first step in configuring the T100 to operate over a Hessen protocol network is to
activate the Hessen mode for COMM ports and configure the communication
parameters for the port(s) appropriately. Access the COMMUNICATIONS Menu (refer
to Figure 5-13), then press:
Select which COMM
port to configure
SETUP X.X
ID
The sum of the mode
IDs of the selected
modes is displayed
here
INET
COM1
SETUP X.X
SET>
SETUP X.X
COM2
EXIT
COM1 MODE: 0
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
EDIT
EXIT
COM1 QUIET MODE: OFF
NEXT OFF
Repeat the
entire process to
set up the
COM2 port
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
ENTR EXIT
Continue pressing next until …
COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL: OFF
OFF
ENTR EXIT
COM1 HESSEN PROTOCOL: ON
PREV NEXT ON
SETUP X.X
COM1 E,8,1 MODE: OFF
PREV NEXT
OFF
SETUP X.X
COM1 E,8,1 MODE: ON
PREV NEXT ON
SETUP X.X
COM1 E,7,1 MODE: OFF
PREV NEXT
OFF
SETUP X.X
COM1 E,7,1 MODE: ON
PREV NEXT ON
ENTR EXIT
Press OFF/ON to
change
activate/deactivate
selected mode.
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
settings
ENTR EXIT
EXIT ignores the new
settings
Figure 6-7: COMM – Activating Hessen Protocol
142
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Communications Setup and Operation
6.6.2.3. SELECTING A HESSEN PROTOCOL TYPE
Currently there are two version of Hessen Protocol in use. The original implementation,
referred to as TYPE 1, and a more recently released version, TYPE 2 that has more
flexibility when operating with instruments that can measure more than one type of gas.
For more specific information about the difference between TYPE 1 and TYPE 2
download the Manual Addendum for Hessen Protocol from Teledyne API’s web site:
http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/index.asp.
To select a Hessen Protocol Type, access the COMMUNICATIONS Menu (refer to
Figure 5-13), then press:
SETUP X.X
ID
INET
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
HESN
SETUP X.
SET>
COM1
COM2
EXIT
HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
EDIT
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
settings
SETUP X.X
HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
TYPE1 TYPE 2
Press to change
protocol type.
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT
EXIT ignores the new
settings
ENTR EXIT
HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 2
OFF
ENTR EXIT
Figure 6-8: COMM – Select Hessen Protocol Type
Note
06807F DCN7335
While Hessen Protocol Mode can be activated independently for RS-232
and COM2, the TYPE selection affects both Ports.
143
Communications Setup and Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
6.6.2.4. SETTING THE HESSEN PROTOCOL RESPONSE MODE
Teledyne API’s implementation of Hessen Protocol allows the user to choose one of
several different modes of response for the analyzer.
Table 6-6: T100 Hessen Protocol Response Modes
MODE ID
MODE DESCRIPTION
CMD
This is the Default Setting. Reponses from the instrument are encoded as the traditional command format.
Style and format of responses depend on exact coding of the initiating command.
BCC
Responses from the instrument are always delimited with <STX> (at the beginning of the response, <ETX>
(at the end of the response followed by a 2 digit Block Check Code (checksum), regardless of the command
encoding.
TEXT
Responses from the instrument are always delimited with <CR> at the beginning and the end of the string,
regardless of the command encoding.
To Select a Hessen response mode, access the COMMUNICATIONS Menu (refer to
Figure 5-13), then press:
SETUP X.X
ID
INET
HESN
SETUP X.X
SET>
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
COM1
COM2
EXIT
HESSEN VARIATION: TYPE 1
EDIT
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
settings
Press to
change
response
mode.
SETUP X.X
HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD
<SET SET>
EDIT
SETUP X.X
HESSEN RESPONSE MODE :CMD
BCC TEXT
CMD
EXIT ignores the new
settings
EXIT
ENTR EXIT
Figure 6-9: COMM – Select Hessen Protocol Response Mode
144
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Communications Setup and Operation
6.6.2.5. HESSEN PROTOCOL GAS ID
The T100 analyzer is a single gas instrument that measures SO2. As such, its default gas
ID has already been set to 110. There is no need to change this setting.
6.6.2.6. SETTING HESSEN PROTOCOL STATUS FLAGS
Teledyne API’s implementation of Hessen protocols includes a set of status bits that the
instrument includes in responses to inform the host computer of its condition. Each bit
can be assigned to one operational and warning message flag. The default settings for
these bit/flags are listed in Table 6-7:
Table 6-7: Default Hessen Status Bit Assignments
STATUS FLAG NAME
DEFAULT BIT ASSIGNMENT
WARNING FLAGS
SAMPLE FLOW WARNING
0001
PMT DET WARNING
0002
UV LAMP WARNING
0002
HVPS WARNING
0004
DARK CAL WARNING
0008
RCELL TEMP WARNING
0010
IZS TEMP WARNING
0020
PMT TEMP WARNING
0040
INVALID CONC
0080
OPERATIONAL FLAGS
In Manual Calibration Mode
0200
In Zero Calibration Mode
0400
In Span Calibration Mode
0800
UNITS OF MEASURE FLAGS
UGM
0000
MGM
2000
PPB
4000
PPM
6000
SPARE/UNUSED BITS
100. 8000
UNASSIGNED FLAGS
06807F DCN7335
Box Temp Warning
MP Calibration
Sample Press Warning
Analog Cal Warning
System Reset
Cannot Dyn Zero
Rear Board Not Detected
Cannot Dyn Span
Relay Board Warning
Instrument Off
145
Communications Setup and Operation
IMPORTANT
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
It is possible to assign more than one flag to the same Hessen status bit.
This allows the grouping of similar flags, such as all temperature
warnings, under the same status bit. Be careful not to assign conflicting
flags to the same bit as each status bit will be triggered if any of the
assigned flags are active.
To assign or reset the status flag bit assignments, access the COMMUNICATIONS
Menu (refer to Figure 5-13), then press:
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
SETUP X.X
ID
INET
HESN
COM1
COM2
EXIT
Repeat pressing SET> until …
SETUP X.
HESSEN STATUS FLAGS
<SET SET>
EDIT
SETUP X.
PMT DET WARNING: 0002
PREV NEXT
EXIT
EDIT
PRNT EXIT
Repeat pressing NEXT or PREV until the desired
message flag is displayed. Refer to Table 7-15.
For Example …
SETUP X.
PREV NEXT
Press <CH and
CH> to move the
[ ] cursor left
and right along
the bit string.
SETUP X.
<CH
CH>
SYSTEM RESET: 0000
EDIT
PRNT EXIT
SYSTEM RESET: [0]000
[0]
ENTR accepts the new
settings
ENTR EXIT
EXIT ignores the new
settings
Press [?]repeatedly to cycle through the available character set: 0-9
Note: Values of A-F can also be set but are meaningless.
Figure 6-10:
COMM – Status Flag Bit Assignment
6.6.2.7. INSTRUMENT ID
Each instrument on a Hessen Protocol network must have a unique identifier (ID
number). Refer to Section 5.7.1 for information and to customize the ID of each.
146
06807F DCN7335
7. DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS) AND APICOM
The T100 analyzer contains a flexible and powerful, internal data acquisition system
(DAS) that enables the analyzer to store concentration and calibration data as well as a
host of diagnostic parameters. The DAS of the T100 can store several months of data,
depending on individual configurations. The data are stored in non-volatile memory and
are retained even when the instrument is powered off. Data are stored in plain text
format for easy retrieval and use in common data analysis programs (such as
spreadsheet-type programs).
The DAS is designed to be flexible, users have full control over the type, length and
reporting time of the data. The DAS permits users to access stored data through the
instrument’s front panel or its communication ports. Using APICOM, data can even be
retrieved automatically to a remote computer for further processing.
The principal use of the DAS is logging data for trend analysis and predictive
diagnostics, which can assist in identifying possible problems before they affect the
functionality of the analyzer. The secondary use is for data analysis, documentation and
archival in electronic format.
To support the DAS functionality, Teledyne API offers APICOM, a program that
provides a visual interface for remote or local setup, configuration and data retrieval of
the DAS. The APICOM manual, which is included with the program, contains a more
detailed description of the DAS structure and configuration, which is briefly described
in this section.
The T100 is configured with a basic DAS configuration, which is enabled by default.
New data channels are also enabled by default but each channel may be turned off for
later or occasional use. Note that DAS operation is suspended while its configuration is
edited through the front panel. To prevent such data loss, it is recommended to use the
APICOM graphical user interface for DAS changes.
The green SAMPLE LED on the instrument front panel, which indicates the analyzer
status, also indicates certain aspects of the DAS status, as described in Table 7-1.
06807F DCN7335
147
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Table 7-1: Front Panel LED Status Indicators for DAS
LED STATE
Off
Blinking
On
Note
DAS STATUS
System is in calibration mode. Data logging can be enabled or disabled for this mode.
Calibration data are typically stored at the end of calibration periods, concentration data are
typically not sampled, diagnostic data should be collected.
Instrument is in hold-off mode, a short period after the system exits calibrations. DAS
channels can be enabled or disabled for this period. Concentration data are typically disabled
whereas diagnostic should be collected.
Sampling normally.
The DAS can be disabled only by disabling or deleting its individual data
channels.
7.1. DAS STRUCTURE
The DAS is designed around the feature of a “record”. A record is a single data point of
one parameter, stored in one (or more) data channels and generated by one of several
triggering event. The entire DAS configuration is stored in a script, which can be edited
from the front panel or downloaded, edited and uploaded to the instrument in form of a
string of plain-text lines through the communication ports.
DAS data are defined by the PARAMETER type and are stored through different
triggering EVENTS in data CHANNELS, which relate triggering events to data
parameters and define certain operational functions related to the recording and
reporting of the data.
7.1.1. DAS CHANNELS
The key to the flexibility of the DAS is its ability to store a large number of
combinations of triggering events and data parameters in the form of data channels.
Users may create up to 20 data channels and each channel can contain one or more
parameters. For each channel one triggering event is selected and up to 50 data
parameters, which can be the same or different between channels. Each data channel has
several properties that define the structure of the channel and allow the user to make
operational decisions regarding the channel (refer to Table 7-2).
148
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Table 7-2: DAS Data Channel Properties
Property
NAME
TRIGGERING
EVENT
NUMBER AND
LIST OF
PARAMETERS
Description
Default
Setting Range
The name of the data channel.
“NONE”
The event that triggers the data channel to measure
and store its data parameters. Refer to APPENDIX
A for a list of available triggering events.
A User-configurable list of data types to be
recorded in any given channel. Refer to APPENDIX
A-5 for a list of available parameters
ATIMER
Up to 6 letters and digits
(more with APICOM, but only
the first six are displayed on
the front panel).
Any allowed event.
REPORT PERIOD The amount of time between each channel data
point.
NUMBER OF
RECORDS
RS-232 REPORT
CHANNEL
ENABLED
CAL HOLD OFF
The number of reports that will be stored in the data
file. Once the specified limit has been exceeded,
the oldest data are over-written to make space for
new data.
Enables the analyzer to automatically report
channel values to the RS-232 ports.
Enables or disables the channel. Provides a
convenient means to temporarily disable a data
channel.
Disables sampling of data parameters while the
instrument is in calibration mode.
Note that - when enabled here - there is also a
length of the DAS HOLD OFF after calibration
mode, which is set in the VARS menu (refer to
Section 7.2.11).
1 - PMTDET
000:01:00
100
Any available concentration,
temperature, pneumatic or
diagnostic parameter.
000:00:01 to
366:23:59
(Days:Hours:Minutes)
1 to 1 million, limited by
available storage space.
OFF
OFF or ON
ON
OFF or ON
OFF
OFF or ON
7.1.2. DAS PARAMETERS
Data parameters are types of data that may be measured and stored by the DAS. For
each Teledyne API’s analyzer model, the list of available data parameters is different,
fully defined and not customizable. Appendix A lists firmware specific data parameters
for the T100. The most common parameters are concentrations of the measured gas
(SO2), temperatures of heated zones (converter, sample chamber, box temperature…),
pressures and flows of the pneumatic subsystem and other diagnostic measurements as
well as calibration data (slope and offset) for each gas.
Most data parameters have associated measurement units, such as mV, ppb, cm³/min,
etc., although some parameters have no units. The only units that can be changed are
those of the concentration readings according to the SETUP-RANGE settings. Note that
the DAS does not keep track of the unit of each concentration value and DAS data files
may contain concentrations in multiple units if the unit was changed during data
acquisition.
Each data parameter has user-configurable functions that define how the data are
recorded (refer to Table 7-3).
06807F DCN7335
149
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Table 7-3: DAS Data Parameter Functions
FUNCTION
EFFECT
PARAMETER
Instrument-specific parameter name.
SAMPLE MODE
INST: Records instantaneous reading.
AVG: Records average reading during reporting interval.
MIN: Records minimum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
MAX: Records maximum (instantaneous) reading during reporting interval.
PRECISION
Decimal precision of parameter value (0-4).
STORE NUM. SAMPLES
OFF: stores only the average (default).
ON: stores the average and the number of samples in each average for a parameter. This
property is only useful when the AVG sample mode is used. Note that the number of
samples is the same for all parameters in one channel and needs to be specified only for
one of the parameters in that channel.
Users can specify up to 50 parameters per data channel (the T100 provides about 30
parameters). However, the number of parameters and channels is ultimately limited by
available memory.
7.1.3. DAS TRIGGERING EVENTS
Triggering events define when and how the DAS records a measurement of any given
data channel. Triggering events are firmware-specific and are listed in Appendix A. The
most common triggering events are:
•
ATIMER: Sampling at regular intervals specified by an automatic timer. Most
trending information is usually stored at such regular intervals, which can be
instantaneous or averaged.
•
EXITZR, EXITSP, SLPCHG (exit zero, exit span, slope change): Sampling at the
end of (irregularly occurring) calibrations or when the response slope changes.
These triggering events create instantaneous data points, e.g., for the new slope and
offset (concentration response) values at the end of a calibration. Zero and slope
values are valuable to monitor response drift and to document when the instrument
was calibrated.
•
WARNINGS: Some data may be useful when stored if one of several warning
messages appears. This is helpful for trouble-shooting by monitoring when a
particular warning occurred.
7.2. DEFAULT DAS CHANNELS
A set of default Data Channels has been included in the analyzer’s software for logging
SO2 concentration and certain predictive diagnostic data. These default channels include
but are not limited to:
CONC: Samples SO2 concentration at one minute intervals and stores an average every
five minutes with a time and date stamp. Readings during calibration and calibration
hold off are not included in the data. By default, the last 4032 hourly averages are
stored.
150
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
PNUMTC: Collects sample flow and sample pressure data at five minute intervals and
stores an average once a day with a time and date stamp. This data is useful for
monitoring the condition of the pump and critical flow orifice (sample flow) and the
sample filter (clogging indicated by a drop in sample pressure) over time to predict when
maintenance will be required. The last 360 daily averages (about 1 year) are stored.
CALDAT: Logs new slope and offset every time a zero or span calibration is
performed. This Data Channel also records the instrument reading just prior to
performing a calibration. Note: this Data Channel collects data based on an event (a
calibration) rather than a timer. This Data Channel will store data from the last 200
calibrations. This does not represent any specific length of time since it is dependent on
how often calibrations are performed. As with all Data Channels, a time and date stamp
is recorded for every data point logged.
DETAIL: Samples fourteen different parameters related to the operating status of the
analyzers optical sensors and PMT. For each parameter:
•
A value is logged once every minute;
•
An average of the last 60 readings is calculated once every.
•
The last 480 averages are stored (20 days).
This channel is useful for diagnosing problems that cause the instruments measurements
to drift slowly over time
FAST: Almost identical to DETAIL except that for each parameter:
•
Samples are taken once per minute and reported once per minute, in effect causing
the instrument to record an instantaneous reading of each parameter every minute.
•
The last 360 readings for each parameter are recorded/reported.
This channel is useful for diagnosing transients; spikes and noise problems.
These default Data Channels can be used as they are, or they can be customized to fit a
specific application. They can also be deleted to make room for custom userprogrammed Data Channels. This can be done via the instrument’s front panel or
downloaded via the analyzer’s COM ports using a program such as APICOM (Section
7.3) or other terminal emulation program.
IMPORTANT
06807F DCN7335
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Sending a DAS configuration to the analyzer through its COM ports will
replace the existing configuration and will delete all stored data. Back up
any existing data and the DAS configuration before uploading new
settings
151
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
The Channel Properties, Triggering Events and Data Parameters/Functions for these
default channels are:
PARAMETER: PMTDET
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
LIST OF CHANNELS
PARAMETER: UVDET
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
NAME: CONC
EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETERS: 2
STARTING DATE: 01-JAN-15
SAMPLE PERIOD: 000:00:01
REPORT PERIOD: 000:00:05
NO. OF RECORDS: 4032
RS-232 REPORT: ON
COMPACT REPORT: OFF
CHANNEL ENABLED: ON
PARAMETER: LAMPR
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: DRKPMT
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
NAME: PNUMTC
EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETERS: 2
STARTING DATE: 01-JAN-15
SAMPLE PERIOD: 000:00:05
REPORT PERIOD: 001:00:00
NO. OF RECORDS: 360
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
COMPACT REPORT: OFF
CHANNEL ENABLED: ON
PARAMETER: DARKUV
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: CONC1
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 3
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: SMPFLW
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: SMPPRS
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
NAME: CALDAT
EVENT: SLPCHG
PARAMETERS: 3
NO. OF RECORDS:200
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
COMPACT REPORT: OFF
CHANNEL ENABLED: ON
CAL HOLD OFF: OFF
NAME: DETAIL
EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETERS: 14
STARTING DATE: 01-JAN-07
SAMPLE PERIOD: 000:00:01
REPORT PERIOD: 000:01:00
NO. OF RECORDS:480
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
COMPACT REPORT: OFF
CHANNEL ENABLED: ON
PARAMETER: RCTEMP
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 2
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
Same parameters &
PARAMETER: SMPPRS
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: STABIL
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 2
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: SLOPE1
MODE: INST
PRECISION:3
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: STABIL
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: STRLGT
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: CONC1
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
settings as DETAIL
PARAMETER: OFSET1
MODE: INST
PRECISION: 1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: ZSCNC1
MODE: INST
PRECISION: 1
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
NAME: FAST
EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETERS: 14
STARTING DATE: 01-JAN-15
SAMPLE PERIOD: 000:00:01
REPORT PERIOD: 000:00:01
NO. OF RECORDS:360
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
COMPACT REPORT: OFF
CHANNEL ENABLED: ON
PARAMETER: BOXTEMP
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: HVPS
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: REFGND
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
PARAMETER: REF4096
MODE: AVG
PRECISION: 4
STORE NUM SAMPLES OFF
Figure 7-1: Default DAS Channels Setup
152
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
7.2.1. VIEWING DAS DATA AND SETTINGS
DAS data and settings can be viewed on the front panel through the following control
button sequence.
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
8
EXIT will return to the
main SAMPLE Display.
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
8
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
FUNCTION
<PRM
Moves to the next Parameter
PRM>
Moves to the previous
Parameter
NX10
Moves the view forward 10
data points/channels
NEXT
Moves to the next data
point/channel
PREV
Moves to the previous data
point/channel
PV10
Moves the view back 10 data
points/channels
EXIT
DATA ACQUISITION
VIEW EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
BUTTON
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
Buttons only appear as needed
CONC : DATA AVAILABLE
NEXT
VIEW
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PV10 PREV
SETUP X.X
PREV
MENU BUTTON FUNCTIONS
SETUP
00:00:00
CONC1 =XXXX PPB
NEXT NX10 <PRM
NEXT
VIEW
EXIT
00:00:00 SMPFLW=000.0 cc / m
<PRM
SETUP X.X
NEXT
VIEW
SETUP X.X
00:00:00
SLOPE1=0.000
<PRM
PRM>
EXIT
DETAILED: DATA AVAILABLE
NEXT
VIEW
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PV10 PREV
PREV
EXIT
EXIT
PV10 PREV
SETUP X.X
PRM>
CALDAT: DATA AVAILABLE
SETUP X.X
PREV
EXIT
PNUMTC: DATA AVAILABLE
SETUP X.X
PREV
PRM>
00:00::00 PMTDET=0000.0000 m
<PRM
PRM>
EXIT
FAST: DATA AVAILABLE
VIEW
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PV10 PREV
00:00::00 PMTDET=0000.0000 m
<PRM
PRM>
EXIT
Figure 7-2: DAS – Data Acquisition Menu
06807F DCN7335
153
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
7.2.2. 7.3EDITING DAS DATA CHANNELS
Although DAS configuration is most conveniently done through the APICOM remote
control program (refer to Section ), the following illustrations shows how to edit DAS
channels using the analyzer’s front panel control buttons.
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
EXIT will return to the
previous SAMPLE
display.
8
SETUP
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
SETUP X.X
8
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
Main Data Acquisition Menu
SETUP X.X
DATA ACQUISITION
VIEW EDIT
EXIT
Edit Data Channel Menu
Moves the
display up &
down the list of
Data Channels
Inserts a new Data
Channel into the list
BEFORE the Channel
currently being displayed
Moves the display
between the
PROPERTIES for this
data channel.
SETUP X.X
0) CONC1: ATIMER, 2, 4032, RS-232
PREV NEXT
INS
DEL EDIT
PRNT
EXIT
Exits to the Main
Data Acquisition
Menu
Exports the
configuration of all
data channels to
RS-232 interface.
Deletes the Data
Channel currently
being displayed
SETUP X.X
NAME:CONC1
<SET SET> EDIT PRNT
Allows to edit the channel name, see next menu button.
Exits returns to the
previous Menu
EXIT
Reports the configuration of current
data channels to the RS-232 ports.
Figure 7-3: DAS – Editing DAS Data Channels
154
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
When editing the data channels, the top line of the display indicates some of the
configuration parameters. For example, the display line:
0) CONC: ATIMER, 4, 800
represents to the following configuration:
CHANNEL NUMBER.: 0
NAME: CONC
TRIGGER EVENT: ATIMER
PARAMETERS: Four parameters are included in this channel
EVENT: This channel is set up to record 800 data points.
To edit the name of a data channel, refer to Figure 7-3, then press:
SETUP X.X
<SET
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
C
NAME:CONC1
O
PRINT
EXIT
NAME:CONC
N
C
1
-
ENTR
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new string
and returns to the previous
menu.
EXIT ignores the new string
and returns to the previous
menu.
Press each as many times as needed to cycle through the
character set until desired character appears:
0-9, A-Z, space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ = +[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
Figure 7-4: DAS – Editing Data Channel Name
06807F DCN7335
155
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
7.2.3. TRIGGER EVENTS
To edit the list of data parameters associated with a specific data channel, refer to the
DATA Acquisition Menu (refer to Figure 7-2), then press:
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
0) CONC1:
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
<SET
PRNT
4032,R
EXIT
Exits to the Main
Data Acquisition
menu
PRINT
EXIT
EVENT:ATIMER
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
DEL EDIT
2,
NAME:CONC1
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
<SET
INS
ATIMER,
PRINT
EXIT
EVENT:ATIMER
<PREV NEXT>
ENTR
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new string
and returns to the previous
menu.
EXIT ignores the new string
and returns to the previous
menu.
Press each button repeatedly to cycle through
the list of available trigger events.
Figure 7-5: DAS – Trigger Events
156
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
7.2.4. EDITING DAS PARAMETERS
Data channels can be edited individually from the front panel without affecting other
data channels. However, when editing a data channel, such as during adding, deleting or
editing parameters, all data for that particular channel will be lost, because the DAS can
store only data of one format (number of parameter columns etc.) for any given channel.
In addition, a DAS configuration can only be uploaded remotely as an entire set of
channels. Hence, remote update of the DAS will always delete all current channels and
stored data.
To modify, add or delete a parameter, follow the instruction shown in Figure 7-3, then
press:
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
<SET
0) CONC1:
INS
ATIMER,
DEL EDIT
2,
4032, R
PRNT
EXIT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
NAME:CONC1
SET> EDIT
PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> until…
SETUP X.X
<SET
YES will delete
all data in that
entire channel.
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
YES
PARAMETERS : 2
PRINT
EXIT
EDIT PARAMS (DELETE DATA)
NO
NO returns to
the previous
menu and
retains all data.
Edit Data Parameter Menu
Moves the
display between
available
Parameters
Inserts a new Parameter
before the currently
displayed Parameter
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT
0) PARAM=CONC1, MODE=AVG
INS
DEL EDIT
EXIT
Deletes the Parameter
currently displayed.
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
Use to configure
the functions for
this Parameter.
Figure 7-6: DAS – Editing DAS Parameters
06807F DCN7335
157
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
To configure the parameters for a specific data parameter, follow the instructions as
shown in Figure 7-6, then press:
SETUP X.X
0) PARAM=CONC1, MODE=AVG
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
INS
DEL EDIT
EXIT
PARAMETERS:CONC1
SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X
PARAMETERS: CONC1
PREV NEXT
ENTR
EXIT
Cycle through list of available
Parameters.
SETUP X.X
<SET SET>
SAMPLE MODE:AVG
EXIT
EDIT
SETUP X.X
SAMPLE MODE: AVG
INST AVG SDEV MIN MAX
ENTR
EXIT
Press any button for the desired mode
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
SETUP X.X PRECISION: 1
<SET SET>
EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X PRECISION: 1
1
ENTR
EXIT
Set for 0-4
<SET Returns to
previous
Functions
SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF
<SET
EDIT
EXIT
SETUP X.X STORE NUM. SAMPLES: OFF
OFF
ENTR
EXIT
Turn ON or OFF
Figure 7-7: DAS – Configuring Parameters for a Specific Data Parameter
158
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
7.2.5. SAMPLE PERIOD AND REPORT PERIOD
The DAS defines two principal time periods by which sample readings are taken and
permanently recorded:
SAMPLE PERIOD: Determines how often DAS temporarily records a sample reading
of the parameter in volatile memory. The SAMPLE PERIOD is set to one minute by
default and generally cannot be accessed from the standard DAS front panel menu, but
is available via the instruments communication ports by using APICOM or the
analyzer’s standard serial data protocol. SAMPLE PERIOD is only used when the
DAS parameter’s sample mode is set for AVG, MIN or MAX.
REPORT PERIOD: Sets how often the sample readings stored in volatile memory are
processed, (e.g. average, minimum or maximum are calculated) and the results stored
permanently in the instrument’s Disk-on-Module as well as transmitted via the
analyzer’s communication ports. The REPORT PERIOD may be set from the front
panel.
If the INST sample mode is selected the instrument stores and reports an instantaneous
reading of the selected parameter at the end of the chosen REPORT PERIOD
In AVG, MIN or MAX sample modes, the settings for the SAMPLE PERIOD and the
REPORT PERIOD determine the number of data points used each time the average,
minimum or maximum is calculated, stored and reported to the COMM ports. The actual
sample readings are not stored past the end of the of the chosen REPORT PERIOD.
Also, the SAMPLE PERIOD and REPORT PERIOD intervals are synchronized to
the beginning and end of the appropriate interval of the instruments internal clock.
If SAMPLE PERIOD were set for one minute the first reading would occur at the
beginning of the next full minute according to the instrument’s internal clock.
If the REPORT PERIOD were set for of one hour the first report activity would occur
at the beginning of the next full hour according to the instrument’s internal clock.
EXAMPLE: Given the above settings, if DAS were activated at 7:57:35 the first sample
would occur at 7:58 and the first report would be calculated at 8:00 consisting of data
points for 7:58. 7:59 and 8:00.
During the next hour (from 8:01 to 9:00) the instrument will take a sample reading every
minute and include 60 sample readings.
When the STORE NUM. SAMPLES feature is turned on the instrument will also store
how many sample readings were used for the AVG, MIN or MAX calculation but not
the readings themselves.
REPORT PERIODS IN PROGRESS WHEN INSTRUMENT IS POWERED OFF
If the instrument is powered off in the middle of a REPORT PERIOD, the samples
accumulated so far during that period are lost. Once the instrument is turned back on,
the DAS restarts taking samples and temporarily them in volatile memory as part of the
REPORT PERIOD currently active at the time of restart. At the end of this REPORT
PERIOD only the sample readings taken since the instrument was turned back on will
be included in any AVG, MIN or MAX calculation. Also, the STORE NUM.
SAMPLES feature will report the number of sample readings taken since the instrument
was restarted.
06807F DCN7335
159
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
To define the REPORT PERIOD, follow the instruction shown in Figure 7-3, then
press:
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
Use PREV and NEXT to
scroll to the data channel
to be edited.
0) CONC:
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
<SET
INS
ATIMER,
DEL EDIT
2,
4032, R
PRNT
EXIT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu.
NAME:CONC
SET> EDIT
PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> until you reach REPORT PERIOD …
SETUP X.X
<SET
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
Set the number of days
between reports (0-365).
Press buttons to set amount of
time between reports, in hours
(HH) and/or minutes (MM)
(max: 23:59). 01:00 sets a
report to be made every hour.
0
0
SETUP X.X
0
REPORT PERIOD:000:00:05
1
PRINT
EXIT
REPORT PERIODD:DAYS:0
0
ENTR
EXIT
REPORT PERIODD:TIME:01:00
0
0
ENTR
EXIT
IIf at any time an invalidl entry is selected (e.g., days > 366)
the ENTR button will disappear from the display.
ENTR accepts the new string and
returns to the previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new string and
returns to the previous menu.
Figure 7-8: DAS – Define the Report Period
7.2.6. NUMBER OF RECORDS
Although the DAS is capable of capturing several months worth of data,, the actual
number of records is also limited by the total number of parameters and channels and
other settings in the DAS configuration. Every additional data channel, parameter,
number of samples setting etc. will reduce the maximum amount of data points
somewhat. In general, however, the maximum data capacity is divided amongst all
channels (max: 20) and parameters (max: 50 per channel).
The DAS will check the amount of available data space and prevent the user from
specifying too many records at any given point. If, for example, the DAS memory space
can accommodate 375 more data records, the ENTR button will disappear when trying
to specify more than that number of records. This check for memory space may also
make an upload of a DAS configuration with APICOM or a Terminal program fail, if
the combined number of records would be exceeded. In this case, it is suggested to
either try from the front panel what the maximum number of records can be or use trialand-error in designing the DAS script or calculate the number of records using the DAS
or APICOM manuals. To set the number of records for one channel from the front panel,
press SETUP-DAS-EDIT-ENTR and the following control button sequence.
160
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
0) CONC:
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
<SET
INS
ATIMER,
DEL EDIT
2,
900
PRNT
EXIT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
NAME:CONC
SET> EDIT
PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> until…
SETUP X.X
<SET
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
YES will delete all data
in this channel.
Toggle buttons to set
number of records
(1-99999)
YES
PRINT
EXIT
EDIT RECORDS (DELETEs DATA)?
NO
SETUP X.X
0
NUMBER OF RECORDS:4032
4
NUMBER OF RECORDS:4032
0
3
2
ENTR
EXIT
NO returns to the
previous menu.
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
Figure 7-9: DAS – Edit Number of Records
06807F DCN7335
161
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
7.2.7. RS-232 REPORT FUNCTION
The DAS can automatically report data to the communications ports, where they can be
captured with a terminal emulation program or simply viewed by the user.
To enable automatic COMM port reporting, follow the instruction shown in Figure 7-3,
then press:
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
<SET
0) CONC:
INS
ATIMER,
DEL EDIT
2,
4032, R
PRNT
EXIT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
NAME:CONC
SET> EDIT
PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> until…
SETUP X.X
<SET
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
Toggle to turn
reporting ON or OFF
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
OFF
Figure 7-10:
PRINT
EXIT
RS-232 REPORT: OFF
ENTR
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
DAS – RS-232 Report Function
7.2.8. COMPACT REPORT
When enabled, this option avoids unnecessary line breaks on all RS-232 reports. Instead
of reporting each parameter in one channel on a separate line, up to five parameters are
reported in one line, instead.
7.2.9. STARTING DATE
This option allows a user to specify a starting date for any given channel in case the user
wants to start data acquisition only after a certain time and date. If the Starting Date is
in the past, the DAS ignores this setting.
162
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
7.2.10. DISABLING/ENABLING DATA CHANNELS
Data channels can be temporarily disabled, which can reduce the read/write wear on the
disk-on-module. The ALL_01 channel of the T100, for example, is disabled by default.
To disable a data channel, follow the instruction shown in Figure 7-3, then press:
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
<SET
0) CONC:
INS
ATIMER,
DEL EDIT
2,
4032, R
PRNT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
EXIT
NAME:CONC
SET> EDIT
PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> until…
SETUP X.X
<SET
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
Toggle to turn
channel ON or OFF
OFF
Figure 7-11:
06807F DCN7335
CHANNEL ENABLE:ON
PRINT
EXIT
CHANNEL ENABLE:ON
ENTR
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
DAS – Disabling / Enabling Data Channels
163
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
7.2.11. HOLDOFF FEATURE
The DAS HOLDOFF feature prevents data collection during calibrations and during the
DAS_HOLDOFF period enabled and specified in the VARS (refer to Section 5.8).
To enable or disable the HOLDOFF, follow the instruction shown in Figure 7-3, then
press:
Edit Data Channel Menu
SETUP X.X
0) CONC:
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
<SET
INS
ATIMER,
2,
DEL EDIT
4032, R
PRNT
EXIT
Exits to the main
Data Acquisition
menu
NAME:CONC
SET> EDIT
PRINT
EXIT
Press SET> until…
SETUP X.X
CAL HOLD OFF:ON
SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
Toggle to turn HOLDOFF
ON or OFF
PRINT
EXIT
CAL HOLD OFF:ON
ON
ENTR
Figure 7-12:
EXIT
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to the
previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
menu.
DAS – Holdoff Feature
The DAS can be configured and operated remotely via the APICOM program.
164
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
7.3. APICOM REMOTE CONTROL PROGRAM
APICOM is an easy-to-use, yet powerful interface program that allows a user to access
and control any of Teledyne API’s main line of ambient and stack gas instruments from
a remote connection through direct cable, modem, or Ethernet. Running APICOM, a
user can:
•
Establish a link from a remote location to the T100 through direct cable connection
via RS-232 modem or Ethernet.
•
View the instrument’s front panel and remotely access all functions that could be
accessed when standing in front of the instrument.
•
Remotely edit system parameters and set points.
•
Download, view, graph and save data for predictive diagnostics or data analysis.
•
Retrieve, view, edit, save and upload DAS configurations (Section 7.4).
•
Check on system parameters for trouble-shooting and quality control.
APICOM is very helpful for initial setup, data analysis, maintenance and
troubleshooting. Figure 7-15 shows an example of APICOM being used to remotely
configuration the DAS feature. Figure 7-13 shows examples of APICOM’s main
interface, which emulates the look and functionality of the instrument’s actual front
panel:
Figure 7-13:
APICOM Remote Control Program Interface
APICOM is included with the analyzer and the latest versions can also be downloaded at
no charge at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.
06807F DCN7335
165
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
7.4. REMOTE DAS CONFIGURATION VIA APICOM
Editing channels, parameters and triggering events as described in this section is
performed via the APICOM remote control program using the graphic interface similar
to the example shown in Figure 7-14. Refer to Section 8 for details on remote access to
the T100 analyzer.
Figure 7-14:
Sample APICOM User Interface for Configuring the DAS
Once a DAS configuration is edited (which can be done offline and without interrupting
DAS data collection), it is conveniently uploaded to the instrument and can be stored on
a computer for later review, alteration or documentation and archival. Refer to the
APICOM manual for details on these procedures. The APICOM user manual (Teledyne
API’s P/N 039450000) is included in the APICOM installation file, which can be
downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/software/apicom/.
Although Teledyne API recommends the use of APICOM, the DAS can also be
accessed and configured through a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal
(refer to Figure 7-15). However, all configuration commands must be created following
a strict syntax or be pasted in from of a text file, which was edited offline and then
uploaded through a specific transfer procedure.
166
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Figure 7-15:
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
DAS Configuration Through a Terminal Emulation Program
Both procedures are best started by downloading the default DAS configuration, getting
familiar with its command structure and syntax conventions, and then altering a copy of
the original file offline before uploading the new configuration.
IMPORTANT
06807F DCN7335
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Whereas the editing, adding and deleting of DAS channels and
parameters of one channel through the front-panel control buttons can
be done without affecting the other channels, uploading a DAS
configuration script to the analyzer through its communication ports will
erase all data, parameters and channels by replacing them with the new
DAS configuration. Backup of data and the original DAS configuration is
advised before attempting any DAS changes.
167
Data Acquisition System (DAS) and APICOM
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
This page intentionally left blank.
168
06807F DCN7335
8. REMOTE OPERATION OF THE ANALYZER
This section provides information needed when using external digital and serial I/O and
when using Hessen protocol for remote operation. It also provides references to
communications-related manuals.
8.1. REMOTE OPERATION USING THE EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O
8.1.1. STATUS OUTPUTS
The status outputs report analyzer conditions via optically isolated NPN transistors,
which sink up to 50 mA of DC current. These outputs can be used interface with
devices that accept logic-level digital inputs, such as programmable logic controllers
(PLC’s). Each Status bit is an open collector output that can withstand up to 40 VDC.
All of the emitters of these transistors are tied together and available at D.
ATTENTION
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Most PLC’s have internal provisions for limiting the current that the
input will draw from an external device. When connecting to a unit that
does not have this feature, an external dropping resistor must be used
to limit the current through the transistor output to less than 50 mA. At
50 mA, the transistor will drop approximately 1.2 V from its collector to
emitter.
The status outputs are accessed through a 12 pin connector on the analyzer’s rear panel
labeled STATUS (refer to Figure 3-4). The function of each pin is defined in Table 8-1.
06807F DCN7335
169
Remote Operation of the Analyzer
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
STATUS
8
D
Connect to Internal
7
+
Ground of Monitoring
6
DIAGNOSTIC MODE
5
SPAN CAL
4
ZERO CAL
3
HIGH RANGE
2
CONC VALID
SYSTEM OK
1
Figure 8-1: Status Output Connector
Table 8-1: Status Output Pin Assignments
CONNECTOR PIN
STATUS
CONDITION (ON=CONDUCTING)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7-8
System Ok
ON if no faults are present.
Conc Valid
ON if concentration measurement is valid, OFF when invalid.
High Range
ON if unit is in high range of any AUTO range mode.
Zero Cal
ON whenever the instrument is in ZERO calibration mode.
Span Cal
ON whenever the instrument is in SPAN calibration mode.
Diag Mode
ON whenever the instrument is in DIAGNOSTIC mode.
Unused
D
Emitter Bus
The emitters of the transistors on pins 1-8 are bussed together. For most
applications, this pin should be connected to the circuit ground of the
receiving device.
+
Dc Power
+ 5 VDC source, 30 mA maximum (combined rating with Control Inputs)
Digital Ground
The ground from the analyzer’s internal, 5/±15 VDC power supply.
8.1.2. CONTROL INPUTS
Control inputs allow the user to remotely initiate ZERO and SPAN calibration modes
provided through a 10-pin connector labeled CONTROL IN on the analyzer’s rear
panel. These are opto-isolated, digital inputs that are activated when a 5 VDC signal
from the “U” pin is connected to the respective input pin.
170
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Remote Operation of the Analyzer
Table 8-2: Control Input Pin Assignments
INPUT
STATUS
CONDITION WHEN ENABLED
A
External Zero Cal
Zero calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display will read
ZERO CAL R.
B
External Span Cal
Span calibration mode is activated. The mode field of the display will read
SPAN CAL R.
C
Unused
D
Unused
E
Unused
F
Unused
Digital Ground
Provided to ground an external device (e.g., recorder).
U
DC Power For Input
Pull Ups
Input for +5 VDC required to activate inputs A - F. This voltage can be taken
from an external source or from the “+” pin.
+
Internal +5v Supply
Internal source of +5V which can be used to activate inputs when connected
to pin U.
There are two methods to activate control inputs. The internal +5V available from the
“+” pin is the most convenient method (Figure 8-2). However, to ensure that these
inputs are truly isolated, a separate, external 5 VDC power supply should be used
(Figure 8-3).
CONTROL IN
B
C
D
E
F
U
+
SPAN
ZERO
A
Figure 8-2: Control Inputs with Local 5 V Power Supply
06807F DCN7335
171
Remote Operation of the Analyzer
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
CONTROL IN
B
C
D
E
F
+
U
SPAN
ZERO
A
-
5 VDC Power
Supply
+
Figure 8-3: Control Inputs with External 5 V Power Supply
8.2. REMOTE OPERATION USING THE EXTERNAL SERIAL I/O
8.2.1. TERMINAL OPERATING MODES
The T100 can be remotely configured, calibrated or queried for stored data through the
serial ports. As terminals and computers use different communication schemes, the
analyzer supports two communication modes specifically designed to interface with
these two types of devices.
Computer mode is used when the analyzer is connected to a computer with a dedicated
interface program such as APICOM. More information regarding APICOM can be
found in later in this section or on the Teledyne API’s website at http://www.teledyneapi.com/software/apicom/.
Interactive mode is used with a terminal emulation programs such as HyperTerminal or
a “dumb” computer terminal. The commands that are used to operate the analyzer in this
mode are listed in Table 8-3 and in Appendix A-6.
8.2.2. HELP COMMANDS IN TERMINAL MODE
Table 8-3: Terminal Mode Software Commands
Command
Control-T
Control-C
CR
(carriage return)
BS
(backspace)
ESC
(escape)
? [ID] CR
Control-C
Control-P
172
Function
Switches the analyzer to terminal mode (echo, edit). If mode flags 1 & 2 are OFF, the interface can be
used in interactive mode with a terminal emulation program.
Switches the analyzer to computer mode (no echo, no edit).
A carriage return is required after each command line is typed into the terminal/computer. The command
will not be sent to the analyzer to be executed until this is done. On personal computers, this is achieved
by pressing the ENTER button.
Erases one character to the left of the cursor location.
Erases the entire command line.
This command prints a complete list of available commands along with the definitions of their functionality
to the display device of the terminal or computer being used. The ID number of the analyzer is only
necessary if multiple analyzers are on the same communications line, such as the multi-drop setup.
Pauses the listing of commands.
Restarts the listing of commands.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Remote Operation of the Analyzer
8.2.3. COMMAND SYNTAX
Commands are not case-sensitive and all arguments within one command (i.e. ID
numbers, keywords, data values, etc.) must be separated with a space character.
All Commands follow the syntax:
X [ID] COMMAND <CR>
Where:
X
is the command type (one letter) that defines the type of command. Allowed
designators are listed in Table 6-25 and Appendix A-6.
[ID]
is the analyzer identification number (refer to Section 5.7.1). Example: the
Command “? 200” followed by a carriage return would print the list of
available commands for the revision of software currently installed in the
instrument assigned ID Number 200.
COMMAND is the command designator: This string is the name of the command being
issued (LIST, ABORT, NAME, EXIT, etc.). Some commands may have
additional arguments that define how the command is to be executed.
Press? <CR> or refer to Appendix A-6 for a list of available command
designators.
<CR>
is a carriage return. All commands must be terminated by a carriage return
(usually achieved by pressing the ENTER button on a computer).
Table 8-4: Command Types
COMMAND
C
D
L
T
V
W
COMMAND TYPE
Calibration
Diagnostic
Logon
Test measurement
Variable
Warning
8.2.4. DATA TYPES
Data types consist of integers, hexadecimal integers, floating-point numbers, Boolean
expressions and text strings.
Integer data are used to indicate integral quantities such as a number of records, a filter
length, etc. They consist of an optional plus or minus sign, followed by one or more
digits. For example, +1, -12, 123 are all valid integers.
Hexadecimal integer data are used for the same purposes as integers. They consist of
the two characters “0x,” followed by one or more hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F, a-f),
which is the ‘C’ programming language convention. No plus or minus sign is permitted.
For example, 0x1, 0x12, 0x1234abcd are all valid hexadecimal integers.
Floating-point numbers are used to specify continuously variable values such as
temperature set points, time intervals, warning limits, voltages, etc. They consist of an
optional plus or minus sign, followed by zero or more digits, an optional decimal point,
and zero or more digits. (At least one digit must appear before or after the decimal
point.) Scientific notation is not permitted. For example, +1.0, 1234.5678, -0.1, 1 are all
valid floating-point numbers.
06807F DCN7335
173
Remote Operation of the Analyzer
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Boolean expressions are used to specify the value of variables or I/O signals that may
assume only two values. They are denoted by the keywords ON and OFF.
Text strings are used to represent data that cannot be easily represented by other data
types, such as data channel names, which may contain letters and numbers. They consist
of a quotation mark, followed by one or more printable characters, including spaces,
letters, numbers, and symbols, and a final quotation mark. For example, “a”, “1”,
“123abc”, and “()[]<>” are all valid text strings. It is not possible to include a
quotation mark character within a text string.
Some commands allow you to access variables, messages, and other items, such as DAS
data channels, by name. When using these commands, you must type the entire name of
the item; you cannot abbreviate any names.
8.2.5. STATUS REPORTING
Reporting of status messages as an audit trail is one of the three principal uses for the
RS-232 interface (the other two being the command line interface for controlling the
instrument and the download of data in electronic format). You can effectively disable
the reporting feature by setting the interface to quiet mode (refer to Section 6.2.1 and
Table 6-1.
Status reports include DAS data (when reporting is enabled), warning messages,
calibration, and diagnostic status messages. Refer to Appendix A for a list of the
possible messages, and this section for information on controlling the instrument
through the RS-232 interface.
8.2.5.1. GENERAL MESSAGE FORMAT
All messages from the instrument (including those in response to a command line
request) are in the format:
X DDD:HH:MM [Id] MESSAGE<CRLF>
Where:
X
is a command type designator, a single character indicating the
message type, as shown in the Table 6-25.
DDD:HH:MM
is the time stamp, the date and time when the message was issued. It
consists of the Day-of-year (DDD) as a number from 1 to 366, the hour
of the day (HH) as a number from 00 to 23, and the minute (MM) as a
number from 00 to 59.
[ID]
is the analyzer ID, a number with 1 to 4 digits.
MESSAGE
is the message content that may contain warning messages, test
measurements, DAS reports, variable values, etc.
<CRLF>
is a carriage return / line feed pair, which terminates the message.
The uniform nature of the output messages makes it easy for a host computer to parse
them into an easy structure. Keep in mind that the front panel display does not give any
information on the time a message was issued; hence, it is useful to log such messages
for trouble-shooting and reference purposes. Terminal emulation programs such as
HyperTerminal can capture these messages to text files for later review.
174
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Remote Operation of the Analyzer
8.3. REMOTE ACCESS BY MODEM
The T100 can be connected to a modem for remote access. This requires a cable
between the analyzer’s COM port and the modem, typically a DB-9F to DB-25M cable
(available from Teledyne API with P/N WR0000024).
Once the cable has been connected, check to ensure that the DTE-DCE is in the correct
position (refer to Section 6.1). Also ensure that the T100 COM port is set for a baud rate
that is compatible with the modem, which needs to operate with an 8-bit word length
with one stop bit.
The first step is to turn on the MODEM ENABLE communication mode (Mode 64,
Section 6.2.1). Once this is completed, the appropriate setup command line for your
modem can be entered into the analyzer. The default setting for this feature is:
AT Y0 &D0 &H0 &I0 S0=2 &B0 &N6 &M0 E0 Q1 &W0
This string can be altered to match your modem’s initialization and can be up to 100
characters long.
06807F DCN7335
175
Remote Operation of the Analyzer
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
To
change
this
setting,
access
(SETUP>MORE.COMM), then press:
SETUP X.X
ID
COM1
SETUP X.X
EDIT
<SET SET>
Select which
COM Port is
tested
EXIT
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
EDIT
SETUP X.X
<SET SET>
EXIT
COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y∅ &D∅ &H
EDIT
SETUP X.X
<CH and CH> move the [ ]
cursor left and right along the
text string
EXIT
COM2
Menu
COM1 MODE:0
SETUP X.X
<CH CH>
COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
INET
SET>
the
EXIT
COM1 MODEM INIT:[A]T Y∅ &D∅ &H
INS
INS inserts a
character before
the cursor location.
DEL
[A]
ENTR
DEL deletes a
character at the
cursor location.
EXIT
ENTR accepts the
new string and returns
to the previous menu.
EXIT ignores the new
string and returns to
the previous menu.
Press the [?]
button repeatedly to cycle through
the available character set:
0-9
A-Z
space ’ ~ !  # $ % ^ & * ( ) - _ =
+[ ] { } < >\ | ; : , . / ?
Figure 8-4: COMM – Remote Access by Modem
176
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Remote Operation of the Analyzer
To
initialize
the
modem,
access
(SETUP>MORE>COMM), then press:
INET
COM1
SETUP X.X
SET>
EDIT
<SET SET>
SETUP X.X
<SET SET>
Select which
COM Port is
tested
EXIT
COM1 BAUD RATE:19200
EDIT
EXIT
COM1 MODEM INIT:AT Y∅ &D∅ &H
EDIT
EXIT
COM1 INITIALIZE MODEM
<SET SET> INIT
SETUP X.X
EXIT returns to the
Communications Menu.
EXIT
COM2
Menu
COM1 MODE:0
SETUP X.X
SETUP X.X
COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS MENU
SETUP X.X
ID
the
<SET SET> INIT
EXIT
INITIALIZING MODEM
EXIT
Figure 8-5: COMM – Initialize the Modem
06807F DCN7335
177
Remote Operation of the Analyzer
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
8.4. COM PORT PASSWORD SECURITY
In order to provide security for remote access of the T100, a LOGON feature can be
enabled to require a password before the instrument will accept commands. This is done
by turning on the SECURITY MODE (refer to Section 5.5). Once the SECURITY
MODE is enabled, the following items apply.
•
A password is required before the port will respond or pass on commands.
•
If the port is inactive for one hour, it will automatically logoff, which can also be
achieved with the LOGOFF command.
•
Three unsuccessful attempts to log on with an incorrect password will cause
subsequent logins to be disabled for 1 hour, even if the correct password is used.
•
If not logged on, the only active command is the '?' request for the help screen.
•
The following messages will be returned at logon:
•
LOGON SUCCESSFUL - Correct password given
•
LOGON FAILED - Password not given or incorrect
•
LOGOFF SUCCESSFUL - Connection terminated successfully
To log on to the T100 analyzer with SECURITY MODE feature enabled, type:
LOGON 940331
940331 is the default password. To change the default password, use the variable RS232_PASS issued as follows:
V RS-232_PASS=NNNNNN
Where N is any numeral between 0 and 9.
8.5. ADDITIONAL COMMUNICATIONS DOCUMENTATION
Table 8-5: Serial Interface Documents
Interface / Tool
Document Title
Part Number
Available Online*
APICOM
APICOM User Manual
058130000
YES
DAS Manual
Detailed description of the DAS
028370000
YES
* These documents can be downloaded at http://www.teledyne-api.com/manuals/.
178
06807F DCN7335
9. CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
This section describes the calibration procedures for the T100. All of the methods
described in this section can be initiated and controlled through the COM ports.
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
If you are using the T100 for US-EPA controlled monitoring, refer to
Section 0 for information on the EPA calibration protocol.
9.1. CALIBRATION PREPARATIONS
The calibration procedures in this section assume that the analog range and units of
measure, range mode, and reporting range have already been selected for the analyzer. If
this has not been done, please do so before continuing (refer to Sections 3.4.4.1 and 5 for
instructions).
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
It is recommended that the LAMP CAL routine (refer to Section 5.9.6) be
performed prior to all calibration operations.
This will allow the
instrument to account for minor changes due to aging of the UV lamp.
9.1.1. REQUIRED EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, AND EXPENDABLES
Calibration of the T100 analyzer requires specific equipment and supplies. These
include, but are not limited to, the following:
06807F DCN7335
•
Zero-air source
•
Sulfur dioxide span gas source
•
Gas lines - all gas line materials should be Teflon-type or glass.
•
A recording device such as a strip-chart recorder and/or data logger (optional).
•
Traceability Standards
179
9.1.1.1. ZERO AIR
Zero air is similar in chemical composition to the Earth’s atmosphere but scrubbed of all
components that might affect the analyzer’s readings. For SO2 measuring devices, zero
air should be similar in composition to the sample gas but devoid of SO2 and large
amounts of hydrocarbons, nitrogen oxide (NO) and with a water vapor dew point
≤ -15° C.
Devices such as the API Model 701 zero air generator that condition ambient air by
drying and removal of pollutants are available. We recommend this type of device for
generating zero air.
9.1.1.2. SPAN GAS
Span gas is specifically mixed to match the chemical composition of the gas being
measured at about 80% of the desired full measurement range. For example, if the
measurement range is 500 ppb, the span gas should have an SO2 concentration of about
400 ppb.
Span gases should be certified to a specific accuracy to ensure accurate calibration of the
analyzer. Typical gas accuracy for SO2 gases is 1 or 2 %.
•
If using a secondary dilution source with zero air through a calibrator, then use a
bottle of SO2 balanced nitrogen.
•
If calibrator and zero air source are not available, then use a bottle of SO2 balanced
air.
Teledyne API offers an IZS option operating with permeation devices. The accuracy of
these devices is about ±5%. Whereas this may be sufficient for quick, daily calibration
checks, we strongly recommend using certified SO2 span gases for accurate calibration.
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Applications requiring US-EPA equivalency do not allow permeation
devices to be used as sources of span gas for calibration of the analyzer.
9.1.1.3. CALIBRATION GAS STANDARDS AND TRACEABILITY
All equipment used to produce calibration gases should be verified against standards of
the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST). To ensure NIST
traceability, we recommend acquiring cylinders of working gas that are certified to be
traceable to NIST Standard Reference Materials (SRM). These are available from a variety
of commercial sources.
Table 9-1: NIST-SRM's Available for Traceability of SO2 Calibration Gases
NIST-SRM
1693a
1694a
1661a
180
4
TYPE
NOMINAL
CONCENTRATION
Sulfur dioxide in N2
Sulfur dioxide in N2
Sulfur dioxide in N2
50 ppm
100 ppm
500 ppm
06807F DCN7335
9.1.2. DATA RECORDING DEVICES
A strip chart recorder, data acquisition system or digital data acquisition system should
be used to record data from the T100’s serial or analog outputs. If analog readings are
used, the response of the recording system should be checked against a NIST traceable
voltage source or meter. Data recording device should be capable of bi-polar operation
so that negative readings can be recorded. For electronic data recording, the T100
provides an internal data acquisition system (DAS), which is described in detail in
Section 7.
IMPORTANT
06807F DCN7335
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Be aware of the difference between Calibration and Calibration Check:
Pressing the ENTR button during the following procedure re-calculates
the stored values for OFFSET and SLOPE and alters the instrument’s
calibration. If you wish to perform a calibration CHECK, do not press
ENTR and refer to Section 9.3.
181
9.2. MANUAL CALIBRATION
The following section describes the basic method for manually calibrating the T100 SO2
analyzer.
STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown below.
MODEL 701
Zero Air
Generator
Source of
SAMPLE Gas
MODEL 700
Gas Dilution
Calibrator
(Remove
during
calibration)
(with Ozone
Bench Option)
Calibrated
SO2 GAS
VENT
(At high
concentration)
SAMPLE
Chassis
EXHAUST
OR
MODEL 701
Zero Air
Generator
3-way
Valve
(Remove
during
calibration)
Needle valve
to control
flow
Calibrated
SO2 GAS
Chassis
SAMPLE
VENT
(At high
concentration)
Source of
SAMPLE Gas
EXHAUST
Figure 9-1: Setup for Manual Calibration without Z/S valve or IZS Option (Step 1)
182
06807F DCN7335
STEP TWO: Set the expected SO2 span gas concentrations. In this example the
instrument is set for single (SNGL) range mode with a reporting range span of 500 ppb.
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
The SO2 span concentration
values automatically default
to 450.0 Conc.
To change this value to the
actual concentration of the
span gas, enter the number
by pressing the each digit
until the expected value
appears.
The span gas concentration
should always be 90% of the
selected reporting range
SETUP
M-P CAL
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
< TST TST >
ZERO
SO2 =XXX.X
CONC
EXIT
M-P CAL
SO2 SPAN CONC: 450.0 Conc
0
0
0
4
5
.0
This sequence causes the
analyzer to prompt for the
expected SO2 span
concentration.
ENTR EXIT
EXAMPLE
Reporting range = 800 ppb
Span gas conc.= 720 ppb
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
display.
ENTR accepts the new setting
and returns to the
previous display..
Figure 9-2: Setup for Manual Calibration without Z/S valve or IZS Option (Step 2)
STEP THREE: Perform the zero/span calibration:
06807F DCN7335
183
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.0 PPB
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
RANGE = 500.0 PPB
< TST TST > CAL
Set the Display to show the
SO2 STB test function.
This function calculates the
stability of the SO2
measurement
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
ACTION:
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.
Wait until SO2 STB
falls below 0.5 ppb.
M-P CAL
SO2 STB=X.XXX PPB
< TST TST > CAL
M-P CAL
SETUP
SO2 STB=X.XXX PPB
< TST TST > ZERO
M-P CAL
SO2 =XXX.X
This may take several
minutes.
CONC
SO2 STB=X.XXX PPB
< TST TST > ENTR
CONC
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
Press ENTR to changes the
OFFSET & SLOPE values for the
SO2 measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the calibration
unchanged and return to the
previous menu.
ACTION:
Allow span gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.
The value of
SO2 STB may jump
significantly.
Wait until it falls back
below 0.5 ppb.
M-P CAL
The SPAN button now
appears during the
transition from zero to span.
You may see both the
SPAN and the ZERO
buttons.
SO2 STB=X.XXX PPB
< TST TST >
M-P CAL
SPAN
CONC
RANGE = 500.0 PPB
< TST TST > ENTR SPAN CONC
M-P CAL
RANGE = 500.0 PPB
< TST TST > ENTR
CONC
SO2 =XXX.X
This may take several
minutes.
EXIT
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
Press ENTR to change the
OFFSET & SLOPE values for the
SO2 measurements.
Press EXIT to leave the calibration
unchanged and return to the
previous menu.
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
EXIT returns to the main
SAMPLE display
Figure 9-3: Setup for Manual Calibration without Z/S valve or IZS Option (Step 3)
184
06807F DCN7335
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
If the ZERO or SPAN buttons are not displayed during zero or span
calibration, the measured concentration value is too different from the
expected value and the analyzer does not allow zeroing or spanning the
instrument. Refer to Section 11.4 for more information on calibration
problems.
9.3. MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECKS
Informal calibration checks will only evaluate the analyzer’s response curve, but do not
alter it. It is recommended as a regular maintenance item, to perform calibration checks
in order to monitor the analyzer’s performance. To carry out a calibration check rather
than a full calibration, perform the following procedures:
STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas as shown in Figure 9-1.
STEP TWO: Perform the zero/span calibration check procedure:
ACTION:
Supply the instrument with zero gas.
SAMPLE
Scroll the display to the
STABIL test function.
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
SETUP
SO2=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
Wait until
STABIL is
below 0.5 ppb.
This may take
several minutes.
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
SETUP
SO2=XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
The value of
STABIL may jump
significantly.
ACTION:
Record the SO2
concentration
reading.
SETUP
ACTION:
Supply span gas to the instrument
Wait until it falls
below 0.5 ppb. This
may take several
minutes.
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > CAL
SO2=XXX.X
SETUP
ACTION:
Record the SO2
concentration
reading.
The SPAN button appears during the transition from zero to
span. You may see both the SPAN and the ZERO buttons.
Figure 9-4: Setup for Manual Calibration Checks
06807F DCN7335
185
9.4. MANUAL CALIBRATION WITH ZERO/SPAN VALVES
Zero and Span calibrations using the Zero/Span Valve option are similar to that
described in Section 9.2, except that:
•
Zero air and span gas are supplied to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas
inlets rather than through the sample inlet.
•
The zero and cal operations are initiated directly and independently with dedicated
buttons (CALZ and CALS)
STEP ONE: Connect the sources of zero air and span gas to the respective ports on the
rear panel (refer to Figure 3-4) as shown below.
Source of
SAMPLE Gas
MODEL 700
Gas Dilution Calibrator
VENT if input is pressurized
(with O3 generator option)
Chassis
SAMPLE
VENT
EXHAUST
Calibrated
SO2 Gas
(At high
concentration)
MODEL 701
Zero Air
Generator
SPAN 1
External Zero
Air Scrubber
ZERO AIR
Filter
VENT
Needle valve
to control flow
Figure 9-5: Setup for Manual Calibration with Z/S Valve Option Installed (Step 1)
186
06807F DCN7335
STEP TWO: Set the expected SO2 span gas value:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
< TST TST > CAL
The SO2 span concentration
values automatically default
to 450.0 Conc.
To change this value to the
actual concentration of the
span gas, enter the number
by pressing each digit until
the expected value appears.
The span gas concentration
should always be 90% of the
selected reporting range
EXAMPLE
Reporting range = 800 ppb
Span gas conc.= 720 ppb
M-P CAL
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
< TST TST >
ZERO
SO2 =XXX.X
CONC
EXIT
M-P CAL
SO2 SPAN CONC: 450.0 Conc
0
0
0
4
5
.0
This sequence causes the
analyzer to prompt for the
expected SO2 span
concentration.
ENTR EXIT
EXIT ignores the new setting
and returns to the previous
display.
ENTR accepts the new setting
and returns to the
previous display..
Figure 9-6: Setup for Manual Calibration with Z/S Valve Option Installed (Step 2)
06807F DCN7335
187
Step Three: Perform the calibration or calibration check according to the following
flow chart:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
SAMPLE
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
Analyzer enters ZERO
CAL mode.
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
ACTION:
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port at the
rear of the instrument.
ZERO CAL M
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > ZERO
ZERO CAL M
SO2 =XXX.X
Wait until STABIL
falls below 0.05
ppb. This may
take several
minutes.
CONC
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > ENTR
Scroll the display to the
STABIL test function. This
function calculates the stability
of the SO2 measurements.
CONC
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
EXIT returns the unit to
SAMPLE mode without
changing the calibration
values.
Pressing ENTR changes the calibration of the instrument.
ZERO CAL M
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > ZERO
ZERO CAL M
CONC
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
SO2=X.XX X
SETUP
Analyzer enters SPAN
CAL Mode.
SPAN CAL M
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > SPAN
SPAN CAL M
CONC
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > ENTR
CONC
SO2 =XXX.X
The value of STABIL
may jump
significantly. Wait
until it falls below 0.5
ppb. This may take
several minutes.
EXIT
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
EXIT returns to the
SAMPLE mode without
changing the calibration
values.
Pressing ENTR changes the calibration of the instrument.
If either the ZERO or
SPAN button fails to
appear, see Chapter 11
for troubleshooting tips.
SPAN CAL M
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > SPAN
CONC
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT returns to the
main SAMPLE
display
EXIT
Figure 9-7: Setup for Manual Calibration with Z/S Valve Option Installed (Step 3)
188
06807F DCN7335
9.5. MANUAL CALIBRATION WITH IZS OPTION
Under the best conditions, the accuracy off the SO2 effusion rate of the IZS option’s
permeation tube is about ±5%. This can be subject to significant amounts of drift as the
tube ages and the amount of SO2 contained in the tube is depleted. Whereas this may be
sufficient for informal calibration checks, it is not adequate for formal calibrations and is
not approved for use by the US EPA as a calibration source.
Therefore, for formal calibrations of an instrument with an IZS option installed the
following provisions must be followed.
•
Zero air and span gas must be supplied to the analyzer through the sample gas inlet
as depicted in Figure 9-1 of Section 9.2.
•
The calibration procedure must be initiated using the CAL button, not the CALZ or
CALS buttons, using the procedure defined in Section 9.2.
•
Using the CAL button does not activate the zero/span or sample/cal valves of the
IZS option, thus allowing the introduction of zero air and sample gas through the
sample port from more accurate, external sources such as a calibrated bottle of SO2
or a Model T700 Dilution Calibrator.
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
< TST TST >
CAL
Use for formal
calibration
operations.
CALZ
SO2 =XXX.X
CALS
SETUP
Use only for
informal calibration
checks.
Figure 9-8: Manual Calibration with IZS Option
9.6. MANUAL CALIBRATION CHECKS WITH IZS OR ZERO/SPAN
VALVES
Zero and span checks using the zero/span valve or IZS option are similar to that
described in Section 9.3, with the following exceptions:
06807F DCN7335
•
On units with an IZS option installed, zero air and span gas are supplied to the
analyzer through the zero gas inlet and from ambient air.
•
On units with a zero/span valve option installed, zero air and span gas are supplied
to the analyzer through the zero gas and span gas inlets from two different sources.
•
The zero and calibration operations are initiated directly and independently with
dedicated buttons CALZ and CALS.
189
To perform a manual calibration check of an analyzer with a zero/span valve or IZS
Option installed, use the following method:
STEP ONE: Connect the sources of Zero Air and Span Gas as shown below.
Source of
SAMPLE Gas
MODEL 700
Gas Dilution Calibrator
VENT if input is pressurized
(with O3 generator option)
Chassis
SAMPLE
VENT
EXHAUST
Calibrated
SO2 gas
(At high
concentration)
SPAN 1
Filter
External Zero
Air Scrubber
MODEL 701
Zero Air
Generator
ZERO AIR
VENT
Needle valve
to control flow
Internal Zero/Span Option (IZS) – Option 51A
Source of
SAMPLE Gas
VENT if input is pressurized
SAMPLE
Chassis
EXHAUST
Ambient
Air
ZERO AIR
Figure 9-9: Setup for Manual Calibration Check with Z/S Valve or IZS Option (Step 1)
190
06807F DCN7335
STEP TWO: Perform the zero/span check.
SAMPLE
Scroll to the STABIL test
function.
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
SAMPLE
Wait until STABIL
falls below 0.5
ppb. This may
take several
minutes.
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
ZERO CAL M
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > ZERO
SAMPLE
The value of STABIL
may jump
significantly. Wait
until STABIL falls
below 0.5 ppb. This
may take several
minutes.
CONC
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
SPAN CAL M
STABIL=XXX.X PPB
< TST TST > ZERO SPAN CONC
Figure 9-10:
06807F DCN7335
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
ACTION:
Record the
SO2 readings
presented in the
upper right corner of
the display.
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
ACTION:
Record the
SO2 readings
presented in the
upper right corner of
the display.
SO2 =XXX.X
EXIT
EXIT returns to the main
SAMPLE display
Setup for Manual Calibration Check with Z/S Valve or IZS Option (Step 2)
191
9.7. MANUAL CALIBRATION IN DUAL OR AUTO REPORTING
RANGE MODES
When the analyzer is in either Dual or Auto Range modes the user must run a separate
calibration procedure for each range. After pressing the CAL, CALZ or CALS buttons
the user is prompted for the range that is to be calibrated as seen in the CALZ example
below:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CALS
SAMPLE
SETUP
RANGE TO CAL: LOW
LOW HIGH
ENTR
SAMPLE
SETUP
RANGE TO CAL: HIGH
ENTR
LOW HIGH
SETUP
Analyzer enters
ZERO CAL Mode
Refer to the Calibration
Options section for Z/S
Valve States during
this operating mode.
ZERO CAL M
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
< TST TST > ZERO
CONC
SO2 =XXX.X
WAIT 10
MINUTES
Or until the
reading
stabilizes and
the ZERO button
is displayed
EXIT
Continue Calibration as per
Standard Procedure
Figure 9-11:
Manual Calibration in Dual/Auto Reporting Range Modes
Once this selection is made, the calibration procedure continues as previously described
in Sections 9.2 through 9.6. The other range may be calibrated by starting over from the
main SAMPLE display.
9.7.1. CALIBRATION WITH REMOTE CONTACT CLOSURES
Contact closures for controlling calibration and calibration checks are located on the rear
panel CONTROL IN connector. Instructions for setup and use of these contacts can be
found in Section 8.1.2.
When the appropriate contacts are closed for at least 5 seconds, the instrument switches
into zero, low span or high span mode and the internal zero/span valves will be
automatically switched to the appropriate configuration. The remote calibration contact
closures may be activated in any order. It is recommended that contact closures remain
closed for at least 10 minutes to establish a reliable reading; the instrument will stay in
the selected mode for as long as the contacts remain closed.
192
06807F DCN7335
If contact closures are used in conjunction with the analyzer’s AutoCal (refer to Section
9.8) feature and the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is enabled, the T100 will not recalibrate the analyzer until the contact is opened. At this point, the new calibration
values will be recorded before the instrument returns to SAMPLE mode.
If the AutoCal attribute CALIBRATE is disabled, the instrument will return to
SAMPLE mode, leaving the instrument’s internal calibration variables unchanged.
9.8. AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION (AUTOCAL)
The AutoCal system allows unattended, periodic operation of the zero/span valve
options by using the analyzer’s internal time of day clock. AutoCal operates by
executing user-defined sequences to initiate the various calibration modes of the
analyzer and to open and close valves appropriately. It is possible to program and run up
to three separate sequences (SEQ1, SEQ2 and SEQ3). Each sequence can operate in
one of three modes or be disabled.
Table 9-2: AutoCal Modes
MODE
DISABLED
ZERO
ZERO-SPAN
SPAN
ACTION
Disables the sequence
Causes the sequence to perform a zero calibration or check
Causes the sequence to perform a zero and span concentration calibration or
check
Causes the sequence to perform a span concentration calibration or check
Each mode has seven setup parameters (Table 9-3) that control operational details of the
sequence.
Table 9-3: AutoCal Attribute Setup Parameters
PARAMETER
Timer Enabled
ACTION
Turns on the Sequence timer
Starting Date
Sequence will operate on Starting Date
Starting Time
Sequence will operate at Starting Time
1, 2
Delta Days
Number of days to skip between each sequence
Delta Time
Incremental delay on each Delta Day that the sequence starts.
Duration
Duration of the sequence in minutes
Calibrate
Enable to do dynamic zero/span calibration, disable to do a cal check
only. This must be set to OFF for units used in US EPA applications
and with IZS option installed.
1
The programmed STARTING_TIME must be a minimum of 5 minutes later than the real
time clock (refer to Section 5.6 for setting real time clock).
2 Avoid setting two or more sequences at the same time of the day. Any new sequence
which is initiated whether from a timer, the COMM ports, or the contact closure inputs will
override any sequence which is in progress.
Note
06807F DCN7335
If at any time an inapplicable entry is selectede.g., Delta Days > 367, the
ENTR button will disappear from the display.
193
Note
The CALIBRATE attribute must always be set to OFF for analyzers used in
US EPA controlled applications that have IZS option installed.
Calibration of instruments used in US EPA related applications should
only be performed using external sources of zero air and span gas with an
accuracy traceable to EPA or NIST standards and supplied through the
analyzer’s sample port (refer to Section 9.2).
The following example sets Sequence 2 to carry out a zero-span calibration every other
day starting at 01:00 on June 4, 2015, lasting 15 minutes. This sequence will start 0.5
hours later each day that it is run.
Table 9-4: Example Auto-Cal Sequence
194
MODE / ATTRIBUTE
VALUE
SEQUENCE
2
MODE
ZERO-SPAN
TIMER ENABLE
ON
STARTING DATE
04-JUN-15
STARTING TIME
01:00
COMMENT
Define Sequence #2
Select Zero and Span Mode
Enable the timer
Start after June 4, 2015
First Span starts at 01:00
DELTA DAYS
2
DELTA TIME
00:30
Run Sequence #2 0.5 h later each scheduled day
DURATION
15.0
Operate Span valve for 15 min
CALIBRATE
ON
The instrument will re-set the slope and offset
values for the SO2 channel at the end of the AutoCal
sequence
Run Sequence #2 every other day
06807F DCN7335
To program the sample sequence shown in Table 9-4:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL CALZ CZLS
SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
SEQ 1) DISABLED
SETUP X.X
SEQ 2) DISABLED
SETUP X.X
EXIT
MODE: DISABLED
ENTR EXIT
MODE: ZERO
ENTR EXIT
MODE: ZERO–SPAN
SETUP X.X
ENTR EXIT
EXIT
DELTA DAYS: 1
2
ENTR
0
0
EXIT
DELTA TIME00:00
EXIT
DELTA TIME: 00:00
:3
0
ENTR
DELTA TIEM:00:30
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP C.4
EXIT
DURATION:15.0 MINUTES
EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
EXIT
TIMER ENABLE: ON
SETUP C.4
SET> EDIT
DURATION 15.0MINUTES
EXIT
3
SETUP X.X
0
.0
ENTR
SETUP C.4
DURATION:30.0 MINUTES
EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP X.X
4
EXIT
SEP
0
3
ENTR
CALIBRATE: OFF
EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
Format :
DD-MON-YY
SETUP X.X
EXIT
STARTING DATE: 04–SEP–03
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP C.4
CALIBRATE: OFF
ON
SETUP C.4
ENTR
EXIT
SETUP C.4
CALIBRATE: ON
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP C.4
EXIT
STARTING TIME:00:00
<SET SET> EDIT
EXIT
SETUP C.4
SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 2:00:30
PREV NEXT MODE SET
SETUP C.4
STARTING TIME:00:00
EXIT
Sequence
MODE
1
4
:1
5
ENTR
Figure 9-12:
06807F DCN7335
EXIT
Toggle
between
Off and
ON
STARTING DATE: 04–SEP–03
<SET SET> EDIT
Press number
buttons to set
time:
Format : HH:MM
This is a 24 hr
clock .
PM hours are
13 – 24.
Example
2:15 PM = 14:15
Press
number
buttons to
set
duration for
each
iteration of
the
sequence:
Set in
Decimal
minutes
from
0.1 – 60.0
STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02
SETUP C.4
0
EXIT
STARTING DATE: 01–JAN–02
<SET SET> EDIT
Press number
buttons to set
day, month &
year:
EXIT
Press
number
buttons to set
delay time for
each iteration
of the
sequence:
HH:MM
(0 – 24:00)
SEQ 2) ZERO–SPAN, 1:00:00
PREV NEXT MODE SET
Default
value is
ON
EXIT
Press
number
buttons to
set
number of
days
between
procedures
(1-367)
DELTA DAYS:2
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP C.4
PREV NEXT
DELTA DAYS: 1
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP C.4
PREV NEXT
SETUP X.X
0
SETUP C.4
NEXT
SETUP X.X
0
SETUP C.4
PREV NEXT MODE
EXIT
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP C.4
EXIT
NEXT MODE
STARTING TIME:14:15
<SET SET> EDIT
SETUP C.4
CFG ACAL DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE EXIT
SETUP X.X
SETUP C.4
EXIT returns
to the SETUP
Menu
Delta Time
Delta Days
EXIT
AUTO CAL – User Defined Sequence
195
With dynamic calibration turned on, the state of the internal setup variables
DYN_SPAN and DYN_ZERO is set to ON and the instrument will reset the slope and
offset values for the SO2 response each time the AutoCal program runs. This continuous
re-adjustment of calibration parameters can often mask subtle fault conditions in the
analyzer. It is recommended that, if dynamic calibration is enabled, the analyzer’s test
functions, slope and offset values be checked frequently to assure high quality and
accurate data from the instrument.
9.9. CALIBRATION QUALITY
After completing one of the calibration procedures described above, it is important to
evaluate the analyzer’s calibration SLOPE and OFFSET parameters. These values
describe the linear response curve of the analyzer. The values for these terms, both
individually and relative to each other, indicate the quality of the calibration. To perform
this quality evaluation, you will need to record the values of both test functions (refer to
Section 4.1.1 or Appendix A), all of which are automatically stored in the DAS channel
CALDAT for data analysis, documentation and archival.
Ensure that these parameters are within the limits listed in the following table:
Table 9-5: Calibration Data Quality Evaluation
FUNCTION
MINIMUM VALUE
OPTIMUM VALUE
MAXIMUM VALUE
SLOPE
-0.700
1.000
1.300
OFFS
50.0 mV
n/a
250.0 mV
These values should not be significantly different from the values recorded on the Teledyne
API Final Test and Validation Data sheet that was shipped with your instrument. If they are,
refer to troubleshooting in Section 11.
196
06807F DCN7335
9.10. CALIBRATION OF OPTIONAL SENSORS
This section presents calibration procedures for the O2 sensor option and for the CO2
sensor option.
9.10.1. O2 SENSOR CALIBRATION
Calibration begins with connecting the zero and span gases, then setting the
concentration values.
9.10.1.1. O2 CALIBRATION SETUP
Bottled gases are connected as follows:
VENT here if input
Source of
is pressurized
(Remove during
calibration)
NO
NC
at 20.8% Span
Concentration
3-way
Valve
Calibrated O2
at HIGH Span
Concentration
Calibrated N2
SAMPLE GAS
COM
SAMPLE
Chassis
EXHAUST
Manual
Control Valve
VENT
Figure 9-13:
PUMP
O2 Sensor Calibration Set Up
O2 SENSOR ZERO GAS: Teledyne API recommends using pure N2 when calibrating
the zero point of your O2 sensor option.
O2 SENSOR SPAN GAS: Teledyne API recommends using 20.9% O2 in N2 when
calibration the span point of your O2 sensor.
9.10.1.2. SET O2 SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION
Set the expected O2 span gas concentration.
This should be equal to the percent concentration of the O2 span gas of the selected
reporting range (default factory setting = 20.9%; the approximate O2 content of ambient
air).
06807F DCN7335
197
SAMPLE
RANGE=50.0 PPM
< TST TST >
CAL
SAMPLE
SO2
CO2
SAMPLE
SO2
CO2
SO2= XX.XX
SETUP
GAS TO CAL:CO
O2
M-P CAL
ENTR EXIT
RANGE=50.0 PPM
SO2= XX.XX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC
EXIT
GAS TO CAL:O2
O2
ENTR EXIT
M-P CAL
0
O2 SPAN CONC:20.95%
2
0
.9
5
ENTR EXIT
The O2 span concentration value automatically defaults to
20.9 %.
If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being
used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration
of the O2 calibration gases.
Figure 9-14:
198
EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the previous menu.
O2 Span Gas Concentration Set Up
06807F DCN7335
9.10.1.3. ACTIVATE O2 SENSOR STABILITY FUNCTION
To change the stability test function from SO2 concentration to the O2 sensor output,
press:
SAMPLE
RANGE=50.0 PPM
< TST TST >
CAL
SETUP X.X
SO2= XX.XX
SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
EXIT
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
SETUP X.X
8
EXIT
ENTER PASSWORD:818
1
SETUP X.X
8
ENTR EXIT
0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
<PREV NEXT> JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
Press EXIT 3
times to return
to SAMPLE
menu.
CO2 and O2
options only
appear if
associated
sensors are
installed.
SETUP X.X
<PREV NEXT> JUMP
SETUP X.X
SO2
IMPORTANT
06807F DCN7335
CO2
SETUP X.X
SO2
Figure 9-15:
2) STABIL_GAS=SO2
CO2
EDIT PRNT EXIT
STABIL_GAS:SO2
O2
ENTR EXIT
STABIL_GAS:O2
O2
ENTR EXIT
Activate O2 Sensor Stability Function
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to SO2 when the
O2 calibration procedure is complete.
199
9.10.1.4. O2 ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION
To perform the zero/span calibration procedure:
SAMPLE
RANGE=50.0 PPM
< TST TST >
CAL
SO2= XX.XX
SETUP
Set the Display to show
the O2 STB test function.
This function calculates
the stability of the CO
measurement.
Toggle TST> button until ...
SAMPLE
O2 STB=X.XX %
< TST TST >
CAL
O2=XX.XX
SETUP
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until O2 STB falls
below 0.01%.
This may take several
minutes.
SAMPLE
O2 STB=X.XX %
< TST TST >
CAL
SAMPLE
Press O2 à ENTR to
initiate zero point
calibration of the
O2 sensor.
SO2
CO2
O2=XX.XX
SETUP
GAS TO CAL:NOX
O2
M-P CAL
ENTR EXIT
O2 STB=X.XX %
<TST TST>
ZERO CONC
M-P CAL
O2 STB=X.XX %
<TST TST> ENTR
O2=XX.XX
EXIT
O2=XX.XX
CONC
EXIT
Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for the O2
measurement.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.
Wait until O2 STB falls
below 0.01%
This may take several
minutes.
SAMPLE
O2 STB=X.XX %
< TST TST >
CAL
SAMPLE
Press O2 à ENTR to
initiate span point
calibration of the
O2 sensor.
SO2
CO2
M-P CAL
SETUP
GAS TO CAL:NOX
O2
ENTR EXIT
O2 STB=X.XX %
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC
The SPAN key now appears
during the transition from
zero to span.
You may see both keys.
If either the ZERO or SPAN
buttons fail to appear see the
chapter on Troubleshooting
for tips.
M-P CAL
CONC
O2 STB=X.XX %
<TST TST> ENTR
Figure 9-16:
200
O2 STB=X.XX %
<TST TST> ENTR
M-P CAL
O2=XX.XX
CONC
O2=XX.XX
EXIT
O2=XX.XX
EXIT
O2=XX.XX
EXIT
Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for the O2
measurement.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.
EXIT at this point
returns to the
SAMPLE menu.
O2 Zero/Span Calibration
06807F DCN7335
9.10.2. CO2 SENSOR CALIBRATION
Calibration begins with connecting the zero and span gases, then setting the
concentration values.
9.10.2.1. CO2 CALIBRATION SETUP
Bottled gases are connected as follows:
VENT here if input
Source of
is pressurized
(Remove during
calibration)
NO
NC
at 16% Span
Concentration
3-way
Valve
Calibrated CO2
at HIGH Span
Concentration
Calibrated N2
SAMPLE GAS
COM
SAMPLE
Chassis
EXHAUST
Manual
Control Valve
VENT
Figure 9-17:
PUMP
CO2 Sensor Calibration Set Up
CO2 SENSOR ZERO GAS: Teledyne API recommends using pure N2 when calibration
the zero point of your CO2 sensor option.
CO2 SENSOR SPAN GAS: Teledyne API recommends using 16% CO2 in N2 when
calibration the span point of your CO2 sensor is 20%.
06807F DCN7335
201
9.10.2.2. SET CO2 SPAN GAS CONCENTRATION
Set the expected CO2 span gas concentration.
This should be equal to the percent concentration of the CO2 span gas of the selected
reporting range (default factory setting = 12%).
SAMPLE
RANGE=50.0 PPM
< TST TST >
CAL
SAMPLE
SO2
CO2
SAMPLE
SO2
CO2
SO2= XX.XX
SETUP
GAS TO CAL:CO
O2
M-P CAL
ENTR EXIT
RANGE=50.0 PPM
SO2= XX.XX
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC
EXIT
GAS TO CAL:O2
O2
ENTR EXIT
M-P CAL
0
C O2 SPAN CONC:12.00%
1
2
.0
0
ENTR EXIT
The CO2 span concentration value automatically defaults
to 12 %.
If this is not the the concentration of the span gas being
used, toggle these buttons to set the correct concentration
of the CO2 calibration gases.
Figure 9-18:
202
EXIT ignores the new
setting and returns to
the previous display.
ENTR accepts the new
setting and returns to
the previous menu.
CO2 Span Gas Concentration Setup
06807F DCN7335
9.10.2.3. ACTIVATE CO2 SENSOR STABILITY FUNCTION
To change the stability test function from SO2 concentration to the CO2 sensor output,
press:
SAMPLE
RANGE=50.0 PPM
< TST TST >
CAL
SETUP X.X
SO2= XX.XX
SETUP
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
SETUP X.X
EXIT
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG ALRM
SETUP X.X
8
EXIT
ENTER PASSWORD:818
1
SETUP X.X
8
ENTR EXIT
0) DAS_HOLD_OFF=15.0 Minutes
<PREV NEXT> JUMP
EDIT PRNT EXIT
Continue pressing NEXT until ...
Press EXIT 3
times to return
to SAMPLE
menu.
CO2 and O2
options only
appear if
associated
sensors are
installed.
SETUP X.X
<PREV NEXT> JUMP
SETUP X.X
SO2
IMPORTANT
06807F DCN7335
CO2
SETUP X.X
SO2
Figure 9-19:
2) STABIL_GAS=SO2
CO2
EDIT PRNT EXIT
STABIL_GAS:SO2
O2
ENTR EXIT
STABIL_GAS:CO2
O2
ENTR EXIT
Activate CO2 Sensor Stability Function
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Use the same procedure to reset the STB test function to SO2 when the
CO2 calibration procedure is complete.
203
9.10.2.4. CO2 ZERO/SPAN CALIBRATION
To perform the zero/span calibration procedure:
SAMPLE
RANGE=50.0 PPM
< TST TST >
CAL
CO2= XX.XX
SETUP
Toggle TST> button until ...
SAMPLE
CO2 STB=X.XX %
< TST TST >
CAL
Set the Display to show
the CO2 STB test
function.
This function calculates
the stability of the CO
measurement.
CO2=XX.XX
SETUP
Allow zero gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Wait until CO2 STB
falls below 0.01%.
This may take several
minutes.
SAMPLE
< TST TST >
SAMPLE
Press CO2: ENTR to
initiate zero point
calibration of the
O2 sensor.
SO2
CO2
M-P CAL
CO2 STB=X.XX %
CO2=XX.XX
CAL
SETUP
GAS TO CAL:CO2
O2
ENTR EXIT
CO2 STB=X.XX %
<TST TST>
ZERO CONC
M-P CAL
CO2 STB=X.XX %
<TST TST> ENTR
CO2=XX.XX
EXIT
CO2=XX.XX
CONC
EXIT
Allow span gas to enter the sample port
at the rear of the analyzer.
Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for the O2
measurement.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.
Wait until CO2 STB
falls below 0.01%
This may take several
minutes.
SAMPLE
CO2 STB=X.XX
< TST TST >
CAL
SAMPLE
Press CO2: ENTR to
initiate span point
calibration of the
O2 sensor.
SO2
CO2
M-P CAL
SETUP
GAS TO CAL:CO2
O2
ENTR EXIT
CO2 STB=X.XX %
<TST TST> ZERO SPAN CONC
The SPAN key now appears
during the transition from
zero to span.
You may see both keys.
If either the ZERO or SPAN
buttons fail to appear see the
chapter on Troubleshooting
for tips.
M-P CAL
CONC
CO2 STB=X.XX %
<TST TST> ENTR
Figure 9-20:
204
CO2 STB=X.XX %
<TST TST> ENTR
M-P CAL
CO2=XX.XX
CONC
CO2=XX.XX
EXIT
CO2=XX.XX
EXIT
CO2=XX.XX
EXIT
Press ENTR to changes
the OFFSET & SLOPE
values for the CO2
measurement.
Press EXIT to leave the
calibration unchanged and
return to the previous
menu.
EXIT at this point
returns to the
SAMPLE menu.
CO2 Zero/Span Calibration
06807F DCN7335
9.11. EPA PROTOCOL CALIBRATION
If the T100 is to be used for U.S. EPA SLAMS monitoring, always calibrate it prior to
use, adhering to the EPA designation conditions for operation. (The official List of
Designated Reference and Equivalent Methods is published in the U.S. Federal Register:
http://www3.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/criteria.html). Pay strict attention to the built-in warning
features of the T100, periodic inspection, regular zero/span checks, regular test
parameter evaluation for predictive diagnostics and data analysis, and routine
maintenance. Any instrument(s) supplying the zero air and span calibration gasses used
must themselves be calibrated, and that calibration must be traceable to an EPA/NIST
primary standard.
Comply with Code of Federal Regulations, Title 40 (downloadable from the U.S.
Government Publishing Office at http://www.gpo.gov/fdsys/) and with Quality
Assurance
Guidance
documents
(available
on
the
EPA
website,
http://www.epa.gov/ttn/amtic/qalist.html). Give special attention to specific regulations
regarding the use and operation of ambient sulfur dioxide (fluorescence-based)
analyzers.
06807F DCN7335
205
This page intentionally left blank.
206
06807F DCN7335
10. INSTRUMENT MAINTENANCE
Predictive diagnostic functions including data acquisition, failure warnings and alarms
built into the analyzer allow the user to determine when repairs are necessary. However,
preventive maintenance procedures that, when performed regularly, will help to ensure
that the analyzer continues to operate accurately and reliably over its lifetime.
Maintenance procedures are covered in this section, followed by troubleshooting and
service procedures in Section 11 of this manual.
Note:
To support your understanding of the technical details of maintenance,
Section 12, Principles of Operation, provides information about how the
instrument works.
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
A span and zero calibration check must be performed following some of
the maintenance procedures listed below. Refer to Section 9.
WARNING! RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Disconnect power before performing any operations that require entry
into the interior of the analyzer, unless running the analyzer is necessary
for a specific procedure.
All maintenance and service procedures must be performed only by a
qualified technician.
Note
06807F DCN7335
The front panel of the analyzer is hinged at the bottom and may be
opened by two fasteners located in the upper right and left corners to
gain access to various components that are either mounted on the panel
itself or located near the front of the instrument (such as the particulate
filter).
207
This page intentionally left blank.
208
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API – T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Instrument Maintenance
10.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Table 10-1 is the recommended maintenance schedule for the T100. Please note that in certain environments with high levels of
dust, humidity or pollutant levels some maintenance procedures may need to be performed more often than shown.
Table 10-1:
T100 Preventive Maintenance Schedule
ITEM
ACTION
FREQUENCY
CAL
CHECK
MANUAL
SECTION
Particulate filter
Change particle
filter
Weekly
No
10.3.1
Verify test functions
Review and
evaluate
Weekly
No
10.2;
Appendix C
Zero/span check
Evaluate offset
and slope
Weekly
--
9.3, 9.6, 9.9
Zero/span calibration
Zero and span
calibration
Every 3 months
--
9.2, 9.4, 9.5,
9.7, 9.8
1
External zero air
scrubber (optional)
Exchange
chemical
Every 3 months
No
10.3.3
Every 6 Months
No
10.3.7
1
1
1
Perform flow check
Check Flow
Internal IZS
Permeation Tube
Replace
Annually
YES
10.3.2
Perform pneumatic
leak check
Verify Leak
Tight
Annually or after repairs
involving pneumatics
Yes
10.3.6
Pump diaphragm
Replace
Annually
Yes
Refer to
diaphragm kit
instructions
Calibrate UV Lamp
Output
Perform LAMP
CAL
--
5.9.6 &
11.7.2.5
Yes
11.7.2.8
2
Low-level
hardware
calibration
3
PMT sensor
hardware calibration
Prior to zero/span
calibration or PMT
hardware calibration
On PMT/ preamp
changes if
0.7 < SLOPE or
SLOPE >1.3
Sample chamber
optics
Clean
chamber,
windows and
filters
As necessary
Yes
11.7.2.2 &
11.7.2.3
Critical flow orifice &
sintered filters
Replace
As necessary
Yes
10.3.4
1
DATE PERFORMED
1
1
These Items are required to maintain full warranty; all other items are strongly recommended.
A pump rebuild kit is available from Teledyne API’s Technical Support including all instructions and required parts (refer to Appendix B for part numbers).
3
Replace desiccant bags each time the inspection plate for the sensor assembly is removed.
2
06807F DCN7335
209
Instrument Maintenance
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
This page intentionally left blank.
210
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API – T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Instrument Maintenance
10.2. PREDICTIVE DIAGNOSTICS
The analyzer’s test functions can be used to predict failures by looking at trends in their
values (refer to Table 10-2) and by comparing them values recorded for them at the
factory and recorded on the T100 Final Test and Validation Data Form (Teledyne API
P/N 04551) that was shipped with your analyzer.
A convenient way to record and track changes to these parameters is the internal data
acquisition system (DAS) (see Section 7). Also, APICOM control software can be used
to download and record these data for review even from remote locations (Section 7.3
discusses APICOM).
Table 10-2:
Predictive Uses for Test Functions
TEST FUNCTION
DAS
FUNCTION
CONDITION
BEHAVIOR
EXPECTED
ACTUAL
Slowly
decreasing
• Developing leak in pneumatic system
• Flow path is clogging up.
- Check critical flow orifice & sintered filter.
- Replace particulate filter
• Developing leak in pneumatic system to
vacuum (developing valve failure)
• PMT cooler failure
• Shutter Failure
Fluctuating
PRES
DRK PMT
SO2
Concentration
SAMP FL
SMPPRS
DRKPMT
CONC1
SMPFLW
sample gas
Constant within
atmospheric
changes
Slowly
increasing
PMT output
when UV Lamp
shutter closed
Constant within
±20 of checkout value
Significantly
increasing
At span with
IZS option
installed
Constant
response from
day to day
Decreasing
over time
Standard
configuration at
span
stable for
constant
concentration
Decreasing
over time
Standard
Operation
Stable
Slowly
Decreasing
Fluctuating
LAMP RATIO
06807F DCN7335
LAMPR
Standard
Operation
Stable and near
100%
INTERPRETATION
Fluctuating or
Slowly
increasing
Slowly
decreasing
• Change in instrument response
• Degradation of IZS permeation tube
• Drift of instrument response; UV Lamp
output is excessively low.
• Flow path is clogging up.
- Check critical flow orifice & sintered filter.
- Replace particulate filter
• Leak in gas flow path.
• UV detector wearing out
• UV source Filter developing pin holes
• UV detector wearing out
• Opaque oxides building up on UV source
Filter
• UV lamp aging
211
Instrument Maintenance
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
10.3. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The following procedures need to be performed regularly as part of the standard
maintenance of the T100.
10.3.1. CHANGING THE SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER
The particulate filter should be inspected often for signs of plugging or excess dirt. It
should be replaced according to the service interval in Table 10-1 even without obvious
signs of dirt. Filters with 1 and 5 µm pore size can clog up while retaining a clean look.
We recommend handling the filter and the wetted surfaces of the filter housing with
gloves and tweezers.
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Do not touch any part of the housing, filter element, PTFE retaining ring,
glass cover and the O-ring with bare hands, as contamination can
negatively impact accuracy of readings.
To change the filter according to the service interval in Table 10-1:
1. Turn OFF the analyzer to prevent drawing debris into the sample line.
2. Open the analyzer’s hinged front panel and unscrew the knurled retaining ring of the
filter assembly.
Figure 10-1:
212
Sample Particulate Filter Assembly
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Instrument Maintenance
3. Carefully remove the retaining ring, glass window, PTFE O-ring and filter element.
4. Replace the filter element, carefully centering it in the bottom of the holder.
5. Re-install the PTFE O-ring with the notches facing up, the glass cover, then screw
on the hold-down ring and hand-tighten the assembly. Inspect the (visible) seal
between the edge of the glass window and the O-ring to assure proper gas
tightness.
6. Re-start the analyzer.
10.3.2. CHANGING THE IZS PERMEATION TUBE
1. Turn off the analyzer, unplug the power cord and remove the cover.
2. Locate the IZS oven in the rear left of the analyzer.
3. Remove the top layer of insulation if necessary.
4. Unscrew the black aluminum cover of the IZS oven (3 screws) using a medium
Phillips-head screw driver. Leave the fittings and tubing connected to the cover.
5. Remove the old permeation tube if necessary and replace it with the new tube.
Ensure that the tube is placed into the larger of two holes and that the open
permeation end of the tube (Teflon) is facing up.
6. Re-attach the cover with three screws and ensure that the sealing O-ring is properly
in place and that the three screws are tightened evenly.
7. Replace the analyzer cover, plug the power cord back in and turn on the analyzer.
8. Carry out an IZS span check to see if the new permeation device works properly.
The permeation rate may need several days to stabilize.
ATTENTION
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Do not leave instrument turned off for more than 8 hours without removing
the permeation tube. Do not ship the instrument without removing the
permeation tube. The tube continues to emit gas, even at room
temperature and will contaminate the entire instrument.
10.3.3. CHANGING THE EXTERNAL ZERO AIR SCRUBBER
The chemicals in the external scrubber need to be replaced periodically according to
Table 10-1 or as needed. This procedure can be carried out while the instrument is
running. Ensure that the analyzer is not in either the ZERO or SPAN calibration modes.
1. Locate the scrubber on the outside rear panel.
2. Remove the old scrubber by disconnecting the 1/4” plastic tubing from the particle
filter using 9/16” and 1/2" wrenches.
3. Remove the particle filter from the cartridge using 9/16” wrenches.
4. Unscrew the top of the scrubber canister and discard charcoal contents. Ensure to
abide by local laws for discarding these chemicals. The rebuild kit (listed in
06807F DCN7335
213
Instrument Maintenance
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Appendix B) comes with a Material and Safety Data Sheet, which contains more
information on these chemicals.
5. Refill the scrubber with charcoal at the bottom.
6. Tighten the cap on the scrubber - hand-tight only.
7. Replace the DFU filter, if required, with a new unit and discard the old.
8. Replace the scrubber assembly into its clips on the rear panel.
9. Reconnect the plastic tubing to the fitting of the particle filter.
10. Adjust the scrubber cartridge such that it does not protrude above or below the
analyzer in case the instrument is mounted in a rack. If necessary, squeeze the clips
for a tighter grip on the cartridge.
10.3.4. CHANGING THE CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICE
A critical flow orifice, located on the exhaust manifold maintains the proper flow rate of
gas through the T100 analyzer. Refer to section 12.4.2.1 for a detailed description of its
functionality and Section 12.4.1 for its location. Despite the fact this device is protected
by sintered stainless steel filters, it can, on occasion, clog, particularly if the instrument
is operated without a sample filter or in an environment with very fine, sub-micron
particle-size dust.
1. Turn off power to the instrument and vacuum pump.
2. Locate the critical flow orifice on the pressure sensor assembly (called out in
Figure 10-2).
3. Disconnect the pneumatic line.
4. Unscrew the NPT fitting.
Figure 10-2:
214
Critical Flow Orifice Assembly
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Instrument Maintenance
5. Take out the components of the assembly: a spring, a sintered filter, two O-rings
and the critical flow orifice.
You may need to use a scribe or pressure from the vacuum port to get the parts out
of the manifold.
6. Discard the two O-rings and the sintered filter.
7. Replace the critical flow orifice.
8. Let the part dry.
9. Re-assemble the parts as shown in Figure 10-2 using a new filter and o-rings.
10. Reinstall the NPT fitting and connect all tubing.
11. Power up the analyzer and allow it to warm up for 60 minutes.
12. Perform a leak check (refer to Section 10.3.6).
10.3.5. CHECKING FOR LIGHT LEAKS
When re-assembled after maintenance, repair or improper operation, the T100 can
develop small leaks around the PMT, allowing stray light from the analyzer
surroundings into the PMT housing. To find light leaks, follow the below procedures:
CAUTION
This procedure must be carried out by qualified personnel, as it must be
performed while the analyzer is powered up and running and its cover
removed.
WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Some operations need to be carried out with the analyzer open and
running. Exercise caution to avoid electrical shocks and electrostatic or
mechanical damage to the analyzer. Do not drop tools into the analyzer
or leave those after your procedures. Do not shorten or touch electric
connections with metallic tools while operating inside the analyzer. Use
common sense when operating inside a running analyzer.
1. Scroll the TEST functions to PMT.
2. Supply zero gas to the analyzer.
3. With the instrument still running, carefully remove the analyzer cover. Take extra
care not to touch any of the inside wiring with the metal cover or your body. Do not
drop screws or tools into a running analyzer!
4. Shine a powerful flashlight or portable incandescent light at the inlet and outlet fitting
and at all of the joints of the sample chamber as well as around the PMT housing.
The PMT value should not respond to the light, the PMT signal should remain
steady within its usual noise performance.
06807F DCN7335
215
Instrument Maintenance
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
5. If there is a PMT response to the external light, symmetrically tighten the sample
chamber mounting screws or replace the 1/4” vacuum tubing with new, black PTFE
tubing (this tubing will fade with time and become transparent). Often, light leaks are
also caused by O-rings being left out of the assembly.
6. Carefully replace the analyzer cover.
7. If tubing was changed, carry out a leak check (refer to Section 10.3.6).
10.3.6. DETAILED PRESSURE LEAK CHECK
Obtain a leak checker that contains a small pump, shut-off valve, and pressure gauge to
create both over-pressure and vacuum. Alternatively, a tank of pressurized gas, with the
two stage regulator adjusted to ≤ 15 psi, a shutoff valve and pressure gauge may be used.
ATTENTION
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Once tube fittings have been wetted with soap solution under a
pressurized system, do not apply or re-apply vacuum as this will cause
soap solution to be sucked into the instrument, contaminating inside
surfaces.
Do not exceed 15 psi when pressurizing the system.
1. Turn OFF power to the instrument and remove the instrument cover.
2. Install a leak checker or a tank of gas (compressed, oil-free air or nitrogen) as
described above on the sample inlet at the rear panel.
3. Pressurize the instrument with the leak checker or tank gas, allowing enough time to
fully pressurize the instrument through the critical flow orifice.
4. Check each tube connection (fittings, hose clamps) with soap bubble solution,
looking for fine bubbles.
5. Once the fittings have been wetted with soap solution, do not re-apply vacuum as it
will draw soap solution into the instrument and contaminate it.
6. Do not exceed 15 psi pressure.
7. If the instrument has the zero and span valve option, the normally closed ports on
each valve should also be separately checked. Connect the leak checker to the
normally closed ports and check with soap bubble solution.
8. If the analyzer is equipped with an IZS Option, connect the leak checker to the Dry
Air inlet and check with soap bubble solution.
9. Once the leak has been located and repaired, the leak-down rate of the indicated
pressure should be less than 1 in-Hg-A (0.4 psi) in 5 minutes after the pressure is
turned off.
10. Clean soap solution from all surfaces, re-connect the sample and exhaust lines and
replace the instrument cover. Restart the analyzer.
216
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Instrument Maintenance
10.3.7. PERFORMING A SAMPLE FLOW CHECK
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Use a separate, calibrated flow meter capable of measuring flows
between 0 and 1000 cm³/min to measure the gas flow rate though the
analyzer. For this procedure, do not refer to the built in flow
measurement shown in the front panel display screen.
Sample flow checks are useful for monitoring the actual flow of the instrument, to
monitor drift of the internal flow measurement. A decreasing, actual sample flow may
point to slowly clogging pneumatic paths, most likely critical flow orifices or sintered
filters. To perform a sample flow check:
1. Disconnect the sample inlet tubing from the rear panel SAMPLE port (Figure 3-4).
2. Attach the outlet port of a flow meter to the sample inlet port on the rear panel.
Ensure that the inlet to the flow meter is at atmospheric pressure.
3. The sample flow measured with the external flow meter should be 650 cm³/min ±
10%.
4. Low flows indicate blockage somewhere in the pneumatic pathway. Refer to
troubleshooting Section 11.3 for more information on how to fix this.
10.3.8. HYDROCARBON SCRUBBER (KICKER)
There are two possible types of problems that can occur with the scrubber: pneumatic
leaks and contamination that ruins the inner tube’s ability to absorb hydrocarbons.
10.3.8.1. CHECKING THE SCRUBBER FOR LEAKS
Leaks in the outer tubing of the scrubber can be found using the procedure described in
Section 10.3.6. Use the following method to determine if a leak exists in the inner
tubing of the scrubber.
This procedure requires a pressurized source of air (chemical composition is
unimportant) capable of supplying up to 15 psiA and a leak checking fixture such as the
one illustrated in Figure 10-3.
Vacuum/Pressure
Gauge
Needle Valve
TO SCRUBBER
FROM PUMP or
PRESSURIZED
AIR SOURCE
Manual Shut-Off
Valve
Figure 10-3:
06807F DCN7335
Simple Leak Check Fixture
217
Instrument Maintenance
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
1. Turn off the analyzer.
2. Disconnect the pneumatic tubing attached to both ends of the scrubber’s inner
tubing.
3. One end is connected to the sample particulate filter assembly and the other end is
connected to the reaction cell assembly.
4. Both ends are made of the 1/8" black Teflon tubing.
5. Cap one end of the hydrocarbon scrubber.
6. Attach the pressurized air source to the other end of the scrubber inner tubing with
the leak check fixture in line.
Scrubber
Leak Check
Fixture
Pump
or
Pressurized Air
Source
Cap
Figure 10-4:
Hydrocarbon Scrubber Leak Check Setup
7. Use the needle valve to adjust the air input until the gauge reads 15 psiA.
ATTENTION
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Do not exceed a pressure of more than 15 psia.
Do not pull the vacuum through the scrubber.
8. Close the shut-off valve.
9. Wait 5 minutes.
If the gauge pressure drops >1 psi within 5 minutes, then the hydrocarbon scrubber has
an internal leak and must be replaced. Contact Teledyne API’s Technical Support.
218
06807F DCN7335
11. TROUBLESHOOTING & SERVICE
This section contains a variety of methods for identifying and solving performance
problems with the analyzer.
Note:
To support your understanding of the technical details of maintenance,
Section 12, Principles of Operation, provides information about how the
instrument works.
CAUTION
THE OPERATIONS OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION MUST BE PERFORMED BY
QUALIFIED MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL ONLY.
WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK
SOME OPERATIONS NEED TO BE CARRIED OUT WITH THE ANALYZER OPEN
AND RUNNING. EXERCISE CAUTION TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCKS AND
ELECTROSTATIC OR MECHANICAL DAMAGE TO THE ANALYZER. DO NOT
DROP TOOLS INTO THE ANALYZER OR LEAVE THOSE AFTER YOUR
PROCEDURES. DO NOT SHORTEN OR TOUCH ELECTRIC CONNECTIONS WITH
METALLIC TOOLS WHILE OPERATING INSIDE THE ANALYZER. USE COMMON
SENSE WHEN OPERATING INSIDE A RUNNING ANALYZER.
Note
06807F DCN7335
The front panel of the analyzer is hinged at the bottom and may be
opened to gain access to various components mounted on the panel
itself or located near the front of the instrument (such as the particulate
filter).
Remove the locking screw located at the right-hand side of the front
panel.
219
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
11.1. GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
The T100 has been designed so that problems can be rapidly detected, evaluated and
repaired. During operation, it continuously performs diagnostic tests and provides the
ability to evaluate its key operating parameters without disturbing monitoring
operations.
A systematic approach to troubleshooting will generally consist of the following five
steps:
1. Note any WARNING MESSAGES and take corrective action as necessary.
2. Examine the values of all TEST functions and compare them to factory values. Note
any major deviations from the factory values and take corrective action.
3. Use the internal electronic status LEDs to determine whether the electronic
communication channels are operating properly.
•
Verify that the DC power supplies are operating properly by checking the
voltage test points on the relay PCA.
•
Note that the analyzer’s DC power wiring is color-coded and these colors match
the color of the corresponding test points on the relay PCA.
4. Suspect a leak first!
•
Technical Support data indicate that the majority of all problems are eventually
traced to leaks in the internal pneumatics of the analyzer or the diluent gas and
source gases delivery systems.
•
Check for gas flow problems such as clogged or blocked internal/external gas
lines, damaged seals, punctured gas lines, a damaged / malfunctioning pumps,
etc.
5. Follow the procedures defined in Section 11.6 to confirm that the analyzer’s vital
functions are working (power supplies, CPU, relay PCA, touch-screen display, PMT
cooler, etc.).
•
Refer to Figure 3-5 for the general layout of components and sub-assemblies in
the analyzer.
•
Refer to the wiring interconnect diagram and interconnect list in Appendix D.
11.1.1. FAULT DIAGNOSTICS WITH WARNING MESSAGES
The most common and/or serious instrument failures will result in a warning message
displayed on the front panel. Table 11-1 contains a list of warning messages, along with
their meaning and recommended corrective action.
It should be noted that if more than two or three warning messages occur at the same
time, it is often an indication that some fundamental analyzer sub-system (power supply,
relay board, motherboard) has failed rather than an indication of the specific failures
referenced by the warnings. In this case, a combined-error analysis needs to be
performed.
The analyzer will alert the user that a Warning message is active by flashing the FAULT
LED and displaying the Warning message in the Param field along with the CLR button
(press to clear Warning message). The MSG button displays if there is more than one
warning in queue or if you are in the TEST menu and have not yet cleared the message.
The following display/touchscreen examples provide an illustration of each:
220
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
The analyzer also issues a message via the serial port(s).
To view or clear a warning message press:
SAMPLE
In WARNING mode, <TST TST>
buttons replaced with TEST
button. Pressing TEST switches to
SAMPLE mode and hides warning
messages until new warning(s)
are activated.
TEST
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.0 PPB
CAL
RANGE = 500.0 PPB
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
If warning messages reappear,
the cause needs to be found. Do
not repeatedly clear warnings
without corrective action.
06807F DCN7335
MSG
SYSTEM RESET
< TST TST > CAL
Figure 11-1:
MSG
SO2 =XXX.X
CLR
SETUP
SO2 =XXX.X
CLR
SETUP
MSG indicates that one or more
warning message are active but
hidden. Pressing MSG cycles
through warnings
In SAMPLE mode, all warning
messages are hidden, but MSG
button appears
SO2= X.XXX
MSG
CLR
SETUP
Press CLR to clear the current
warning message.
If more than one warning is
active, the next message will
take its place.
Once the last warning has been
cleared, the analyzer returns to
SAMPLE Mode.
Viewing and Clearing Warning Messages
221
Troubleshooting & Service
Table 11-1:
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Warning Messages - Indicated Failures
Warning Message
Fault Condition
Possible Causes
ANALOG CAL
WARNING
The instruments A/D
circuitry or one of its analog
outputs is not calibrated
BOX TEMP WARNING
Box Temp is < 5°C or >
48°C.
CANNOT DYN SPAN
Dynamic Span operation
failed
Dynamic Zero operation
failed
Configuration and
Calibration data reset to
original Factory state.
The Dark Cal signal is
higher than 200 mV.
A parameter for one of the analog outputs, even one not currently being used,
has been changed and the analog output calibration routine was not re-run
A/D circuitry failure on motherboard
Other motherboard electronic failure
NOTE: Box temperature typically runs ~7oc warmer than ambient temperature.
Poor/blocked ventilation to the analyzer.
Stopped exhaust-fan
Ambient temperature outside of specified range
Measured concentration value is too high or low.
Concentration slope value too high or too low
Measured concentration value is too high.
Concentration offset value too high.
Failed disk on module
User erased data
CANNOT DYN ZERO
CONFIG INITIALIZED
DARK CAL WARNING
DATA INITIALIZED
HVPS WARNING
Data Storage in DAS was
erased
High voltage power supply
output is <400 V or >900 V
IZS TEMP WARNING
On units with IZS options
installed: The permeation
tube temperature is Sample
chamber temperature is
< 45°C or > 55°C
PMT DET WARNING
PMT detector output is >
4995 mV
PMT TEMP WARNING
PMT temperature is
< 2°C or > 12°C
RCELL TEMP
WARNING
Sample chamber
temperature is
< 45°C or > 55°C
REAR BOARD NOT
DET
Mother Board not detected
on power up.
SAMPLE FLOW WARN
Sample flow rate is < 500
cc/min or > 1000 cc/min.
SAMPLE PRES WARN
Sample Pressure is <10 inHg or
> 35 in-Hg1
222
Light leak in reaction cell
Shutter solenoid is not functioning
Failed relay board
I2C bus failure
Loose connector/wiring
PMT preamp board bad or out of cal
Failed disk on module
User cleared data
High voltage power supply is bad
High voltage power supply is out of cal
A/D converter circuitry is bad
Bad IZS heater
Bad IZS temperature sensor
Bad relay controlling the IZS heater
Entire relay board is malfunctioning
I2C bus malfunction
Failure of thermistor interface circuitry on motherboard
Failed PMT
Malfunctioning PMR preamp board
A/D converter circuitry failure
Bad PMT thermo-electric cooler
Failed PMT TEC driver circuit
Bad PMT preamp board
Failed PMT temperature sensor
Loose wiring between PMT temperature sensor and PMT Preamp board
Malfunction of analog sensor input circuitry on motherboard
Bad reaction cell heater
Bad reaction cell temperature sensor
Bad relay controlling the reaction cell heater
Entire relay board is malfunctioning
I2C bus malfunction
Warning only appears on serial I/O COMM port(s)
Front panel display will be frozen, blank or will not respond.
Massive failure of mother board.
Failed sample pump
Blocked sample inlet/gas line
Dirty particulate filter
Leak downstream of critical flow orifice
Failed flow sensor/circuitry
If sample pressure is < 10 in-hg:
o Blocked particulate filter
o Blocked sample inlet/gas line
o Failed pressure sensor/circuitry
If sample pressure is > 35 in-hg:
o Blocked vent line on pressurized sample/zero/span gas supply
o Bad pressure sensor/circuitry
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Warning Message
Fault Condition
Troubleshooting & Service
Possible Causes
Sample Pressure is <10 inHg or
> 35 in-Hg1
If sample pressure is < 10 in-hg:
SAMPLE PRES WARN
o Blocked particulate filter
o Blocked sample inlet/gas line
o Failed pressure sensor/circuitry
If sample pressure is > 35 in-hg:
o Blocked vent line on pressurized sample/zero/span gas supply
o Bad pressure sensor/circuitry
The computer has
This message occurs at power on.
SYSTEM RESET
rebooted.
If it is confirmed that power has not been interrupted:
Failed +5 VDC power,
Fatal error caused software to restart
Loose connector/wiring
UV lamp is bad
UV LAMP WARNING
The UV lamp intensity is <
Reference detector is bad or out of adjustment.
600mV or > 4995 mV
Mother board analog sensor input circuitry has failed.
Fogged or damaged lenses/filters in UV light path
A/D converter circuitry failure
Light leak in reaction cell
Shutter solenoid stuck closed
1
Normally 29.92 in-Hg at sea level decreasing at 1 in-Hg per 1000 ft of altitude
(with no flow – pump disconnected).
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
A failure of the analyzer’s CPU, motherboard or power supplies can
result in any or ALL of the above messages.
11.1.2. FAULT DIAGNOSIS WITH TEST FUNCTIONS
Besides being useful as predictive diagnostic tools, the TEST functions, viewable from
the front panel, can be used to isolate and identify many operational problems when
combined with a thorough understanding of the analyzer’s principles of operation (refer
to Section 12. We recommend use of the APICOM remote control program (Section 7)
to download, graph and archive TEST data for analysis, and long-term monitoring of
diagnostic data.
The acceptable ranges for these test functions are listed in Table A-3 in Appendix A-3.
The actual values for these test functions on checkout at the factory were also listed in
the Final Test and Validation Data Sheet, which was shipped with the instrument.
Values outside the acceptable ranges indicate a failure of one or more of the analyzer’s
subsystems. Functions with values that are within the acceptable range but have
significantly changed from the measurements recorded on the factory data sheet may
also indicate a failure or a maintenance item.
A problem report worksheet has been provided in Appendix C to assist in recording the
value of these test functions. Table 11-2 contains some of the more common causes for
these values to be out of range.
IMPORTANT
06807F DCN7335
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
A value of “XXXX” displayed for any of these TEST functions indicates an
OUT OF RANGE reading.
223
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Sample Pressure measurements are represented in terms of absolute
pressure because this is the least ambiguous method reporting gas pressure.
Absolute atmospheric pressure is about 29.92 in-Hg-A at sea level. It
decreases about 1 in-Hg per 1000 ft gain in altitude. A variety of factors
such as air conditioning systems, passing storms, and air temperature, can
also cause changes in the absolute atmospheric pressure.
Note
Table 11-2:
Test Functions - Possible Causes for Out-Of-Range Values
TEST FUNCTION
NOMINAL VALUE(S)
STABIL
≤1 ppb with Zero Air
Faults that cause high stability values are: pneumatic leak; low or very unstable UV lamp
output; light leak; faulty HVPS; defective preamp board; aging detectors; PMT recently
exposed to room light; dirty/contaminated reaction cell.
SAMPLE FL
650 cm3/min ± 10%
Faults are caused due to: clogged critical flow orifice; pneumatic leak; faulty flow sensor;
sample line flow restriction.
PMT
-20 TO 150 mV with
Zero Air
High or noisy readings could be due to: calibration error; pneumatic leak; excessive
background light; aging UV filter; low UV lamp output; PMT recently exposed to room
light; light leak in reaction cell; reaction cell contaminated HVPS problem.
It takes 24-48 hours for the PMT exposed to ambient light levels to adapt to dim light.
NORM PMT
POSSIBLE CAUSE(S)
0-5000 mV, 0-20,000 ppb Noisy Norm PMT value (assuming unchanging SO2 concentration of sample gas):
@ Span Gas Concentration Calibration error; HVPS problem; PMT problem.
2000 - 4000 mV
This is the instantaneous reading of the UV lamp intensity. Low UV lamp intensity could
be due to: aging UV lamp; UV lamp position out of alignment; faulty lamp transformer;
aging or faulty UV detector; UV detector needs adjusting; dirty optical components.
Intensity lower than 600 mV will cause UV LAMP WARNING. Most likely cause is a UV
lamp in need of replacement.
LAMP RATIO
30 TO 120%
The current output of the UV reference detector divided by the reading stored in the
CPU’s memory from the last time a UV Lamp calibration was performed. Out of range
lamp ratio could be due to: malfunctioning UV lamp; UV lamp position out of alignment;
faulty lamp transformer; aging or faulty UV detector; dirty optical components; pin holes or
scratches in the UV optical filters; light leaks.
STR LGT
≤ 100 ppb / Zero Air
High stray light could be caused by: aging UV filter; contaminated reaction cell; light leak;
pneumatic leak.
DRK PMT
-50 to +200 mV
High dark PMT reading could be due to: light leak; shutter not closing completely; high
pmt temperature; high electronic offset.
DRK LMP
-50 to +200 mV
High dark UV detector could be caused by: light leak; shutter not closing completely; high
electronic offset.
HVPS
≈ 400 V to 900 V
RCELL TEMP
50ºC ± 1ºC
BOX TEMP
Ambient
+ ≈ 5ºC
Incorrect temperature reading could be caused by: Environment out of temperature
operating range; broken thermistor; runaway heater
PMT TEMP
7ºC ± 2ºC Constant
Incorrect temperature reading could be caused by: TEC cooling circuit broken; High
chassis temperature; 12V power supply
IZS TEMP (option)
50ºC ± 1ºC
Malfunctioning heater; relay board communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out
PRESS
Ambient
± 2 IN-HG-A
Incorrect sample gas pressure could be due to: pneumatic leak; malfunctioning valve;
malfunctioning pump; clogged flow orifices; sample inlet overpressure; faulty pressure sensor
SLOPE
1.0 ± 0.3
Slope out of range could be due to: poor calibration quality; span gas concentration
incorrect; leaks; UV Lamp output decay.
OFFSET
< 250 mV
High offset could be due to: incorrect span gas concentration/contaminated zero air/leak; lowlevel calibration off; light leak; aging UV filter; contaminated reaction cell; pneumatic leak.
TIME OF DAY
Current Time
UV LAMP SIGNAL
224
Incorrect HVPS reading could be caused by; HVPS broken; preamp board circuit
problems.
Incorrect temperature reading could be caused by: malfunctioning heater; relay board
communication (I2C bus); relay burnt out
Incorrect Time could be caused by: Internal clock drifting; move across time zones;
daylight savings time?
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
11.1.3. USING THE DIAGNOSTIC SIGNAL I/O FUNCTIONS
The signal I/O parameters found under the diagnostics (DIAG) menu combined with a
thorough understanding of the instrument’s principles of operation (refer to Section 12)
are useful for troubleshooting in three ways:
•
The technician can view the raw, unprocessed signal level of the analyzer’s critical
inputs and outputs.
•
All of the components and functions that are normally under instrument control can
be manually changed.
•
Analog and digital output signals can be manually controlled.
This allows a user to systematically observe the effect of these functions on the
operation of the analyzer. Figure 11-2 shows an example of how to use the signal I/O
menu to view the raw voltage of an input signal or to control the state of an output
voltage or control signal. The specific parameter will vary depending on the situation.
Please note that the analyzer will freeze its concentration output while in the diagnostic
signal I/O menu. This is because manually changing I/O outputs can invalidate the
instrument reading.
06807F DCN7335
225
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
SAMPLE
8
1
8
ENTR EXIT
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
SETUP X.X
COMM VARS DIAG
DIAG
EXIT
SIGNAL I/O
PREV
NEXT
DIAG I/O
ENTR
0 ) EXT_ZERO_CAL=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
PRNT EXIT
If parameter is an
input signal
DIAG I/O
If parameter is an output
signal or control
DIAG I/O
29) PMT_TEMP=378.3 MV
PREV NEXT JUMP
EXIT
PRNT EXIT
19 ) REACTION CELL_HEATER=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
ON PRNT EXIT
Toggles parameter
ON/OFF
DIAG I/O
19 ) REACTION CELL_HEATER=OFF
PREV NEXT JUMP
OFF PRNT EXIT
Exit returns to
DIAG display & all values
return to software control
Figure 11-2:
226
Example of Signal I/O Function
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
11.2. STATUS LEDS
Several color-coded, light-emitting diodes (LEDs) are located inside the instrument to
determine if the analyzer’s CPU, I2C communications bus and relay board are
functioning properly.
11.2.1. MOTHERBOARD STATUS INDICATOR (WATCHDOG)
DS5, a red LED on the upper portion of the motherboard, just to the right of the CPU
board, flashes when the CPU is running the main program. After power-up, DS5 should
flash on and off about once per second. If characters are written to the front panel
display but DS5 does not flash then the program files have become corrupted. Contact
Teledyne API’s Technical Support department.
If DS5 is not flashing 30 - 60 seconds after a restart and no characters have been written
to the front panel display, the firmware may be corrupted or the CPU may be defective.
If DS5 is permanently off or permanently on, the CPU board is likely locked up and
should the analyzer not respond (either with locked-up or dark front panel), then replace
the CPU.
Motherboard
CPU Status LED
Figure 11-3:
CPU Status Indicator
11.2.2. CPU STATUS INDICATORS
The LEDs on the CPU card (Figure 12-14) are described as follows:
06807F DCN7335
Power LED
Red
normally lit
IDE LED
Green
lit when active (read or write)
227
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
11.2.3. RELAY BOARD STATUS LEDS
The most important status LED on the relay board is the red I2C Bus watch-dog LED,
labeled D1 (or W/D), which indicates the health of the I2C communications bus. This
LED is located in the upper left-hand corner of the relay board when looking at the
electronic components. If D1 is blinking, then the other LEDs can be used in
conjunction with the DIAG menu I/O functions to test hardware functionality by
switching devices on and off and watching the corresponding LED turn on or off. The
LED only indicates that the logic signal for an output has been activated. If the output
driver (i.e. the relay or valve driver IC) is defective, then the LED will light up, but the
attached peripheral device will not turn on.
Table 11-3:
LED
Relay Board Status LEDs
COLOR
FAULT
STATUS
FUNCTION
2
D1
red
Watchdog Circuit; I C
bus operation.
Continuously
ON or OFF
INDICATED FAILURE(S)
Failed/Halted CPU
Faulty Mother Board, Valve Driver board or
Relay PCA
Faulty Connectors/Wiring between Motherboard,
Valve Driver board or Relay PCA
Failed/Faulty +5 VDC Power Supply (PS1)
11.3. GAS FLOW PROBLEMS
The standard analyzer has one main flow path. With the IZS option installed, there is a
second flow path through the IZS oven that runs whenever the IZS is on standby to
purge SO2 from the oven chamber. The IZS flow is not measured so there is no reading
for it on the front panel display. The full flow diagrams of the standard configuration
(refer to Figure 3-18) and with options installed (refer to Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-21)
help in troubleshooting flow problems. In general, flow problems can be divided into
three categories:
•
Flow is too high
•
Flow is greater than zero, but is too low, and/or unstable
•
Flow is zero (no flow)
When troubleshooting flow problems, it is essential to confirm the actual flow rate
without relying on the analyzer’s flow display. The use of an independent, external flow
meter to perform a flow check as described in Section 11.5.2 is essential.
11.3.1. ZERO OR LOW SAMPLE FLOW
If the pump is operating but the unit reports a XXXX gas flow, do the following three
steps:
•
Check for actual sample flow
•
Check pressures
•
Carry out a leak check
To check the actual sample flow, disconnect the sample tube from the sample inlet on
the rear panel of the instrument. Ensure that the unit is in basic SAMPLE mode. Place a
228
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
finger over the inlet and see if it gets sucked in by the vacuum or, more properly, use a
flow meter to measure the actual flow. If a proper flow of approximately 650 cm³/min
exists, contact Technical Support. If there is no flow or low flow, continue with the next
step.
Check that the sample pressure is at or around 28 (or about1 in-Hg-A below ambient
atmospheric pressure).
11.3.2. HIGH FLOW
Flows that are significantly higher than the allowed operating range (typically ±10-11%
of the nominal flow) should not occur in the M unless a pressurized sample, zero or span
gas is supplied to the inlet ports. Be sure to vent excess pressure and flow just before the
analyzer inlet ports.
When supplying sample, zero or span gas at ambient pressure, a high flow would
indicate that one or more of the critical flow orifices are physically broken (very
unlikely case), allowing more than nominal flow, or were replaced with an orifice of
wrong specifications. If the flows are more than 15% higher than normal, we
recommend that the technician find and correct the cause of the flow problem,
11.4. CALIBRATION PROBLEMS
This section provides information regarding possible causes of various calibration
problems.
11.4.1. NEGATIVE CONCENTRATIONS
Negative concentration values may be caused due to the following:
•
A slight, negative signal is normal when the analyzer is operating under zero gas and
the signal is drifting around the zero calibration point. This is caused by the
analyzer’s zero noise and may cause reported concentrations to be negative for a few
seconds at a time down to -5 ppb, but should alternate with similarly high, positive
values.
•
Mis-calibration is the most likely explanation for negative concentration values. If
the zero air contained some SO2 gas (contaminated zero air or a worn-out zero air
scrubber) and the analyzer was calibrated to that concentration as “zero”, the
analyzer may report negative values when measuring air that contains little or no
SO2. The same problem occurs, if the analyzer was zero-calibrated using ambient air
or span gas.
•
If the response offset test function for SO2 (OFFSET) are greater than 150 mV, a
failed PMT or high voltage supply, or sample chamber contamination, could be the
cause.
11.4.2. NO RESPONSE
If the instrument shows no response (display value is near zero) even though sample gas
is supplied properly and the instrument seems to perform correctly,
06807F DCN7335
•
Confirm response by supplying SO2 span gas of about 80% of the range value to the
analyzer.
•
Check the sample flow rate for proper value.
229
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
•
Check for disconnected cables to the sensor module.
•
Carry out an electrical test with the ELECTRICAL TEST (ETEST) procedure in
the diagnostics menu, refer to Section 5.9.5. If this test produces a concentration
reading, the analyzer’s electronic signal path is working.
•
Carry out an optical test using the OPTIC TEST (OTEST) procedure in the
diagnostics menu, refer to Section 5.9.4. If this test results in a concentration signal,
then the PMT sensor and the electronic signal path are operating properly. If it
passes both ETEST and OTEST, the instrument is capable of detecting light and
processing the signal to produce a reading. Therefore, the problem must be in the
pneumatics, optics or the UV lamp/lamp driver.
11.4.3. UNSTABLE ZERO AND SPAN
Leaks in the T100 or in the external gas supply and vacuum systems are the most
common source of unstable and non-repeatable concentration readings.
•
Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 10.3.6. Consider
pneumatic components in the gas delivery system outside the T100 such as a change
in zero air source (ambient air leaking into zero air line or a worn-out zero air
scrubber) or a change in the span gas concentration due to zero air or ambient air
leaking into the span gas line.
•
Once the instrument passes a leak check, perform a flow check (refer to Section
10.3.7) to ensure that the instrument is supplied with adequate sample gas.
•
Confirm the UV lamp, sample pressure and sample temperature readings are correct
and steady.
•
Verify that the sample filter element is clean and does not need to be replaced.
11.4.4. INABILITY TO SPAN - NO SPAN BUTTON
In general, the T100 will not display certain control buttons whenever the actual value of
a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu
does not show a SPAN button when carrying out a span calibration, the actual
concentration must be outside of the range of the expected span gas concentration,
which can have several reasons.
230
•
Verify that the expected concentration is set properly to the actual span gas
concentration in the CONC sub-menu.
•
Confirm that the SO2 span gas source is accurate.
•
If you are using bottle calibration gas and have recently changed bottles, bottle to
bottle variation may be the cause.
•
Check for leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 11.6.1. Leaks can
dilute the span gas and, hence, the concentration that the analyzer measures may fall
short of the expected concentration defined in the CONC sub-menu.
•
If the physical, low-level calibration has drifted (changed PMT response) or was
accidentally altered by the user, a low-level calibration may be necessary to get the
analyzer back into its proper range of expected values. One possible indicator of this
scenario is a slope or offset value that is outside of its allowed range (0.7-1.3 for
slope, -20 to 150 for offsets). Refer to Section 11.7.2.8 on how to carry out a lowlevel hardware calibration.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
11.4.5. INABILITY TO ZERO - NO ZERO BUTTON
In general, the T100 will not display certain control buttons whenever the actual value of
a parameter is outside of the expected range for that parameter. If the calibration menu
does not show a ZERO button when carrying out a zero calibration, the actual gas
concentration must be significantly different from the actual zero point (as per last
calibration), which can have several reasons.
•
Confirm that there is a good source of zero air. If the IZS option is installed,
compare the zero reading from the IZS zero air source to an external zero air source
using SO2-free air. Check any zero air scrubber for performance and replacement
(refer to Section 10.3.3).
•
Check to ensure that there is no ambient air leaking into the zero air line. Check for
leaks in the pneumatic systems as described in Section 10.3.6.
11.4.6. NON-LINEAR RESPONSE
The T100 was factory calibrated and should be linear to within 1% of full scale.
Common causes for non-linearity are:
06807F DCN7335
•
Leaks in the pneumatic system. Leaks can add a constant of ambient air, zero air or
span gas to the current sample gas stream, which may be changing in concentrations
as the linearity test is performed. Check for leaks as described in Section 11.6.
•
The calibration device is in error. Check flow rates and concentrations, particularly
when using low concentrations. If a mass flow calibrator is used and the flow is less
than 10% of the full scale flow on either flow controller, you may need to purchase
lower concentration standards.
•
The standard gases may be mislabeled as to type or concentration. Labeled
concentrations may be outside the certified tolerance.
•
The sample delivery system may be contaminated. Check for dirt in the sample lines
or sample chamber.
•
Calibration gas source may be contaminated.
•
Dilution air contains sample or span gas.
•
Sample inlet may be contaminated with SO2 exhaust from this or other analyzers.
Verify proper venting of the analyzer’s exhaust.
•
Span gas overflow is not properly vented and creates a back-pressure on the sample
inlet port. Also, if the span gas is not vented at all and does not supply enough
sample gas, the analyzer may be evacuating the sample line. Ensure to create and
properly vent excess span gas.
•
If the instrument is equipped with an internal IZS valve option and the SO2 span
value is continuously trending downward, the IZS permeation tube may require
replacement.
231
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
11.4.7. DISCREPANCY BETWEEN ANALOG OUTPUT AND DISPLAY
If the concentration reported through the analog outputs does not agree with the value
reported on the front panel, you may need to re-calibrate the analog outputs. This
becomes more likely when using a low concentration or low analog output range.
Analog outputs running at 0.1 V full scale should always be calibrated manually. Refer
to Section 5.9.3.3 for a detailed description of this procedure.
11.5. OTHER PERFORMANCE PROBLEMS
Dynamic problems (i.e. problems which only manifest themselves when the analyzer is
monitoring sample gas) can be the most difficult and time consuming to isolate and
resolve. The following section provides an itemized list of the most common dynamic
problems with recommended troubleshooting checks and corrective actions.
11.5.1. EXCESSIVE NOISE
Excessive noise levels under normal operation usually indicate leaks in the sample
supply or the analyzer itself. Ensure that the sample or span gas supply is leak-free and
carry out a detailed leak check as described earlier in this section.
Another possibility of excessive signal noise may be the preamplifier board, the high
voltage power supply and/or the PMT detector itself. Contact the factory on troubleshooting these components.
11.5.2. SLOW RESPONSE
If the analyzer starts responding too slowly to any changes in sample, zero or span gas,
check for the following:
•
Dirty or plugged sample filter or sample lines.
•
Sample inlet line is too long.
•
Dirty or plugged critical flow orifices. Check flows, pressures and, if necessary,
change orifices (refer to Section 10.3.4).
•
Wrong materials in contact with sample - use Teflon materials only.
•
Sample vent line is located too far from the instrument sample inlet causing a long
mixing and purge time. Locate sample inlet (overflow) vent as close as possible to
the analyzer’s sample inlet port.
•
Dirty sample chamber.
•
Insufficient time allowed for purging of lines upstream of the analyzer.
•
Insufficient time allowed for SO2 calibration gas source to become stable.
11.5.3. THE ANALYZER DOESN’T APPEAR ON THE LAN OR INTERNET
Most problems related to Internet communications via the Ethernet card will be due to
problems external to the analyzer (e.g. bad network wiring or connections, failed routers,
malfunctioning servers, etc.) However, there are several symptoms that indicate the
problem may be with the Ethernet card itself.
232
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
If neither of the Ethernet cable’s two status LED’s (located on the back of the cable
connector) is lit while the instrument is connected to a network:
•
Verify that the instrument is being connected to an active network jack.
•
Check the internal cable connection between the Ethernet card and the CPU board.
11.6. SUBSYSTEM CHECKOUT
The preceding sections of this manual discussed a variety of methods for identifying
possible sources of failures or performance problems within the analyzer. In most cases
this included a list of possible causes and, in some cases, quick solutions or at least a
pointer to the appropriate sections describing them. This section describes how to
determine if a certain component or subsystem is actually the cause of the problem being
investigated.
11.6.1. AC POWER CONFIGURATION
The T100 digital electronic systems will operate with any of the specified power
regimes. As long as instrument is connected to 100-120 VAC or 220-240 VAC at either
50 or 60 Hz it will turn on and after about 30 seconds show a front panel display.
Internally, the status LEDs located on the Motherboard, the Relay PCA and the CPU
should turn on as soon as the power is supplied.
On the other hand, the analyzer’s various non-digital components, such as the pump and
the AC powered heaters, require that the relay board be properly configured for the type
of power being supplied to the instrument.
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
ATTENTION
Plugging the analyzer into a power supply that is too high a voltage or
frequency can damage the pump and the AC Heaters.
Plugging the analyzer into a power supply that is too low a voltage or
frequency will cause these components to not operate properly.
If the pump and the heaters are not working correctly and incorrect power configuration
is suspected, check the serial number label located on the instrument’s rear panel (refer
to Figure 3-4) to ensure that the instrument was configured for the same voltage and
frequency being supplied.
If the information included on the label matches the line voltage, but you still suspect an
AC power configuration problem:
For the heaters, check the power configuration jumpers located on the relay board (refer
to Figure 11-4).
06807F DCN7335
•
If the Jumper block is WHITE the heaters are configured for 115 VAC at 60 Hz.
•
If the Jumper block is BLUE the heaters are configured for 220, 240 VAC at 50 Hz.
233
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
J2: Power
Configuration
Jumper
Figure 11-4:
Location of Relay Board Power Configuration Jumper
AC Configuration of the pump is accomplished via an in-line, hard wired, set of
connections. Call Teledyne API’s Technical Support Department for more information.
11.6.2. DC POWeR SUPPLY
If you have determined that the analyzer’s AC main power is working, but the unit is
still not operating properly, there may be a problem with one of the instrument’s
switching power supplies, which convert AC power to 5 and ±15 V (PS1) as well as +12
V DC power (PS2). The supplies can either have DC output at all or a noisy output
(fluctuating).
To assist tracing DC Power Supply problems, the wiring used to connect the various
printed circuit assemblies and DC powered components and the associated test points on
the relay board follow a standard color-coding scheme as defined in Table 11-4.
Table 11-4: DC Power Test Point and Wiring Color Code
NAME
TEST POINT#
COLOR
DEFINITION
DGND
1
Black
Digital ground
+5V
2
Red
AGND
3
Green
+15V
4
Blue
-15V
5
Yellow
+12V
6
Purple
+12R
7
Orange
Analog ground
12 V return (ground) line
A voltmeter should be used to verify that the DC voltages are correct as listed in Table
11-4. An oscilloscope, in AC mode and with band limiting turned on, can be used to
evaluate if the supplies are excessively noisy (>100 mV peak-to-peak).
234
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
Table 11-5: DC Power Supply Acceptable Levels
CHECK RELAY BOARD TEST POINTS
POWER
SUPPLY
VOLTAGE
FROM TEST POINT
TO TEST POINT
MIN V
MAX V
2
+4.80
+5.25
NAME
#
NAME
#
+5
PS1
+5
DGND
1
PS1
+15
AGND
3
+15
4
+13.5
+16.0
PS1
-15
AGND
3
-15V
5
-14.0
-16.0
PS1
AGND
AGND
3
DGND
1
-0.05
+0.05
PS1
Chassis
DGND
1
Chassis
N/A
-0.05
+0.05
PS2
+12
+12V Ret
6
+12V
7
+11.8
+12.5
PS2
DGND
+12V Ret
6
DGND
1
-0.05
+0.05
11.6.3. I2C BUS
Operation of the I2C bus can be verified by observing the behavior of D1 on the relay
PCA & D2 on the Valve Driver PCA . Assuming that the DC power supplies are
operating properly, the I2C bus is operating properly if: D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of
the Valve Driver PCA are flashing
There is a problem with the I2C bus if both D1 on the relay PCA and D2 of the Valve
Driver PCA are ON/OFF constantly.
11.6.4. TOUCH-SCREEN INTERFACE
Verify the functioning of the touch screen by observing the display when pressing a
touch-screen control button. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the
DC power supplies are operating properly, but pressing a control button on the touch
screen does not change the display, any of the following may be the problem:
•
The touch-screen controller may be malfunctioning.
•
The internal USB bus may be malfunctioning.
You can verify this failure by logging on to the instrument using APICOM or a terminal
program. If the analyzer responds to remote commands and the display changes
accordingly, the touch-screen interface may be faulty.
11.6.5. LCD DISPLAY MODULE
Verify the functioning of the front panel display by observing it when power is applied
to the instrument. Assuming that there are no wiring problems and that the DC power
supplies are operating properly, the display screen should light and show the splash
screen and other indications of its state as the CPU goes through its initialization
process.
06807F DCN7335
235
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
11.6.6. RELAY BOARD
The relay board circuit can most easily be checked by observing the condition of its
status LEDs as described in Section 11.2, and the associated output when toggled on and
off through the SIGNAL I/O function in the DIAG menu, refer to Section 5.9.1.
•
If the front panel display responds to button presses and D1 on the relay board is not
flashing, then either the I2C connection between the motherboard and the relay
board is bad, or the relay board itself is bad.
•
If D1 on the relay board is flashing, but toggling an output in the Signal I/O
function menu does not toggle the output’s status LED, the there is a circuit
problem, or possibly a blown driver chip, on the relay board.
•
If D1 on the Relay board is flashing and the status indicator for the output in
question (heater, valve, etc.) toggles properly using the Signal I/O function, but the
output device does not turn on/off, then the associated device (valve or heater) or its
control device (valve driver, heater relay) is malfunctioning.
Several of the control devices are in sockets and can easily be replaced. The table below
lists the control device associated with a particular function:
Table 11-6: Relay Board Control Devices
FUNCTION
CONTROL DEVICE
SOCKETED
Valve0 – Valve3
U5
Yes
Valve4 – Valve7
U6
Yes
All heaters
K1-K5
Yes
11.6.7. MOTHERBOARD
11.6.7.1. A/D FUNCTIONS
A basic check of the analog to digital (A/D) converter operation on the motherboard is
to use the Signal I/O function under the DIAG menu. Check the following two A/D
reference voltages and input signals that can be easily measured with a voltmeter. Using
the Signal I/O function (refer to Section 5.9.1 and Appendix D), view the value of
REF_4096_MV and REF_GND.
236
•
The nominal value for REF_4096_MV is 4096 mV ± 10 mV.
•
The nominal value for REF_GND is 0 mV ± 3 mV, respectively, of their nominal
values (4096 and 0) and are
•
If these signals are stable to within ±0.5 mV, the basic A/D converter is functioning
properly.
•
If these values fluctuate largely or are off by more than specified above, one or more
of the analog circuits may be overloaded or the motherboard may be faulty.
•
Choose one parameter in the Signal I/O function such as SAMPLE_PRESSURE
(refer to previous section on how to measure it). Compare its actual voltage with the
voltage displayed through the SIGNAL I/O function. If the wiring is intact but there
is a difference of more than ±10 mV between the measured and displayed voltage,
the motherboard may be faulty.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
11.6.7.2. ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGES
To verify that the analog outputs are working properly, connect a voltmeter to the output
in question and perform an analog output step test as described in Section 5.9.2.
For each of the steps, taking into account any offset that may have been programmed
into the channel (refer to Section 5.9.3.4), the output should be within 1% of the nominal
value listed in the Table 11-7 except for the 0% step, which should be within 2-3 mV. If
one or more of the steps is outside of this range, a failure of one or both D/A converters
and their associated circuitry on the motherboard is likely.
Table 11-7: Analog Output Test Function - Nominal Values
FULL SCALE OUTPUT VOLTAGE
100MV
1V
5V
10V*
STEP
%
1
0
0 mV
NOMINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE
0
0
0
2
20
20 mV
0.2
1
2
3
40
40 mV
0.4
2
4
4
60
60 mV
0.6
3
6
5
80
80 mV
0.8
4
8
6
100
100 mV
1.0
5
10
* Increase the Analog Out (AOUT) Cal Limits in the DIAG>Analog I/O Config menu.
11.6.7.3. STATUS OUTPUTS
The procedure below can be used to test the Status outputs.
1. Connect a cable jumper between the “-“ pin and the “” pin on the status output
connector.
2. Connect a 1000 Ω resistor between the +5 V and the pin for the status output that is
being tested.
Table 11-8: Status Outputs Check Pin Out
PIN
(left to right)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
STATUS
System Ok
Conc Valid
High Range
Zero Cal
Span Cal
Diag Mode
Spare
Spare
3. Connect a voltmeter between the “-“ pin and the pin of the output being tested (refer
to Table 11-8).
4. Under the DIAG  SIGNAL I/O menu (refer to Section 5.9.1), scroll through the
inputs and outputs until you get to the output in question. Alternately turn on and off
the output noting the voltage on the voltmeter, it should vary between 0 volts for ON
and 5 volts for OFF.
06807F DCN7335
237
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
11.6.7.4. CONTROL INPUTS
The control input bits can be tested by the following procedure:
1. Connect a jumper from the +5 V pin on the STATUS connector to the U on the
CONTROL IN connector.
pin on the STATUS connector to the A pin on
2. Connect a second jumper from the
the CONTROL IN connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to
ZERO CAL R mode.
3. Connect a second jumper from the
pin on the STATUS connector to the B pin on
the CONTROL IN connector. The instrument should switch from SAMPLE mode to
SPAN CAL R mode.
In each case, the T100 should return to SAMPLE mode when the jumper is removed.
11.6.8. CPU
There are two major types of CPU board failures, a complete failure and a failure
associated with the Disk-On-Module (DOM). If either of these failures occurs, contact
the factory.
For complete failures, assuming that the power supplies are operating properly and the
wiring is intact, the CPU is faulty if on power-on, the watchdog LED on the
motherboard is not flashing.
In some rare circumstances, this failure may be caused by a bad IC on the motherboard,
specifically U57, the large, 44 pin device on the lower right hand side of the board. If
this is true, removing U57 from its socket will allow the instrument to start up but the
measurements will be invalid.
If the analyzer stops during initialization (the front panel display shows a fault or
warning message), it is likely that the DOM, the firmware or the configuration and data
files have been corrupted.
11.6.9. RS-232 COMMUNICATION
This section provides general RS-232 communication information.
11.6.9.1. GENERAL RS-232 TROUBLESHOOTING
Teledyne API’s analyzers use the RS-232 protocol as the standard, serial
communications protocol. RS-232 is a versatile standard, which has been used for many
years but, at times, is difficult to configure. Teledyne API conforms to the standard pin
assignments in the implementation of RS-232. Problems with RS-232 connections
usually center around 4 general areas:
238
•
Incorrect cabling and connectors. This is the most common problem. Refer to
Section 3.3.1.8 for connector, pin-out and setup information.
•
The communications (baud) rate and protocol parameters are incorrectly configured.
Refer to 3.3.1.8 and 6.2 for baud rate information.
•
The COMM port communications mode is set incorrectly (refer to Section 6.2.1).
•
If a modem is used, additional configuration and wiring rules must be observed.
Refer to Section 8.3.
•
Incorrect setting of the DTE - DCE Switch. Refer to Section 6.1.
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
11.6.9.2. MODEM OR TERMINAL OPERATION
These are the general steps for troubleshooting problems with a modem connected to a
Teledyne API analyzer.
•
Check cables for proper connection to the modem, terminal or computer.
•
Check the correct position of the DTE/DCE switch as described in Section 6.1.
•
Check the correct setup command (refer to Section 8.3).
•
Verify that the Ready to Send (RTS) signal is at logic high. The T100 sets Pin 7
(RTS) to greater than 3 volts to enable modem transmission.
•
Ensure that the baud rate, word length, and stop bit settings between modem and
analyzer match (refer to Sections 6.2.2 and 8.3).
•
Use the RS-232 test function to send “w” characters to the modem, terminal or
computer. Refer to Section 6.2.3.
•
Get your terminal, modem or computer to transmit data to the analyzer (holding
down the space bar is one way). The green LED on the rear panel should flicker as
the instrument is receiving data.
•
Ensure that the communications software is functioning properly.
Further help with serial communications is available in a separate manual “RS-232
Manual”, Teledyne API’s P/N 013500000, available online at http://www.Teledyneapi.com/manuals/.
11.6.10. SHUTTER SYSTEM
To check the functionality of the UV light Shutter by manually activating it:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
8
SETUP
8
0
JUMP TO: 01
1
ENTR EXIT
Press these buttons
until 32 is displayed
ENTER SETUP PASS : 818
1
DIAG I / O
ENTR EXIT
DIAG I / O
EXIT returns
to the main
SAMPLE display
32) DARK_SHUTTER=OFF
PREV NEXT JUMP
SETUP X.X
OFF PRNT EXIT
CFG DAS RNGE PASS CLK MORE
EXIT
DIAG I / O
32) DARK_SHUTTER=ON
PREV NEXT JUMP
SETUP X.X
ON PRNT EXIT
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
COMM VARS DIAG
EXIT
DIAG I / O
3
DIAG
JUMP TO: 32
2
ENTR EXIT
SIGNAL I / O
PREV NEXT JUMP
ENTR EXIT
Press these buttons
until 36 is displayed
DIAG I / O
DIAG I / O
Figure 11-5:
36) UVLAMP_SIGNAL= 3.4 MV
PREV NEXT JUMP
0) EXT_ZERO_CAL=OFF
PREV NEXT JUMP
06807F DCN7335
Activate the
Dark Shutter
PRIMARY SETUP MENU
PRNT EXIT
PRNT EXIT
EXIT 4x’s to return
to the
SAMPLE display
UV LAMP_SIGNAL
should be
<20 mV
Manual Activation of the UV Light Shutter
239
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
11.6.11. PMT SENSOR
The photo multiplier tube detects the light emitted by the UV excited fluorescence of
SO2. It has a gain of about 500000 to 1000000. It is not possible to test the detector
outside of the instrument in the field. The best way to determine if the PMT is working
properly is by using the optical test (OTEST), which is described in Section 5.9.4. The
basic method to diagnose a PMT fault is to eliminate the other components using
ETEST, OTEST and specific tests for other sub-assemblies.
11.6.12. PMT PREAMPLIFIER BOARD
To check the correct operation of the preamplifier board, we suggest the technician carry
out the electrical and optical tests described in 5.9.4 and 5.9.5.
If the ETEST fails, the preamplifier board may be faulty.
11.6.13. PMT TEMPERATURE CONTROL PCA
The TEC control printed circuit assembly is located on the sensor housing assembly,
under the slanted shroud, next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan.
•
If the red LED located on the top edge of this assembly is not glowing the control
circuit is not receiving power.
•
Check the analyzer's power supply, the relay board’s power distribution circuitry
and the wiring connecting them to the PMT temperature control PCA.
11.6.13.1. TEC CONTROL TEST POINTS
Four test points are also located at the top of this assembly they are numbered left to
right start with the T1 point immediately to the right of the power status LED. These
test points provide information regarding the functioning of the control circuit.
To determine the current running through the control circuit, measure the voltage
between T1 and T2. Multiply that voltage by 10.
To determine the drive voltage being supplied by the control circuit to the TEC, measure
the voltage between T2 and T3.
•
If this voltage is zero, the TEC circuitry is most likely open.
•
If the voltage between T2 and T3 = 0 VDC and the voltage measured between T1
and T2 = 0 VDC there is most likely an open circuit or failed op amp on control
PCA itself
•
If the voltage between T2 and T3 = 0 VDC and the voltage measured between T1 to
T2 is some voltage other than 0 VDC, the TEC is most likely shorted
T4 is tied directly to ground. To determine the absolute voltage on any one of the other
test points make a measurement between that test point and T4.
11.6.14. HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
The HVPS is located in the interior of the sensor module and is plugged into the PMT
tube (refer to Figure 12-17). It requires 2 voltage inputs. The first is +15 which powers
the supply. The second is the programming voltage which is generated on the Preamp
Board. This power supply is unlike a traditional PMT HVPS. It is like having 10
240
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
independent power supplies, one to each pin of the PMT. The test procedure below
allows you to test each supply.
1. Check the HVPS test function via the front panel and record the reading level.
Adjustment of the HVPS output level is covered in the hardware calibration
procedure in Section 11.7.2.8.
2. Turn off the instrument.
3. Remove the cover and disconnect the 2 connectors at the front of the PMT housing.
4. Remove the end plate from the PMT housing.
5. Remove the HVPS/PMT assembly from the cold block inside the sensor. Un-plug
the PMT.
6. Re-connect the 7 pin connector to the Sensor end cap, and power-up the
instrument.
7. Check the voltages between the pairs of pins listed in Table 11-9. The result for
each pair should be equal and approximately 10% of the reading level recorded in
Step 1.
Table 11-9: Example of HVPS Power Supply Outputs
If HVPS reading = 700 VDC
PIN PAIR
NOMINAL READING
12
70 VDC
23
70 VDC
34
70 VDC
45
70 VDC
6
7
5
8
4
3
9
2
10
56
70 VDC
67
70 VDC
78
70 VDC
11
1
KEY
8. Turn off the instrument power, and re-connect the PMT tube, and then re-assemble
the sensor.
If any faults are found in the test, the HVPS must be replaced. There are no user
serviceable parts inside the HVPS.
11.6.15. PNEUMATIC SENSOR ASSEMBLY
The pressure/flow sensor circuit board, located behind the sensor assembly, can be
checked with a voltmeter using the following procedure, which assumes that the wiring
is intact and that the motherboard and the power supplies are operating properly.
06807F DCN7335
•
Measure the voltage across TP1 and TP2, it should be 10.0 ± 0.25 V. If not, the
board may be faulty.
•
Measure the voltage across capacitor C2; it should be 5.0 ± 0.25 V. If not, the board
may be faulty.
241
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
11.6.16. SAMPLE PRESSURE
Measure the voltage across test points TP1 and TP4. With the sample pump
disconnected or turned off, this voltage should be 4500 ± 250 mV. With the pump
running, it should be about 0.2 V less as the sample pressure drops by about 1 in-Hg-A
from ambient pressure. If this voltage is significantly different, the pressure transducer
S2 or the board may be faulty. A leak in the sample system to vacuum may also cause
this voltage to be between about 0.6 and 4.5. Ensure that the front panel reading of the
sample pressure is at about 1 in-Hg-A less than ambient pressure.
11.6.17. IZS OPTION
The zero/span valves and IZS options need to be enabled in the software (contact the
factory on how to do this). Refer to Figure 3-19 and Figure 3-21 for a flow diagram with
zero/span valve or IZS option.
•
Check for the physical presence of the valves or the IZS option.
•
Check that a working perm-tube is installed in the IZS oven assembly.
•
Check front panel for correct software configuration. When the instrument is in
SAMPLE mode, the front panel display should show CALS and CALZ buttons in
the second line of the display. The presence of the buttons indicates that the option
has been enabled in software. In addition, the IZS option is enabled if the TEST
functions show a parameter named IZS TEMP.
The IZS option is heated with a proportional heater circuit and the temperature is
maintained at 50° C ±1°. Check the IZS TEMP function via front panel display (refer to
Section 4.1.1) and the IZS_TEMP signal voltage using the SIGNAL I/O function
under the DIAG Menu (refer to Section 5.9.1).
At 50° C, the temperature signal from the IZS thermistor should be around 2500 mV.
11.6.18. BOX TEMPERATURE
The box temperature sensor (thermistor) is mounted on the motherboard at the bottom,
right corner of the CPU board when looking at it from the front. It cannot be
disconnected to check its resistance. Box temperature will vary with, but will always
read about 5° C higher than, ambient (room) temperature because of the internal heating
zones sample chamber and other devices.
To check the box temperature functionality, we recommend checking the BOX_TEMP
signal voltage using the SIGNAL I/O function under the DIAG Menu (refer to Section
5.9.1).
At about 30° C (5° above typical room temperature), the signal should be around 1500
mV. We recommend using a certified or calibrated external thermometer / temperature
sensor to verify the accuracy of the box temperature.
11.6.19. PMT TEMPERATURE
PMT temperature should be low and constant. It is more important that this temperature
is maintained constant than it is to maintain it low. The PMT cooler uses a Peltier,
thermo-electric element powered by 12 VDC from the switching power supply PS2. The
temperature is controlled by a proportional temperature controller located on the
preamplifier board. Voltages applied to the cooler element vary from +/- 0.1 to +/- 12
242
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
VDC. The temperature set point (hard-wired into the preamplifier board) will vary by
about ±1° C due to component tolerances. The actual temperature will be maintained to
within 0.1° C around that set point.
On power-up of the analyzer, the front panel enables the user to watch that temperature
drop from about ambient temperature down to its set point of 6-8° C.
•
If the temperature fails to drop after 20 minutes, there is a problem in the cooler
circuit.
•
If the control circuit on the preamplifier board is faulty, a temperature of -1° C is
reported.
11.7. SERVICE PROCEDURES
This section contains some procedures that may need to be performed when a major
component of the analyzer requires repair or replacement.
ATTENTION
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
Servicing of circuit components requires electrostatic discharge
protection (ESD), i.e. ESD grounding straps, mats and containers.
Failure to use ESD protection when working with electronic assemblies
will void the instrument warranty.
Refer to to the manual on Fundamentals of ESD, PN 04786, which can be
downloaded from our website at http://www.teledyne-api.com under Help
Center > Product Manuals in the Special Manuals section.
11.7.1. DISK-ON-MODULE REPLACEMENT
Replacing the Disk-on-Module (DOM) will cause loss of all DAS data; it also may
cause loss of some instrument configuration parameters unless the replacement DOM
carries the exact same firmware version. Whenever changing the version of installed
software, the memory must be reset. Failure to ensure that memory is reset can cause the
analyzer to malfunction, and invalidate measurements. After the memory is reset, the
A/D converter must be re-calibrated, and all information collected in Step 1 below must
be re-entered before the instrument will function correctly. Also, zero and span
calibration should be performed.
1. Document all analyzer parameters that may have been changed, such as range,
auto-cal, analog output, serial port and other settings before replacing the DOM
2. Turn off power to the instrument, fold down the rear panel by loosening the
mounting screws.
3. When looking at the electronic circuits from the back of the analyzer, locate the
Disk-on-Module in the right-most socket of the CPU board.
4. The DOM should carry a label with firmware revision, date and initials of the
programmer.
5. Remove the nylon fastener that mounts the DOM over the CPU board, and lift the
DOM off the CPU. Do not bend the connector pins.
06807F DCN7335
243
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
6. Install the new Disk-on-Module, making sure the notch at the end of the chip
matches the notch in the socket.
7. It may be necessary to straighten the pins somewhat to fit them into the socket.
Press the DOM all the way in and reinsert the offset clip.
8. Close the rear panel and turn on power to the machine.
9. If the replacement DOM carries a firmware revision, re-enter all of the setup
information.
244
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
11.7.2. SENSOR MODULE REPAIR & CLEANING
CAUTION - GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Do not look at the UV lamp while the unit is operating. UV light can cause
eye damage. Always use safety glasses made from UV blocking material
when working with the UV Lamp Assembly. (Generic plastic glasses are
not adequate).
Figure 11-6:
IMPORTANT
Sensor Module Wiring and Pneumatic Fittings
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
After any repair or service has been performed on the sensor module, the
T100 should be allowed to warm up for 60 minutes.
Always perform a leak check (refer to Section 10.3.6) and calibrate the
analyzer (refer to Section 9) before placing it back in service.
06807F DCN7335
245
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
11.7.2.1. REMOVING AND REINSTALLING THE SENSOR MODULE
Several of the procedures in this section either require the sensor module to be removed
from the instrument or are easier to perform if it has been removed.
To remove the Sensor Module:
1. Turn off the instrument power.
2. Open the top cover of the instrument:
•
Remove the set screw located in the top, center of the rear panel.
•
Remove the screws fastening the top cover to the unit (four per side).
•
Lift the cover straight up.
3. Disconnect the sensor module pneumatic lines (refer to Figure 11-6
•
Gas inlet line: 1/8” black Teflon line with stainless steel fitting.
•
Gas outlet line: 1/4” black Teflon line with brass fitting.
4. Disconnect all electrical wiring to the Sensor Module:
•
UV lamp power supply wiring
•
Shutter cabling
•
Reaction cell thermistor wiring (yellow)
•
Reaction cell heater wiring (red)
•
UV detector wiring
•
TEC power cable
•
PMT wiring (connectors J5 & J6 on the PMT preamplifier PCA)
5. Remove the three sensor module mounting screws.
Mounting
Screw
PMT
Housing
Mounting
Screw
Figure 11-7:
Sample
Chamber
Mounting
Screw
Sensor Module Mounting Screws
Follow the above steps in reverse order to reinstall the sensor module.
246
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
11.7.2.2. CLEANING THE SAMPLE CHAMBER
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
The sample chamber should only be opened or cleaned on instructions
from the Teledyne API Technical Support department.
Be careful not to leave thumbprints on the interior of the sample
chamber. The various oils that make up fingerprints fluoresce brightly
under UV light and will significantly affect the accuracy of the analyzer’s
SO2 measurement)
To clean the sample chamber:
1. Remove the sensor module as described in Section 11.7.2.1.
2. Remove the sample chamber mounting bracket by unscrewing the four bracket
screws.
Figure 11-8:
Sample Chamber Mounting Bracket
3. Unscrew the 4 hexagonal standoffs.
4. Gently remove the chamber cover.
5. Using a lint-free cloth dampened with distilled water, wipe the inside surface of the
chamber and the chamber cover.
6. Dry the chamber surfaces with a 2nd lint-free cloth.
7. Re-assemble the chamber and re-install the sensor module.
06807F DCN7335
247
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
11.7.2.3. CLEANING THE PMT LENS AND PMT FILTER
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
The sample chamber should only be opened or cleaned on instructions
from the Teledyne API Technical Support Department.
Be careful not to leave thumbprints on the interior of the sample
chamber. The various oils that make up fingerprints fluoresce brightly
under UV light and will significantly affect the accuracy of the
analyzer’s SO2 measurement).
To clean the PMT Lens and filter:
1. Remove the sensor module as described in Section 11.7.2.1.
Figure 11-9:
248
Hex Screw Between Lens Housing and Sample Chamber
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
2. Remove the sample chamber from the PMT lens and filter housing by unscrewing
the 4 hex screws that fasten the chamber to the housing.
3. Remove the four lens cover screws.
Figure 11-10:
UV Lens Housing / Filter Housing
4. Remove the lens/filter cover.
5. Carefully remove the PMT lens and set it aside on soft, lint-free cloth.
6. Remove the 3-piece, lens/filter spacer.
7. Carefully remove the PMT filter and set it aside on soft, lint-free cloth.
Figure 11-11: PMT UV Filter Housing Disassembled
06807F DCN7335
249
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
8. Using a lint-free cloth dampened with distilled water, clean the lens, the filter and all
of the housing assembly mechanical parts.
9. Dry everything with a 2nd lint-free cloth.
10. Reassemble the lens/filter housing (refer to Figure 11-11 and Figure 11-10).
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Use gloves and a clean plastic covered surface during assembly.
Cleanliness of the inside of the light shield, the UV lens filter housing and
the PMT lens is especially important.
Note
Ensure to apply Loctite to the four lens holder screws and the two light
shield screws.
11. Reattach the lens / filter housing to the sample chamber.
12. Reattach the sample chamber to the PMT housing.
13. Reinstall the sensor module into the T100.
14. Close the instrument.
15. Turn the T100 on and let it warm up for 60 minutes.
16. Perform a leak check (refer to Section 10.3.6).
17. Calibrate the analyzer (refer to Section 9).
11.7.2.4. REPLACING THE UV FILTER/LENS
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Be careful not to leave thumbprints on the interior of the sample chamber.
The various oils that make up fingerprints fluoresce brightly under UV
light and will significantly affect the accuracy of the analyzer’s SO2
measurement).
CAUTION - GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Do not look at the UV lamp while the unit is operating. UV light can cause
eye damage. Always use safety glasses made from UV blocking material
when working with the UV Lamp Assembly. (Generic plastic glasses are
not adequate).
To replace the UV filter lens:
1. Turn off the instrument’s power and remove the power cord from the instrument.
2. Unplug J4 connector from the motherboard to allow tool access.
3. Alternatively, remove the sensor module as described in Section 11.7.2.1.
250
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
4. Remove 4 screws from the shutter cover (refer to Figure 11-13) and remove the
cover.
5. Remove 4 screws from the UV filter retainer.
Figure 11-12: Disassembling the Shutter Assembly
6. Carefully remove the UV filter.
7. Install the UV filter.
8. Handle carefully and never touch the filter’s surface.
9. UV filter’s wider ring side should be facing out.
10. Install UV filter retainer and tighten screws.
11. Install the shutter cover and minifit connector. Tighten 4 shutter cover screws.
12. Reinstall the sensor module and Plug J4 connector into the motherboard.
11.7.2.5. ADJUSTING THE UV LAMP (PEAKING THE LAMP)
There are three ways in which ambient conditions can affect the UV Lamp output and
therefore the accuracy of the SO2 concentration measurement. These are:
Line Voltage Change: UV lamp energy is directly proportional to the line voltage.
This can be avoided by installing adequate AC Line conditioning equipment such as a
UPS/surge suppressor.
Lamp Aging - Over a period of months, the UV energy will show a downward trend
and can be up to 50% in the first 90 days, and then a slower rate, until the end of useful
life of the lamp. Periodically running the UV lamp calibration routine (refer to Section
5.9.6) will compensate for this until the lamp output becomes too low to function at all.
06807F DCN7335
251
Troubleshooting & Service
Note
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
As the lamp degrades over time, the software for the CPU compensates
for the loss of UV output.
Lamp Positioning – The UV output level of the lamp is not even across the entire
length of the lamp. Some portions of the lamp shine slightly more brightly than others.
At the factory the position of the UV lamp is adjusted to optimize the amount of UV
light shining through the UV filter/lens and into the reaction cell. Changes to the
physical alignment of the lamp can affect the analyzers ability to accurately measure
SO2.
Figure 11-13: Shutter Assembly
CAUTION - GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Do not look at the UV lamp while the unit is operating. UV light can cause
eye damage. Always use safety glasses made from UV blocking material
when working with the UV Lamp Assembly. (Generic plastic glasses are
not adequate).
252
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
1. Set the analyzer display to show the signal I/O function, UVLAMP_SIGNAL (refer to
Section 11.1.3). UVLAMP_SIGNAL is function 33.
2. Slightly loosen the large brass thumbscrew located on the shutter housing (refer to
Figure 11-14) so that the lamp can be moved.
DO NOT
Use Lamp Cap to
adjust Lamp position
UV Lamp
Power Supply
Wires
Adjust Lamp
Position by
grasping Lamp
body ONLY
UV Lamp
Bracket
Mounting
Screws
Thumb screw
Figure 11-14.
UV Lamp Adjustment
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
ATTENTION
DO NOT grasp the UV lamp by its cap when changing its position always grasp the main body of the lamp (refer to Figure 11-13).
Inattention to this detail could twist and potentially disconnect the lamp’s
power supply wires.
3. While watching the UVLAMP_SIGNAL reading, slowly rotate the lamp or move it
back and forth vertically until the UVLAMP_SIGNAL reading is at its maximum.
4. Compare the UVLAMP_SIGNAL reading to the information in Table 11-10 and
follow the instructions there.
Table 11-10:
UV Lamp Signal Troubleshooting
UVLAMP_SIGNAL
3500mV±200mV.
ACTION TO BE TAKEN
No Action Required
> 4900mV at any time.
Adjust the UV reference detector potentiometer (Figure 11-15) until
UVLAMP_SIGNAL reads approximately 3600mV before continuing to adjust the
lamp position.
>3700mV or < 3300mV
Adjust the UV reference detector potentiometer (Figure 11-15) until
UVLAMP_SIGNAL reads as close to 3500mV as possible.
.< 600mV
06807F DCN7335
Replace the lamp (Section 11.7.2.6.
253
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Figure 11-15: Location of UV Reference Detector Potentiometer
5. Finger tighten the thumbscrew.
CAUTION - GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
DO NOT over tighten the thumbscrew, as over-tightening can cause
breakage to the lamp and consequently release mercury into the area.
11.7.2.6. REPLACING THE UV LAMP
CAUTION - GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
Do not look at the UV lamp while the unit is operating. UV light can cause
eye damage. Always use safety glasses made from UV blocking material
when working with the UV Lamp Assembly. (Generic plastic glasses are
not adequate).
1. Turn off the analyzer.
2. Disconnect the UV lamp from its power supply.
3. You can find the power supply connector by following the two, white UV Lamp
power supply wires from the lamp to the power supply.
4. Loosen, but do not remove the two UV lamp bracket screws and the large brass
thumbscrew located (refer to Figure 11-13 and Figure 11-14) on the shutter housing
so that the lamp can be moved.
ATTENTION
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
DO NOT grasp the UV lamp by its cap when changing its position always grasp the main body of the lamp (refer to Figure 11-13) Inattention
to this detail could twist and potentially disconnect the lamp’s power
supply wires.
5. Remove the UV Lamp by pulling it straight up.
254
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
6. Insert the new UV lamp into the bracket.
7. Tighten the two UV lamp bracket screws, but leave the brass thumb screw untightened.
8. Connect the new UV lamp to the power supply.
9. Turn the instrument on and perform the UV adjustment procedure as defined in
section 11.7.2.5.
10. Finger tighten the thumbscrew.
CAUTION - GENERAL SAFETY HAZARD
DO NOT over tighten the thumbscrew, as over-tightening can cause
breakage to the lamp and consequently release mercury into the area.
11. Perform a lamp calibration procedure (refer to Section 5.9.6) and a zero point and
span point calibration (refer to Section 9).
11.7.2.7. REPLACING THE PMT, HVPS OR TEC
The PMT should last for the lifetime of the analyzer. However, in some cases, the high
voltage power supply (HVPS) or the thermo-electric cooler (TEC) may fail.
IMPORTANT
06807F DCN7335
When removing the PMT housing end plate cover for the Sensor
Assembly, ensure to replace the 5 desiccant bags inside the housing.
255
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Figure 11-16: PMT Assembly - Exploded View
To replace the PMT, the HVPS or the TEC:
1. Remove the sensor module as described in Section 11.7.2.1.
2. Remove the entire sensor module assembly from the.
3. Remove the reaction cell assembly.
4. Remove the two connectors on the PMT housing end plate facing towards the front
panel.
5. Remove the end plate itself (4 screws with plastic washers).
6. Remove the desiccant bags inside the PMT housing.
7. Along with the plate, slide out the OPTIC TEST LED and the thermistor that
measures the PMT temperature.
•
Both may be coated with a white, thermal conducting paste. Do not contaminate
the inside of the housing or the PMT tube with this grease.
8. Unscrew the PMT assembly. It is held to the cold block by two plastic screws.
•
Because the threads of the plastic screws are easily damaged it is highly
recommended to use new screws when reassembling the unit.
9. Carefully take out the assembly consisting of the HVPS, the gasket and the PMT.
256
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
10. Change the PMT or the HVPS or both, clean the PMT glass tube with a clean, antistatic wipe and DO NOT TOUCH it after cleaning.
11. If the cold block or TEC is to be changed disconnect the TEC driver board from the
preamplifier board.
•
Remove the cooler fan duct (4 screws on its side) including the driver board.
•
Disconnect the driver board from the TEC and set the sub-assembly aside.
•
Remove the end plate with the cooling fins (4 screws) and slide out the PMT
cold block assembly, which contains the TEC.
•
Unscrew the TEC from the cooling fins and the cold block and replace it with a
new unit.
12. Re-assemble the TEC subassembly in reverse order.
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
ATTENTION
The thermo-electric cooler needs to be mounted flat to the heat sink. If
there is any significant gap, the TEC might burn out. Ensure to apply heat
sink paste before mounting it and tighten the screws evenly and crosswise.
•
Ensure to use thermal grease between TEC and cooling fins as well as between
TEC and cold block.
•
Align the side opening in the cold block with the hole in the PMT housing
where the sample Chamber attaches.
•
Evenly tighten the long mounting screws for good thermal conductivity.
13. Re-insert the TEC subassembly. Ensure that the O-ring is placed properly and the
assembly is tightened evenly.
14. Re-insert the PMT/HVPS subassembly.
•
Don’t forget the gasket between HVPS and PMT.
•
Use new plastic screws to mount the PMT assembly on the PMT cold block.
15. Insert the LED and thermistor into the cold block.
16. Replace the desiccant bags with five new desiccant bags.
17. Carefully replace the end plate.
•
Ensure that the O-ring is properly in place. Improperly placed O-rings will cause
leaks, which – in turn – cause moisture to condense on the inside of the cooler
causing the HVPS to short out.
18. Reconnect the cables and the reaction cell
•
Be sure to tighten these screws evenly.
19. Replace the sensor assembly into the chassis and fasten with four screws and
washers.
20. Perform a leak check the system.
06807F DCN7335
257
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
21. Power up the analyzer and verify the basic operation of the analyzer using the
ETEST and OTEST features (refer to Section 5.9.4 and 5.9.5) or by measuring
calibrated zero and span gases.
22. Allow the instrument to warm up for 60 minutes.
23. Perform a PMT Hardware calibration (refer to Section 11.7.2.8).
24. Perform a zero point and span calibration (refer to Section 9).
11.7.2.8. PMT HARDWARE CALIBRATION (FACTORY CAL)
The sensor module hardware calibration adjusts the slope of the PMT output when the
instrument’s slope and offset values are outside of the acceptable range and all other
more obvious causes for this problem have been eliminated.
Figure 11-17: Pre-Amplifier Board (Preamp PCA) Layout
1. Set the instrument reporting range type to SNGL (refer to Section 5.4.3.1).
2. Perform a zero–point calibration using zero air (refer to Section 9).
3. Let the instrument stabilize by allowing it to run for one hour.
4. Adjust the UV Lamp (refer to Section 11.7.2.5).
5. Perform a LAMP CALIBRATION procedure (refer to Section 5.9.6).
6. Locate the Preamp PCA (refer to Figure 11-16).
7. Locate the Following Components On the Preamp PCA (Figure 11-17):
8. HVPS coarse adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).
9. HVPS fine adjustment switch (Range 0-9, then A-F).
10. Gain adjustment potentiometer (Full scale is 10 to 12 turns).
11. Set the HVPS coarse adjustment to its minimum setting (0).
12. Set the HVPS fine adjustment switch to its maximum setting (F).
258
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Troubleshooting & Service
13. Turn the gain adjustment potentiometer clockwise to its maximum setting.
14. Set the front panel display to show STABIL (refer to Section 4.1.1).
15. Feed span gas into the analyzer.
16. Wait until the STABIL value is below 0.5 ppb.
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
Use a span gas equal to 80% of the reporting range.
Example: for a reporting range of 500 ppb, use a span gas of 400 ppb.
17. Scroll to the OFFSET function and record the value.
18. Scroll to the NORM PMT value.
COULD DAMAGE INSTRUMENT AND VOID WARRANTY
ATTENTION
Do not overload the PMT by accidentally setting both adjustment
switches to their maximum setting. This can cause permanent damage
to the PMT.
19. Determine the target NORM PMT value according to the following formulas.
•
•
If the reporting range is set for ≤ 2,000 ppb (the instrument will be using the
2,000 ppb physical range):
Target NORM PMT = (2 x span gas concentration) + OFFSET
If the reporting range is set for ≥ 2,001 ppb(the instrument will be using the
20,000 ppb physical range):
Target NORM PMT = (0.181 x span gas concentration) + OFFSET
EXAMPLE: If the OFFSET IS 33 mV, the Reporting Range is 500 ppb, the
span gas should be 400 ppb and the calculation would be:
Target NORM PMT = (2 x 400) + 33 mV
Target NORM PMT = 833 mV
20. Set the HVPS coarse adjustment switch to the lowest setting that will give you more
than the target NORM PMT signal from Step 16.
•
The coarse adjustment typically increments the NORM PMT signal in 100-300
mV steps.
21. Adjust the HVPS fine adjustment such that the NORM PMT value is at or just above
the target NORM PMT signal from Step 16.
22. Continue adjusting the both the coarse and fine switches until norm PMT is as close
to (but not below) the target NORM PMT signal from Step 16.
23. Adjust gain adjustment potentiometer until the NORM PMT value is ±10 mV of the
target level from Step 16.
24. Perform span and zero-point calibrations (refer to Section 9) to normalize the sensor
response to its new PMT sensitivity.
25. Review the slope and offset values, and compare them to the values in Table 9-5.
06807F DCN7335
259
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
11.8. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQS)
The following list contains some of the most commonly asked questions relating to the
T100 SO2 Analyzer.
QUESTION
ANSWER
Why is the ZERO or SPAN button not
displayed during calibration?
The T100 disables these buttons when the expected span or zero value entered by
the users is too different from the gas concentration actually measured value at the
time. This is to prevent the accidental recalibration of the analyzer to an out-ofrange response curve.-EXAMPLE: The span set point is 400 ppb but gas
concentration being measured is only 50 ppb.-For more information, refer to Section
11.4.4 and Section 11.4.5.
Why does the ENTR button
sometimes disappear on the Front
Panel Display?
During certain types of adjustments or configuration operations, the ENTR button
will disappear if you select a setting that is nonsensical (such as trying to set the 24hour clock to 25:00:00) or out of the allowable range for that parameter (such as
selecting a DAS hold off period of more than 20 minutes).-Once you adjust the
setting in question to an allowable value, the ENTR button will re-appear.
How do I enter or change the value of
my Span Gas?
Press the CONC button found under the CAL or CALS menus of the main SAMPLE
menu to enter the expected SO2 span concentration.-Refer to Section 3.4.4.1 or for
more information.
Why does the analyzer not respond to
span gas?
Section 11.4.4 has some possible answers to this question.
Can I automate the calibration of my
analyzer?
Any analyzer with zero/span valve or IZS option can be automatically calibrated
using the instrument’s AutoCal feature.-However, the accuracy of the IZS option’s
permeation tube is ±5%. While this may be acceptable for basic calibration checks,
the IZS option is not permitted as a calibration source in applications following US
EPA protocols. -To achieve highest accuracy, it is recommended to use cylinders of
calibrated span gases in combination with a zero air source. Teledyne API offers a
zero air generator Model 701 and a gas dilution calibrator Model T700 for this
purpose.
What do I do if the concentration on
the instrument's front panel display
does not match the value recorded or
displayed on my data logger even if
both instruments are properly
calibrated?
This most commonly occurs for one of the following reasons: -A difference in circuit
ground between the analyzer and the data logger or a wiring problem;-A scale
problem with the input to the data logger. -The analog outputs of the T100 can be
manually adjusted to compensate for either or both of these effects, refer to 5.9.3.4;
-The analog outputs are not calibrated, which can happen after a firmware upgrade.
-Both the electronic scale and offset of the analog outputs can be adjusted (refer to
Section 5.9.3.2). Alternately, use the data logger itself as the metering device during
calibrations procedures.
How do I perform a leak check?
Refer to Section 10.3.6.
How do I measure the sample flow?
Sample flow is measured by attaching a calibrated flow meter to the sample inlet
port when the instrument is operating. The sample flow should be 650 cm³/min
±10%. Section 10.3.6 includes detailed instructions on performing a check of the
sample gas flow.
How often do I need to change the
particulate filter?
Once per week. Table 10-1 contains a maintenance schedule listing the most
important, regular maintenance tasks.
What is the averaging time for an
T100?
The default averaging time, optimized for ambient pollution monitoring, is 240
seconds for stable concentrations and 20 seconds for rapidly changing
concentrations; Refer to 12.7.1 for more information.
My analyzer has the optional, user configurable analog output channels.
Instructions for this can be found in the Manual Addendum for Configurable Analog
Output, PN 06270.
260
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
QUESTION
How do I program and use them?
Troubleshooting & Service
ANSWER
How long does the sample pump last?
The sample pump should last about one year and the pump diaphragms should to
be replaced annually or when necessary. Use the PRES test function displayed via
the front panel to see if the diaphragm needs replacement (refer to Section 11.1.2).
Do I need a strip chart recorder or
external data logger?
No, the T100 is equipped with a very powerful internal data acquisition system.
Section 7 describes the setup and operation in detail.
11.9. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
If this manual and its troubleshooting / repair sections do not solve your problems,
technical assistance may be obtained from:
Teledyne API, Technical Support
9970 Carroll Canyon Road
San Diego, California 92131-1106 USA
Toll-free Phone:
800-324-5190
Phone:
+1 858-657-9800
Fax:
+1 858-657-9816
Email:
Website:
sda_techsupport@teledyne.com
http://www.teledyne-api.com/
Before contacting Teledyne API Technical Support, please fill out the problem report
form in Appendix C, which is also available online for electronic submission at
http://www.teledyne-api.com/forms/.
06807F DCN7335
261
Troubleshooting & Service
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
This page intentionally left blank.
262
06807F DCN7335
12. PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
This section describes the principles of operation for the T100 SO2 analyzer (Section
12.1), for the optional O2 sensor (Section 12.2) and for the optional CO2 sensor (Section
12.3). It also describes the principles of operation for pneumatics (Section 12.4),
electronics (Section 12.5), communication interfaces (Section 12.6) and software
(Section 12.7).
12.1. SULFUR DIOXIDE (SO2) SENSOR PRINCIPLES OF
OPERATION
The T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer is a microprocessor controlled analyzer that
determines the concentration of sulfur dioxide (SO2), in a sample gas drawn through the
instrument. It requires that sample and calibration gases be supplied at ambient
atmospheric pressure in order to establish a constant gas flow through the sample
chamber where the sample gas is exposed to ultraviolet light; this exposure causes the
SO2 molecules to change to an excited state (SO2*). As these SO2* molecules decay into
SO2 they fluoresce. The instrument measures the amount of fluorescence to determine
the amount of SO2 present in the sample gas.
Calibration of the instrument is performed in software and usually does not require
physical adjustments to the instrument. During calibration, the microprocessor measures
the sensor output signal when gases with known amounts of SO2 at various
concentrations are supplied and stores these measurements in memory. The
microprocessor uses these calibration values along with other performance parameters
such as the PMT dark offset, UV lamp ratio and the amount of stray light present and
measurements of the temperature and pressure of the sample gas to compute the final
SO2 concentration.
This concentration value and the original information from which it was calculated are
stored in the unit’s internal data acquisition system and reported to the user through a
vacuum fluorescent display or as electronic data via several communication ports.
This concentration value and the original information from which it was calculated are
stored in the unit’s internal data acquisition system (refer to Section7) and reported to
the user through a vacuum fluorescent display or several communication ports.
12.1.1. SO2 ULTRAVIOLET FLUORESCENCE MEASUREMENT PRINCIPLE
The physical principle upon which the T100’s measurement method is based is the
fluorescence that occurs when sulfur dioxide (SO2) is changed to excited state (SO2*) by
ultraviolet light with wavelengths in the range of 190 nm-230 nm. This reaction is a twostep process.
06807F DCN7335
263
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
The first stage (Equation 12-1) occurs when SO2 molecules are struck by photons of the
appropriate ultraviolet wavelength. In the case of the T100, a band pass filter between the
source of the UV light and the affected gas limits the wavelength of the light to
approximately 214 nm. The SO2 absorbs some of energy from the UV light causing one
of the electrons of the SO2 molecule to move to a higher energy orbital state.
Ia
SO2 + hv214 nm →
SO2 *
(Equation 12-1)
The amount SO2 converted to SO2* in the sample chamber is dependent on the average
intensity of the UV light (Ia) and not its peak intensity because the intensity of UV light
is not constant in every part of the sample chamber. Some of the photons are absorbed
by the SO2 as the light travels through the sample gas.
Figure 12-1:
UV Absorption
The equation for defining the average intensity of the UV light (Ia) is:
Ia = I 0 [1 − exp(− ax(SO2 ))]
(Equation 12-2)
Where:
I0 = Intensity of the excitation UV light.
a = The absorption coefficient of SO2 (a constant).
SO2
= Concentration of SO2 in the sample chamber.
x = The distance between the UV source and the SO2 molecule(s) being affected
(path length).
264
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
The second stage of this reaction occurs after the SO2 reaches its excited state (SO2*).
Because the system will seek the lowest available stable energy state, the SO2* molecule
quickly returns to its ground state (Equation 10-3) by giving off the excess energy in the
form of a photon (hν). The wavelength of this fluoresced light is also in the ultraviolet
band but at a longer (lower energy) wavelength centered at 330nm.
SO2 * 
→ SO2 + hv 330 nm
(Equation 12-3)
The amount of detectable UV given off by the decay of the SO2* is affected by the rate
at which this reaction occurs (k).
F = k (SO2 * )
(Equation 12-4)
Where:
F
= the amount of fluorescent light given off.
k
= The rate at which the SO2* decays into SO2.
SO2* = Amount of excited-state SO2 in the sample chamber.
Therefore:
kF
(SO2 *) →
SO2 + hv330 nm
(Equation 12-5)
Finally, the function (k) is affected by the temperature of the gas. The warmer the gas,
the faster the individual molecules decay back into their ground state and the more
photons of UV light are given off per unit of time.
Given that the absorption rate of SO2 (a) is constant, the amount of fluorescence (F) is a
result of:
•
The amount of SO2* created which is affected by the variable factors from
(Equation 12-2) above: concentration of SO2; intensity of UV light (I0); path length
of the UV light(x) and;
•
The amount of fluorescent light created which is affected by the variable factors
from (Equation 12-5): the amount of SO2* present and the rate of decay (k) which
changes based on the temperature of the gas.
When and the intensity of the light (I0) is known; path length of excited light is short (x);
the temperature of the gas is known and compensated for so that the rate of SO2*decay
is constant (k). and; no interfering conditions are present (such as interfering gases or
stray light); the amount of fluorescent light emitted (F) is directly related to the
concentration of the SO2 in the Sample Chamber.
The Model 100 E UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer is specifically designed to create these
circumstances.
•
06807F DCN7335
The light path is very short (x).
265
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
•
A reference detector measures the intensity of the available excitation UV light and
is used to remove effects of lamp drift (I0).
•
The temperature of the sample gas is measured and controlled via heaters attached to
the sample chamber so that the rate of decay (k) is constant.
•
A special hydrocarbon scrubber removes the most common interfering gases from
the sample gas.
•
And finally, the design of the sample chamber reduces the effects of stray light via
its optical geometry and spectral filtering.
The net result is that any variation in UV fluorescence can be directly attributed to
changes in the concentration of SO2 in the sample gas.
12.1.2. THE UV LIGHT PATH
The optical design of the T100’s sample chamber optimizes the fluorescent reaction
between SO2 and UV Light (refer to Figure 12-2) and assure that only UV light resulting
from the decay of SO2* into SO2 is sensed by the instruments fluorescence detector.
UV radiation is generated by a lamp specifically designed to produce a maximum
amount of light of the wavelength needed to excite SO2 into SO2* (214 nm) and a
special reference detector circuit constantly measures lamp intensity (refer to (Equation
12-2)). A Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT) detects the UV given off by the SO2* decay
(330 nm) and outputs an analog signal. Several focusing lenses and optical filters ensure
that both detectors are exposed to an optimum amount of only the right wavelengths of
UV. To further assure that the PMT only detects light given off by decaying SO2* the
pathway of the excitation UV and field of view of the PMT are perpendicular to each
other and the inside surfaces of the sample chamber are coated with a layer of black
Teflon® that absorbs stray light.
266
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Figure 12-2:
Principles of Operation
UV Light Path
12.1.3. UV SOURCE LAMP
The source of excitation UV light for the T100 is a low pressure zinc-vapor lamp. An
AC voltage heats up and vaporizes zinc contained in the lamp element creating a lightproducing plasma arc. Zinc-vapor lamps are preferred over the more common mercuryvapor lamps for this application because they produce very strong emission levels at the
wavelength required to convert SO2 to SO2*, 213.9 nm (refer to Figure 12-4).
The lamp used in the T100 is constructed with a vacuum jacket surrounding a doublebore lamp element (refer to Figure 12-3). The vacuum jacket isolates the plasma arc
from most external temperature fluctuations. The jacket also contains thermal energy
created by the lamp’s operation therefore helping the lamp to heat up and maintain
proper vaporization temperature. Light is emitted through a 20 mm x 5 mm portal.
06807F DCN7335
267
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Vacuum
Jacket
Light Output
Portal
Zinc-Vapor
Plasma Arc
Dual Bore
Figure 12-3: Source UV Lamp Construction
12.1.4. THE REFERENCE DETECTOR
A vacuum diode, UV detector that converts UV light to a DC current is used to measure
the intensity of the excitation UV source lamp. It is located directly across from the
source lamp at the back of a narrow tube-shaped light trap, which places it directly in the
path of the excitation UV light. A window transparent to UV light provides an air-proof
seal that prevents ambient gas from contaminating the sample chamber. The shape of the
light trap and the fact that the detector is blind to wavelengths other than UV no extra
optical filtering is needed.
12.1.5. THE PMT
The amount of fluoresced UV produced in the sample chamber is much less than the
intensity of excitation UV source lamp (refer to Figure 12-4). Therefore a much more
sensitive device is needed to detect this light with enough resolution to be meaningful.
The T100 uses a Photo Multiplier Tube or PMT for this purpose.
A PMT is typically a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes.
Photons enter the PMT and strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit
electrons. These electrons are accelerated by a high voltage applied across a series of
special electrodes called dynodes that multiply the amount of electrons until a useable
current signal is generated. This current increases or decreases with the amount of
detected light (refer to Section 12.5.3 for more details regarding the electronic operation
of the PMT).
12.1.6. UV LAMP SHUTTER & PMT OFFSET
Inherent in the operation of both the reference detector and the PMT are a minor
electronic offsets. The degree of offset differs from detector to detector and from PMT
to PMT and can change over time as these components age.
To account for these offsets the T100 includes a shutter, located between the UV Lamp
and the source filter that periodically cuts off the UV light from the sample chamber.
This happens every 30 minutes. The analyzer records the outputs of both the reference
detector and the PMT during this dark period and factors them into the SO2
concentration calculation.
268
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
•
The reference detector offset is stored as and viewable via the front panel as the test
function DRK LMP.
•
The PMT offset is stored as and viewable via the front panel as the test function
DRK PMT.
12.1.7. OPTICAL FILTERS
The T100 analyzer uses two stages of optical filters to enhance performance. The first
stage conditions the UV light used to excite the SO2 by removing frequencies of light
that are not needed to produce SO2*. The second stage protects the PMT detector from
reacting to light not produced by the SO2* returning to its ground state.
12.1.7.1. UV SOURCE OPTICAL FILTER
Zinc-vapor lamps output light at other wavelengths beside the 214nm required for the
SO2  SO2* transformation including a relatively bright light of the same wavelength at
which SO2* fluoresces as it returns to its SO2 ground state (330 nm). In fact, the
intensity of light emitted by the UV lamp at 330nm is so bright, nearly five orders of
magnitude brighter than that resulting from the SO2* decay, it would drown out the
SO2* fluorescence.
BEFORE
AFTER
(Arbitrary Untis)
SO2*
Fluorescent
Spectrum
213.9
103
102
101
101
1
1
SO2* FLUORESCENT
SPECTRUM
0
0
100
330.3
330.3
481.1
LAMP OUTPUT
102
105
104
103
275.6
(Arbitrary Untis)
LAMP OUTPUT
104
202.5
105
307.6
213.9
UV SOURCE OPTICAL FILTER
BANDWIDTH
200
300
400
WAVELENGTH (nm)
Figure 12-4:
500
100
200
300
400
500
WAVELENGTH (nm)
Excitation Lamp UV Spectrum Before/After Filtration
To solve this problem, the light emitted by the excitation UV lamp passes through a
band pass filter that screens out photons with wavelengths outside the spectrum required
to excite SO2 into SO2* (refer to Figure 12-4).
06807F DCN7335
269
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
12.1.7.2. PMT OPTICAL FILTER
The PMT used in the T100 reacts to a wide spectrum of light which includes much of
the visible spectrum and most of the UV spectrum. Even though the 214 nm light used
to excite the SO2 is focused away from the PMT, some of it scatters in the direction of
the PMT as it interacts with the sample gas. A second optical band pass filter placed
between the sample chamber (refer to Figure 12-2) and the PMT strips away light
outside of the fluorescence spectrum of decaying SO2* (refer to Figure 12-5) including
reflected UV form the source lamp and other stray light.
PMT OPTICAL FILTER
BANDWIDTH
103
(Arbitrary Untis)
LAMP OUTPUT
104
330.3
213.9
105
102
101
SO2* FLUORESCENT
SPECTRUM
1
0
100
200
300
400
500
WAVELENGTH (nm)
Figure 12-5: PMT Optical Filter Bandwidth
270
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
12.1.8. OPTICAL LENSES
Two optical lenses are used to focus and optimize the path of light through the sample
chamber.
Figure 12-6:
Effects of Focusing Source UV in Sample Chamber
A lens located between PMT and the sample chamber collects as much of the fluoresced
UV created there as possible and focuses it on the most sensitive part of the PMT’s
photo cathode.
Another lens located between the excitation UV source lamp and the sample chamber
collimates the light emitted by the lamp into a steady, circular beam and focuses that
beam directly onto the reference detector. This allows the reference detector to
accurately measure the effective intensity of the excitation UV by eliminating the effect
of flickering inherent in the plasma arc that generates the light.
Ensure that all of the light emitted by the source lamp, passes though the 214 nm filter
and not absorbed by the SO2 reaches the reference detector. Conversely, this also makes
sure that the volume of sample gas affected by the excitation beam is similar to the
volume of fluorescing SO2* being measured by the PMT, eliminating a possible source
of measurement offset.
06807F DCN7335
271
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
12.1.9. MEASUREMENT INTERFERENCES
It should be noted that the fluorescence method for detecting SO2 is subject to
interference from a number of sources. The T100 has been successfully tested for its
ability to reject interference from most of these sources.
12.1.9.1. DIRECT INTERFERENCE
The most common source of interference is from other gases that fluoresce in a similar
fashion to SO2 when exposed to UV Light. The most significant of these is a class of
hydrocarbons called poly-nuclear aromatics (PNA) of which xylene and naphthalene are
two prominent examples. Nitrogen oxide fluoresces in a spectral range near to SO2. For
critical applications where high levels of NO are expected an optional optical filter is
available that improves the rejection of NO (contact Technical Support for more
information).
•
The T100 Analyzer has several methods for rejecting interference from these gases:
•
A special scrubber (kicker) mechanism removes any PNA chemicals present in the
sample gas before it the reach the sample chamber.
•
The exact wavelength of light needed to excite a specific non-SO2 fluorescing gas is
removed by the source UV optical filter.
•
The light given off by Nitrogen Oxide and many of the other fluorescing gases is
outside of the bandwidth passed by the PMT optical filter.
12.1.9.2. UV ABSORPTION BY OZONE
Because ozone absorbs UV Light over a relatively broad spectrum it could cause a
measurement offset by absorbing some of the UV given off by the decaying SO2* in the
sample chamber. The T100 prevents this from occurring by having a very short light
path between the area where the SO2* fluorescence occurs and the PMT detector.
Because the light path is so short, the amount of O3 needed to cause a noticeable effect
would be much higher than could be reasonably expected in any application for which
this instrument is intended.
12.1.9.3. DILUTION
Certain gases with higher viscosities can lower the flow rate though the critical flow
orifice that controls the movement of sample gas though the analyzer reducing the
amount of sample gas in the sample chamber and thus the amount of SO2 available to
react with the to the UV light. While this can be a significant problem for some
analyzers, the design of the T100 is very tolerant of variations in sample gas flow rate
and therefore does not suffer from this type of interference.
12.1.9.4. THIRD BODY QUENCHING
While the decay of SO2* to SO2 happens quickly, it is not instantaneous. Because it is
not instantaneous it is possible for the extra energy possessed by the excited electron of
the SO2* molecule to be given off as kinetic energy during a collision with another
molecule. This in effect heats the other molecule slightly and allows the excited electron
to move into a lower energy orbit without emitting a photon.
The most significant interferents in this regard are nitrogen oxide (NO), carbon dioxide
(CO2), water vapor (H2O) and molecular oxygen (O2). In ambient applications the
quenching effect of these gases is negligible. For stack applications where the
272
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
concentrations of some or all of these may be very high, specific steps MUST be taken
to remove them from the sample gas before it enters the analyzer.
12.1.9.5. LIGHT POLLUTION
Because T100 measures light as a means of calculating the amount of SO2 present,
obviously stray light can be a significant interfering factor. The T100 removes this
interference source in several ways.
•
The sample chamber is designed to be completely light tight to light from sources
other than the excitation UV source lamp.
•
All pneumatic tubing leading into the sample chamber is completely opaque in order
to prevent light from being piped into the chamber by the tubing walls.
•
The optical filters discussed in Section 12.1.7; remove UV with wavelengths
extraneous to the excitation and decay of SO2/SO2*.
•
Most importantly, during instrument calibration the difference between the value of
the most recently recorded PMT offset (refer to Section 12.1.6) and the PMT output
while measuring zero gas (calibration gas devoid of SO2) is recorded as the test
function OFFSET. This OFFSET value is used during the calculation of the SO2
concentration.
Since this offset is assumed to be due to stray light present in the sample chamber is also
multiplied by the SLOPE and recorded as the function STR. LGT. Both OFFSET
& STR. LGT are viewable via the front panel (refer to Section 4.1.1).
12.2. OXYGEN (O2) SENSOR PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The O2 sensor applies paramagnetics to determine the concentration of oxygen in a
sample gas drawn through the instrument.
12.2.1. PARAMAGNETIC MEASUREMENT OF O2
The oxygen sensor used in the T100 utilizes the fact that oxygen is attracted into strong
magnetic field while most other gases are not, to obtain fast, accurate oxygen
measurements.
The sensor’s core is made up of two nitrogen filled glass spheres, which are mounted on
a rotating suspension within a magnetic field (refer to Figure 12-7). A mirror is
mounted centrally on the suspension and light is shone onto the mirror that reflects the
light onto a pair of photocells. The signal generated by the photocells is passed to a
feedback loop, which outputs a current to a wire winding (in effect, a small DC electric
motor) mounted on the suspended mirror.
Oxygen from the sample stream is attracted into the magnetic field displacing the
nitrogen filled spheres and causing the suspended mirror to rotate. Therefore, the
amount of light reflected onto the photocells and therefore the output levels of the
photocells. The feedback loop increases the amount of current fed into the winding in
order to move the mirror back into its original position. The more O2 present, the more
the mirror moves and the more current is fed into the winding by the feedback control
loop.
A sensor measures the amount of current generated by the feedback control loop which
is directly proportional to the concentration of oxygen within the sample gas mixture.
06807F DCN7335
273
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Figure 12-7:
Oxygen Sensor - Principles of Operation
12.2.2. O2 SENSOR OPERATION WITHIN THE T100 ANALYZER
The oxygen sensor option is transparently integrated into the core analyzer operation.
All functions can be viewed or accessed through the front panel display, just like the
functions for SO2.
•
The O2 concentration is displayed below the SO2 concentration.
•
Test functions for O2 slope and offset are viewable from the front panel along with
the other test functions of the analyzer.
•
O2 sensor calibration is performed via the front panel CAL function and is
performed in a nearly identical manner as the standard SO2 calibration. Refer to
Section 9.10.1 for more details.
•
Stability of the O2 sensor can be viewed via the front panel (refer to Section
9.10.1.3).
The O2 concentration range is 0-100% (user selectable) with 0.1% precision and
accuracy.
The temperature of the O2 sensor is maintained at a constant 50°C by means of a PID
loop and can be viewed on the front panel as test function O2 TEMP.
The O2 sensor assembly itself does not have any serviceable parts and is enclosed in an
insulated canister.
274
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
12.3. CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) SENSOR PRINCIPLES OF
OPERATION
The CO2 sensor probe measures the concentration of carbon dioxde in the sample gas; a
Logic PCA conditions the probe output and issues a 0-5 VDC signal to the analyzer’s
CPU, which computes the CO2 concentration by scaling the values of the CO2_SLOPE
and CO2_OFFSET recorded during calibration
The CO2 sensor assembly itself does not have any serviceable parts and is enclosed in an
insulated canister.
12.3.1. NDIR MEASUREMENT OF CO2
The optional CO2 sensor is a silicon based Non-Dispersive Infrared (NDIR) sensor. It
uses a single-beam, dual wavelength measurement method.
An infrared source at one end of the measurement chamber emits IR radiation into the
sensor’s measurement chamber where light at the 4.3 μm wavelength is partially
absorbed by any CO2 present. A special light filter called a Fabry-Perot Interferometer
(FPI) is electronically tuned so that only light at the absorption wavelength of CO2 is
allowed to pass and be detected by the sensor’s IR detector.
A reference measurement is made by electronically shifting the filter band pass
wavelength so that no IR at the CO2 absorption wavelength is let through.
IR
Detector
(NDIR)
IR Light
Source
Signal
Out
FPI
(Measure Phase)
Sample
In
Sample
Out
Signal
Out
FPI
(Reference Phase)
Figure 12-8: CO2 Sensor Principles of Operation
The sensor computes the ratio between the reference signal and the measurement signal
to determine the degree of light absorbed by CO2 present in the sensor chamber. This
dual wavelength method the CO2 measurement allows the instrument to compensate for
ancillary effects like sensor aging and contamination.
06807F DCN7335
275
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
12.3.2. CO2 OPERATION WITHIN THE T100 ANALYZER
The CO2 sensor option is transparently integrated into the core analyzer operation. All
functions can be viewed or accessed through the front panel display, just like the
functions for SO2.
•
The CO2 concentration is displayed below the SO2 concentration.
•
Test functions for CO2 slope and offset are viewable from the front panel along with
the other test functions of the analyzer.
•
CO2 sensor calibration is performed via the front panel CAL function and is
performed in a nearly identical manner as the standard SO2 calibration.
•
Stability of the CO2 sensor can be viewed via the front panel (refer to Section
9.10.2.3).
Refer to Section 3.4.4.3 for information on calibrating the CO2.
12.3.3. ELECTRONIC OPERATION OF THE CO2 SENSOR
The CO2 PCA, which is mounted to the rear side of the Relay Board Mounting Bracket,
controls the CO2 sensor. It converts the sensor’s digital output to an analog voltage that
is measured with the motherboard and draws 12 VDC from the analyzer via the relay
card from which converts to fit the power needs of the probe and its own onboard logic.
It outputs a 0-5 VDC analog signal to the analyzer’s CPU via the motherboard that
corresponds to the concentration of CO2 measured by the probe.
LED V8
Serial I/O
(Not Used)
J12
Pin 7
Purple wire
22 awg
Relay PCA
Power Supply
Connections
Orange wire
22 awg
GND +12 V
Pin 8
LED V9
To CO2
Probe
CPU
Analog
Output
OVDC 5VDC
Black wire
22 awg
Grey wire
22 awg
Pin 2
Pin 8
P110
Motherboard
Figure 12-9:
276
CO2 Sensor Option PCA Layout and Electronic Connections
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
12.4. PNEUMATIC OPERATION
IMPORTANT
IMPACT ON READINGS OR DATA
It is important that the sample airflow system is leak-tight and not
pressurized over ambient pressure. Regular leak checks should be
performed on the analyzer as described in the maintenance schedule,
Table 10-1. Procedures for correctly performing leak checks can be found
in Section 10.3.6.
IMPORTANT
Relative Pressure versus Absolute Pressure
In this manual vacuum readings are given in inches of mercury absolute
pressure (in-Hg-A), i.e. indicate an absolute pressure referenced against
zero (a perfect vacuum).
12.4.1. SAMPLE GAS FLOW
The Flow of gas through the T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer is created by a small
internal pump that pulls air though the instrument.
EXHAUST
gas outlet
Chassis
KICKER EXHAUST
TO PUMP
PUMP
HYDROCARBON
SCRUBBER
(KICKER)
SAMPLE
CHAMBER
SAMPLE
gas inlet
UV
LAMP
SAMPLE FILTER
PMT
CRITICAL
FLOW
ORIFICE
VACUUM MANIFOLD
EXHAUST TO OUTER
LAYER OF KICKER
FLOW
CONTROL
ASSY
FLOW
SENSOR
SAMPLE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
FLOW / PRESSURE
SENSOR PCA
Figure 12-10: Gas Flow and Location of Critical Flow Orifice
06807F DCN7335
277
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
12.4.2. FLOW RATE CONTROL
The T100 uses a special flow control assembly located in the exhaust vacuum manifold
(refer to Figure 12-10) to maintain a constant flow rate of the sample gas through the
instrument. This assembly consists of:
•
A critical flow orifice.
•
Two o-rings: Located just before and after the critical flow orifice, the o-rings seal
the gap between the walls of assembly housing and the critical flow orifice.
•
A spring: Applies mechanical force needed to form the seal between the o-rings, the
critical flow orifice and the assembly housing.
12.4.2.1. CRITICAL FLOW ORIFICE
The most important component of this flow control assembly is the critical flow orifice.
Critical flow orifices are a simple way to regulate stable gas flow rates. They operate
without moving parts by taking advantage of the laws of fluid dynamics. Restricting the
flow of gas though the orifice creates a pressure differential. This pressure differential
combined with the action of the analyzer’s pump draws the gas through the orifice.
As the pressure on the downstream side of the orifice (the pump side) continues to drop,
the speed that the gas flows though the orifice continues to rise. Once the ratio of
upstream pressure to downstream pressure is greater than 2:1, the velocity of the gas
through the orifice reaches the speed of sound. As long as that ratio stays at least 2:1 the
gas flow rate is unaffected by any fluctuations, surges, or changes in downstream
pressure because such variations only travel at the speed of sound themselves and are
therefore cancelled out by the sonic shockwave at the downstream exit of the critical
flow orifice.
Figure 12-11: Flow Control Assembly & Critical Flow Orifice
278
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
The actual flow rate of gas through the orifice (volume of gas per unit of time), depends
on the size and shape of the aperture in the orifice. The larger the hole, the more gas
molecules, moving at the speed of sound, pass through the orifice. Because the flow rate
of gas through the orifice is only related to the minimum 2:1 pressure differential and
not absolute pressure the flow rate of the gas is also unaffected by degradations in pump
efficiency due to age.
The critical flow orifice used in the T100 is designed to provide a flow rate of 650
cm3/min.
12.4.2.2. SAMPLE PARTICULATE FILTER
To remove particles in the sample gas, the analyzer is equipped with a Teflon membrane
filter of 47 mm diameter (also referred to as the sample filter) with a 1 µm or 5 µm pore
size. The filter is accessible through the front panel, which folds down, and should be
changed according to the suggested maintenance schedule listed in Table 10-1.
12.4.3. HYDROCARBON SCRUBBER (KICKER)
It is very important to ensure that the air supplied sample chamber is clear of
hydrocarbons. To accomplish this task the T100 uses a single tube permeation scrubber.
The scrubber consists of a single tube of a specialized plastic that absorbs hydrocarbons
very well. This tube is located within outer flexible plastic tube shell. As gas flows
through the inner tube, hydrocarbons are absorbed into the membrane walls and
transported through the membrane wall and into the hydrocarbon free, purge gas flowing
through the outer tube. This process is driven by the hydrocarbon concentration gradient
between the inner and outer of the tubes.
CLEAN
PURGE AIR
FROM
VACUUM MANIFOLD
OUTER TUBE
(Clean Air)
USED PURGE AIR
TO
PUMP
AND
EXHAUST PORT
CLEANED
SAMPLE AIR
TO
SAMPLE
CHAMBER
INNER
TUBE
(Ambient Air)
SAMPLE AIR
FROM
PARTICULATE FILTER
Figure 12-12: T100 Hydrocarbon Scrubber (Kicker)
In the T100 some of the cleaned air from the inner tube is returned to be used as the
purge gas in the outer tube (refer to Figure 12-12). This means that when the analyzer is
first started, the concentration gradient between the inner and outer tubes is not very
large and the scrubber’s efficiency is relatively low. When the instrument is turned on
after having been off for more than 30 minutes, it takes a certain amount of time for the
gradient to become large enough for the scrubber to adequately remove hydrocarbons
from the sample air.
06807F DCN7335
279
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
12.4.4. PNEUMATIC SENSORS
The T100 uses two pneumatic sensors to verify gas streams. These sensors are located
on a printed circuit assembly, called the pneumatic pressure/flow sensor board. The flow
simultaneously enters the sample pressure sensor and the flow sensor from the outlet of
the reaction cell.
12.4.4.1. SAMPLE PRESSURE SENSOR
An absolute pressure transducer plumbed to the input of the analyzer’s sample chamber
is used to measure the pressure of the sample gas before it enters the chamber. This
upstream measurement is used to validate the critical flow condition (2:1 pressure ratio)
through the instrument’s critical flow orifice (refer to Section 12.4.2). Also, if the
Temperature/Pressure Compensation (TPC) feature is turned on (refer to Section
12.7.3), the output of this sensor is also used to supply pressure data for that calculation.
The actual pressure measurement is viewable through the analyzer’s front panel display
as the test function PRESS.
12.4.4.2. SAMPLE FLOW SENSOR
A thermal-mass flow sensor is used to measure the sample flow through the analyzer.
This sensor is also mounted on the pneumatic pressure/flow sensor board upstream of
the sample chamber. The flow rate is monitored by the CRT which issues a warning
message (SAMP FLOW WARN) if the flow rate is too high or too low.
The flow rate of the sample gas is viewable via the front panel as the SAMP FL test
function.
280
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
12.5. ELECTRONIC OPERATION
RS232
Male
COM2
Female
USB COM
port
Ethernet
Control Inputs:
1–6
A3
USB)
Analog In
Touchscreen
or
COM1
(RS–232 ONLY)
Optional
4-20 mA
A2
COM 2
(RS–232 or RS–485)
Analog Outputs
A1
Display
Status Outputs:
1–8
A4
LVDS
(I2C Bus)
MOTHERBOARD
Analog
Outputs
(D/A)
I2C
IiiBus
External
Digital I/O)
PC 104
CPU Card
A/D
Converter
(V/F)
Power-Up
Circuit
Box
Temp
Disk On
Module
CPU
STATUS
LED
Flash Chip
PC 104
Bus
PMT
Temperature
Sensor
PMT
PMT OUTPUT (PMT DET)
Analog
Sensor
Inputs
PMT TEMPERATURE
OPTIC TEST CONTROL
IZS PERM-TUBE
TEMPERATURE
ELECTRIC TEST CONTROL
SAMPLE
CHAMBER
TEMPERATURE
Internal
Digital I/O
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL
Thermistor
Interface
I 2C
PUMP
Bus
Pneumatic
Sensor
Board
I2C Status
LED
RELAY
BOARD
Sample
Pressure
Sensor
Sample Flow
Sensor
UV Reference
Detector
Reaction Cell
Heater
IZS Option
Permeation
Tube Heater
PMT
PREAMP PCA
USB
transmitter board
TEC Drive
PCA
PMT TEC
Shutter
control
Sample Cal
Valve
Option
IZS Valve
Option
Figure 12-13: T100 Electronic Block Diagram
The core of the analyzer is a microcomputer that controls various internal processes,
interprets data, makes calculations, and reports results using specialized firmware
developed by Teledyne API. It communicates with the user as well as receives data from
and issues commands to a variety of peripheral devices through a separate printed circuit
assembly to which the CPU is mounted: the motherboard.
06807F DCN7335
281
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
The motherboard is directly mounted to the rear panel and collects data, performs signal
conditioning duties and routes incoming and outgoing signals between the CPU and the
analyzer’s other major components.
Concentration data of the T100 are generated by the Photo Multiplier Tube (PMT),
which produces an analog current signal corresponding to the brightness of the
fluorescence reaction in the sample chamber. This current signal is amplified to a DC
voltage signal (front panel test parameter PMT) by a PMT preamplifier printed circuit
assembly (located on top of the sensor housing). PMT is converted to digital data by a
bi-polar, analog-to-digital converter, located on the motherboard.
In addition to the PMT signal, a variety of sensors report the physical and operational
status of the analyzer’s major components, again through the signal processing
capabilities of the motherboard. These status reports are used as data for the SO2
concentration calculation (e.g. pressure and temperature reading used by the
temperature/pressure compensation feature) and as trigger events for certain warning
messages and control commands issued by the CPU. They are stored in the CPU’s
memory and, in most cases, can be viewed through the front panel display.
The CPU communicates with the user and the outside world in a variety of ways:
•
Through the analyzer’s front panel LCD touch-screen interface
•
RS-232 and RS-485 serial I/O channels
•
Various analog voltage and current outputs
•
Several digital I/O channels
•
Ethernet
Finally, the CPU issues commands (also over the I2C bus) to a series of relays and
switches located on a separate printed circuit assembly, the relay board (located in the
rear of the chassis on its own mounting bracket) to control the function of key
electromechanical devices such as valves and heaters.
282
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
12.5.1. CPU
The unit’s CPU card, installed on the motherboard located inside the rear panel, is a low
power (5 VDC, 720mA max), high performance, Vortex 86SX-based microcomputer
running Windows CE. Its operation and assembly conform to the PC 104 specification.
Figure 12-14: CPU Board Annotated
The CPU includes two types of non-volatile data storage: a Disk on Module (DOM) and
an embedded flash chip.
12.5.1.1. DISK ON MODULE (DOM)
The DOM is a 44-pin IDE flash chip with storage capacity to 256 MB. It is used to store
the computer’s operating system, the Teledyne API firmware, and most of the
operational data generated by the analyzer’s internal data acquisition system (DAS).
Embedded in the DOM is a flash chip.
12.5.1.2. FLASH CHIP
This non-volatile, embedded flash chip includes 2MB of storage for calibration data as
well as a backup of the analyzer configuration. Storing these key data onto a less heavily
accessed chip significantly decreases the chance of data corruption.
In the unlikely event that the flash chip should fail, the analyzer will continue to operate
with just the DOM. However, all configuration information will be lost, requiring that
the unit be recalibrated.
06807F DCN7335
283
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
12.5.2. SENSOR MODULE
Electronically, the T100 sensor module is a group of components that: create the UV
light that initiates the fluorescence reaction between SO2 and O3; sense the intensity of
that fluorescence; generate various electronic signals needed by the analyzer to
determine the SO2 concentration of the sample gas (refer to Section 12.1.1), and sense
and control key environmental conditions such as the temperature of the sample gas and
the PMT.
Figure 12-15:
T100 Sensor Module
These components are divided into two significant subassemblies: the sample chamber
and the PMT assembly.
Figure 12-16 shows an exploded view of the sample chamber assembly
Figure 12-17 shows an exploded view of the PMT Assembly
284
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
12.5.2.1. SAMPLE CHAMBER
The main electronic components of the sample chamber are the reference detector (refer
to Section 12.1.4); the UV Lamp (refer to Section 12.1.3) and its electronically operated
shutter (refer to Section 12.1.6); and the sample chamber heating circuit.
Figure 12-16: T100 Sample Chamber
12.5.2.2. SAMPLE CHAMBER HEATING CIRCUIT
In order to reduce temperature effects, the sample chamber is maintained at a constant
50°C, just above the high end of the instrument’s operation temperature range. Two AC
heaters, one embedded into the top of the sample chamber, the other embedded directly
below the reference detector’s light trap, provide the heat source. These heaters operate
off of the instrument’s main AC power and are controlled by the CPU through a power
relay on the relay board. A thermistor, also embedded in the bottom of the sample
chamber, reports the cell’s temperature to the CPU through the thermistor interface
circuitry of the motherboard.
06807F DCN7335
285
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
12.5.3. PHOTO MULTIPLIER TUBE (PMT)
The T100 uses a photo multiplier tube (PMT) to detect the amount of fluorescence
created by the SO2 and O3 reaction in the sample chamber.
Figure 12-17: PMT Housing Assembly
A typical PMT is a vacuum tube containing a variety of specially designed electrodes.
Photons from the reaction are filtered by an optical high-pass filter, enter the PMT and
strike a negatively charged photo cathode causing it to emit electrons. A high voltage
potential across these focusing electrodes directs the electrons toward an array of high
voltage dynodes. The dynodes in this electron multiplier array are designed so that each
stage multiplies the number of emitted electrons by emitting multiple, new electrons.
The greatly increased number of electrons emitted from one end of electron multiplier is
collected by a positively charged anode at the other end, which creates a useable current
signal. This current signal is amplified by the preamplifier board and then reported to the
motherboard.
286
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
Figure 12-18: Basic PMT Design
A significant performance characteristic of the PMT is the voltage potential across the
electron multiplier. The higher the voltage, the greater is the number of electrons emitted
from each dynode of the electron multiplier, making the PMT more sensitive and
responsive to small variations in light intensity but also more noisy (dark noise). The
gain voltage of the PMT used in the T100 is usually set between 450 V and 800 V. This
parameter is viewable through the front panel as test function HVPS (refer to Section
4.1.1). For information on when and how to set this voltage, refer to Section 11.7.2.8.
The PMT is housed inside the PMT module assembly (refer to Figure 12-15 and Figure
12-17). This assembly also includes the high voltage power supply required to drive the
PMT, an LED used by the instrument’s optical test function, a thermistor that measures
the temperature of the PMT and various components of the PMT cooling system
including the Thermo-Electric Cooler (TEC).
06807F DCN7335
287
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
12.5.4. PMT COOLING SYSTEM
The performance of the analyzer’s PMT is significantly affected by temperature.
Variations in PMT temperature are directly reflected in the signal output of the PMT.
Also the signal to noise ratio of the PMT output is radically influenced by temperature
as well. The warmer The PMT is, the noisier its signal becomes until the noise renders
the concentration signal useless. To alleviate this problem a special cooling system
exists that maintains the PMT temperature at a stable, low level.
Preamp PCA sends
buffered and
amplified thermistor
signal to TEC PCA
TEC PCA sets
appropriate
drive voltage
for cooler
TEC
Control
PCA
PMT Preamp
PCA
Heat Sink
ThermoElectric Cooler (TEC)
Thermistor
outputs temp of
cold block to
preamp PCA
PMT
Cold Block
Heat form PMT is absorbed
by the cold block and
transferred to the heat sink
via the TEC then bled off
into the cool air stream.
Cooling Fan
Figure 12-19: PMT Cooling System
12.5.4.1. THERMOELECTRIC COOLER (TEC)
The core of the T100 PMT cooling system is a solid state heat pump called a
thermoelectric cooler (TEC). Thermoelectric coolers transfer heat from a one side of a
special set of semiconductor junctions to the other when a DC current is applied. The
heat is pumped at a rate proportional to the amount of current applied. In the T100 the
TEC is physically attached to a cold block that absorbs heat directly from the PMT and a
heat sink that is cooled by moving air (refer to Figure 12-19). A Thermocouple
embedded into the cold block generates an analog voltage corresponding to the current
temperature of the PMT. The PMT Preamp PCA conditions and amplifies this signal
then passes it on to the TEC Control PCA.
288
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
12.5.4.2. TEC CONTROL BOARD
The TEC control printed circuit assembly is located ion the sensor housing assembly,
under the slanted shroud, next to the cooling fins and directly above the cooling fan.
Using the amplified PMT temperature signal from the PMT preamplifier board (refer to
Section 12.5.5), it sets the drive voltage for the thermoelectric cooler. The warmer the
PMT gets, the more current is passed through the TEC causing it to pump more heat to
the heat sink.
A red LED located on the top edge of this circuit board indicates that the control circuit
is receiving power. Four test points are also located at the top of this assembly. For the
definitions and acceptable signal levels of these test points refer to Section 11.1.2.
12.5.5. PMT PREAMPLIFIER
The PMT preamplifier board amplifies the PMT signal into a useable analog voltage that
can be processed by the motherboard into a digital signal to be used by the CPU to
calculate the SO2 concentration of the gas in the sample chamber.
The output signal of the PMT is controlled by two different adjustments. First, the
voltage across the electron multiplier array of the PMT is adjusted with a set of two
hexadecimal switches. Adjusting this voltage directly affects the HVPS voltage and,
hence, the signal from the PMT. Secondly, the gain of the amplified signal can further
be adjusted through a potentiometer. These adjustments should only be performed when
encountering problems with the software calibration that cannot be rectified otherwise.
Refer to Section 11.7.2.8 for this hardware calibration.
06807F DCN7335
289
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
O Test Control
From CPU
PMT Fine
Gain Set
PMT
Coarse
Gain Set
(Rotary
Switch)
(Rotary
O Test
LED
To
Motherboard
PMT Preamp PCA
O-Test
Generator
PMT HVPS
Drive Voltage
D-A
Converter
PMT Output
Amp to
Voltage
Converter/
Amplifier
MUX
E Test Control
From CPU
PMT Temp Analog Signal
E-Test
Generator
COOLER (Closed Loop)
TEC Control
PCA
PMT
Signal
Offset
to Motherboard
PMT Temp
Sensor
Low Pass
Noise
Filter
PMT
Temperature
Feedback
Circuit
PMT Output Signal
(PMT) to Motherboard
Figure 12-20: PMT Preamp Block Diagram
The PMT temperature control loop maintains the PMT temperature around 7° C and can
be viewed as test function PMT TEMP on the front panel (refer to Section 4.1.1).
The electrical test (ETEST) circuit generates a constant, electronic signal intended to
simulate the output of the PMT (after conversion from current to voltage). By bypassing
the detector’s actual signal, it is possible to test most of the signal handling and
conditioning circuitry on the PMT preamplifier board. Refer to Section 5.9.5 for
instructions on performing this test.
The optical test (OTEST) feature causes an LED inside the PMT cold block to create a
light signal that can be measured with the PMT. If zero air is supplied to the analyzer,
290
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
the entire measurement capability of the sensor module can be tested including the PMT
and the current to voltage conversion circuit on the PMT preamplifier board. Refer to
Section 5.9.4 for instructions on performing this test.
12.5.6. PNEUMATIC SENSOR BOARD
The flow and pressure sensors of the T100 are located on a printed circuit assembly just
behind the PMT sensor. Refer to Section 11.6.15 on how to test this assembly. The
signals of this board are supplied to the motherboard for further signal processing. All
sensors are linearized in the firmware and can be span calibrated from the front panel.
Refer to Section 5.4.3.2 for instructions on performing this test.
12.5.7. RELAY BOARD
The relay board is the central switching unit of the analyzer. It contains power relays,
status LEDs for all heated zones and valves, as well as valve drivers, thermocouple
amplifiers, power distribution connectors and the two switching power supplies of the
analyzer. The relay board communicates with the motherboard over the I2C bus and is
the main board for trouble-shooting power problems of any kind.
12.5.7.1. HEATER CONTROL
The T100 uses a variety of heaters for its individual components. All heaters are AC
powered and can be configured for 100/120 VAC or 220/230VAC at 50-60 Hz.
The two sample chamber heaters are electronically connected in parallel for analyzers at
100/120 VAC line power and in series for units configured for 220/230 VAC. One
configuration plug on the relay board determines the power configuration for the entire
analyzer.
On units with IZS options installed, an additional set of AC heaters is attached to the
IZS permeation tube. Some special T100 models may have other, non-standard heating
zones installed, such as a dilution manifold.
12.5.7.2. VALVE CONTROL
The relay board also hosts two valve driver chips, each of which can drive up four
valves. In its basic configuration the T100 requires no valve control to operate.
However, on units with either the zero/span valve or the IZS option installed, the valve
control is used. Manifold valves, which may also be present in certain special versions
of the analyzer, would also use valve control.
06807F DCN7335
291
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
12.5.7.3. STATUS LEDS & WATCH DOG CIRCUITRY
IZS Option
Permeation Tube Heater
Dark Shutter
Zero/Span and IZS Options
Zero/Span Valve
Zero/Span and IZS Options
Sample/CAL Valve
Sample Chamber Heater
I2C Watchdog LED
Figure 12-21: Relay Board Status LED Locations
Thirteen LEDs are located on the analyzer’s relay board to indicate the status of the
analyzer’s heating zones and valves as well as a general operating watchdog indicator.
Table 12-1 shows the state of these LEDs and their respective functionality.
Table 12-1:
Relay Board Status LED’s
LED
COLOR
FUNCTION
STATUS WHEN LIT
STATUS WHEN UNLIT
D1
RED
Watchdog circuit
D2
YELLOW
Sample chamber
(RCELL) heater
HEATING
NOT HEATING
D3, D4
YELLOW
Unused
N/A
N/A
D5
YELLOW
IZS heater (option)
HEATING
NOT HEATING
D6
YELLOW
Unused
N/A
N/A
Cycles On/Off every 3 seconds under control of the CPU.
D7
GREEN
Zero / Span Valve
Valve open to Span Gas path
Valve open to Zero Gas
(normal state)
D8
GREEN
Sample / Cal Valve
Valve open to
calibration gas path
Valve open to sample gas
inlet on rear panel
(normal state)
D9, D10
GREEN
Unused
N/A
N/A
D11
GREEN
UV Lamp Shutter
Shutter open
Shutter closed
D12-14
GREEN
Unused
N/A
N/A
292
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
As a safety measure, special circuitry on the relay board watches the status of LED D1.
Should this LED ever stay ON or OFF for 30 seconds, indicating that the CPU or I2C
bus has stopped functioning, the Watchdog Circuit will automatically shut of all valves
as well as turn off the UV Source(s) and all heaters. The Sample pump will still be
running.
12.5.8. MOTHERBOARD
This printed circuit assembly provides a multitude of functions including A/D
conversion, digital input/output, PC-104 to I2C translation, temperature sensor signal
processing and is a pass through for the RS-232 and RS-485 signals.
12.5.8.1. A TO D CONVERSION
Analog signals, such as the voltages received from the analyzer’s various sensors, are
converted into digital signals that the CPU can understand and manipulate by the Analog
to Digital converter (A/D).Under the control of the CPU, this functional block selects a
particular signal input and then coverts the selected voltage into a digital word.
The A/D consists of a Voltage-to-Frequency (V-F) converter, a Programmable Logic
Device (PLD), three multiplexers, several amplifiers and some other associated devices.
The V-F converter produces a frequency proportional to its input voltage. The PLD
counts the output of the V-F during a specified time period, and sends the result of that
count, in the form of a binary number, to the CPU.
The A/D can be configured for several different input modes and ranges but it is used in
uni-polar mode with a +5V full scale. The converter includes a 1% over and underrange. This allows signals from -0.05V to +5.05V to be fully converted.
For calibration purposes, two reference voltages are supplied to the A/D converter:
Reference ground and +4.096 VDC. During calibration, the device measures these two
voltages, outputs their digital equivalent to the CPU. The CPU uses these values to
compute the converter’s offset and slope and uses these factors for subsequent
conversions. Refer to Section 5.9.3.6 for instructions on performing this calibration.
12.5.8.2. SENSOR INPUTS
The key analog sensor signals are coupled to the A/D through the master multiplexer
from two connectors on the motherboard. 100K terminating resistors on each of the
inputs prevent cross talk from appearing on the sensor signals.
PMT DETECTOR OUTPUT: This signal, output by the PMT preamp PCA, is used in
the computation of the SO2, CO2 and O2 concentrations displayed in the front panel
display screen and output through the instrument’s analog outputs and COMM ports.
PMT HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY LEVEL: This input is based on the drive
voltage output by the PMT pram board to the PMT’s high voltage power supply
(HVPS). It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the voltage
setting of the HVPS and stored in the instruments memory as the test function HVPS.
HVPS is viewable as a test function (refer to Section 4.1.1) through the analyzer’s front
panel.
PMT TEMPERATURE: This signal is the output of the thermistor attached to the
PMT cold block amplified by the PMT temperature feedback circuit on the PMT preamp
board. It is digitized and sent to the CPU where it is used to calculate the current
temperature of the PMT.
06807F DCN7335
293
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
This measurement is stored in the analyzer. Memory as the test function PMT TEMP
and is viewable as a test function (refer to Section 4.1.1) through the analyzer’s front
panel.
SAMPLE GAS PRESSURE SENSOR: This sensor measures the gas pressure at the
exit of the sample chamber.
SAMPLE FLOW SENSOR: This sensor measure the flow rate of the sample gas as it
exits the sample chamber.
12.5.8.3. THERMISTOR INTERFACE
This circuit provides excitation, termination and signal selection for several negativecoefficient, thermistor temperature sensors located inside the analyzer. They are as
follows:
SAMPLE CHAMBER TEMPERATURE SENSOR: The source of this signal is a
thermistor imbedded in the of the sample chamber block. It measures the temperature of
the sample gas in the chamber. The data are used by the CPU to control sample chamber
the heating circuit and as part of the SO2, calculations when the instrument’s
Temperature/Pressure Compensation feature is enabled.
This measurement is stored in the analyzer. Memory as the Test Function RCEL TEMP
and is viewable as a test function (refer to Section 4.1.1) in the analyzer’s front panel
display.
IZS OPTION PERMEATION TUBE TEMPERATURE SENSOR: This thermistor,
attached to the permeation tube in the IZS option, reports the current temperature of that
tube to the CPU as part of control loop that keeps the tube at a constant temperature.
BOX TEMPERATURE SENSOR: A thermistor is attached to the motherboard. It
measures the analyzer’s internal temperature. This information is stored by the CPU and
can be viewed by the user for troubleshooting purposes through the front panel display.
This measurement is stored in the analyzer‘s memory as the test function BOX TEMP
and is viewable as a test function (refer to Section 4.1.1) in the analyzer’s front panel
display.
12.5.9. ANALOG OUTPUTS
The analyzer comes equipped with four Analog Outputs: A1, A2, A3 and a fourth that is
a spare.
A1 and A2 Outputs: The first two, A1 and A2 are normally set up to operate in parallel
so that the same data can be sent to two different recording devices. While the names
imply that one should be used for sending data to a chart recorder and the other for
interfacing with a data logger, either can be used for both applications.
Both of these channels output a signal that is proportional to the SO2 concentration of
the sample gas. The A1 and A2 outputs can be slaved together or set up to operated
independently. A variety of scaling factors are available; refer to Section 5.4 for
information on setting the range type and Section 5.9.3 for adjusting the electronic
scaling factors of these output channels
Test Output: The third analog output, labeled A3 is special. It can be set by the user
(refer to Section 5.9.9) to carry the signal level of any one of the parameters accessible
through the TEST menu of the unit’s software.
294
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
In its standard configuration, the analyzer comes with all four of these channels set up to
output a DC voltage. However, 4-20mA current loop drivers can be purchased for the
first two of these outputs (A1 and A2). Refer to Sections 1.4 (Option 41), 3.3.1.3 and
5.9.3.5.
Output Loop-back: All three of the functioning analog outputs are connected back to
the A/D converter through a Loop-back circuit. This permits the voltage outputs to be
calibrated by the CPU without need for any additional tools or fixtures (refer to Section
5.9.3.2).
12.5.10. EXTERNAL DIGITAL I/O
This External Digital I/O performs two functions.
STATUS OUTPUTS: Logic-Level voltages are output through an optically isolated 8pin connector located on the rear panel of the analyzer. These outputs convey good/bad
and on/off information about certain analyzer conditions. They can be used to interface
with certain types of programmable devices (refer to Section 8.1.1).
CONTROL INPUTS: By applying +5VDC power supplied from an external source
such as a PLC or Data logger (refer to Section 8.1.2), Zero and Span calibrations can be
initiated by contact closures on the rear panel.
12.5.11. I2C DATA BUS
I2C is a two-wire, clocked, bi-directional, digital serial I/O bus that is used widely in
commercial and consumer electronic systems. A transceiver on the Motherboard
converts data and control signals from the PC-104 bus to I2C. The data is then fed to the
relay board and optional analog input circuitry.
12.5.12. POWER UP CIRCUIT
This circuit monitors the +5V power supply during start-up and sets the Analog outputs,
External Digital I/O ports, and I2C circuitry to specific values until the CPU boots and
the instrument software can establish control.
12.5.13. POWER SUPPLY/ CIRCUIT BREAKER
The analyzer operates on 100 VAC, 115 VAC or 230 VAC power at either 50Hz or
60Hz. Individual units are set up at the factory to accept any combination of these five
attributes. As illustrated in Figure 12-22 below, power enters the analyzer through a
standard IEC 320 power receptacle located on the rear panel of the instrument. From
there it is routed through the ON/OFF switch located in the lower right corner of the
front panel.
AC line power is stepped down and converted to DC power by two DC power supplies.
One supplies +12 VDC, for various valves and valve options, while a second supply
provides +5 VDC and ±15 VDC for logic and analog circuitry as well as the TEC
cooler. All AC and DC Voltages are distributed through the relay board.
A 6.75 ampere circuit breaker is built into the ON/OFF switch. In case of a wiring fault
or incorrect supply power, the circuit breaker will automatically turn off the analyzer.
06807F DCN7335
295
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
WARNING
Should the power circuit breaker trip, correct the condition causing this
situation before turning the analyzer back on.
USB
Touchscreen
Display
Chassis
Cooling
Fan
PMT
Cooling
Fan
TEC
Control
PCA
ON/OFF
SWITCH
AC POWER
ENTRANCE
PMT
Preamp
LVDS transmitter board
CPU
Mother
Board
PS 1 (+5 VDC; ±15 VDC)
RELAY
BOARD
Temperature
Sensors
In-Line AC
Configuration
Connector
PS 2 (+12 VDC)
PMT High
Voltage Supply
PUMP
Pressure
Sensor
Gas Flow
Sensor
KEY
Sample/Cal
for Z/S and
IZS Valve
Options
UV Source
Lamp
Shutter
UV Source
Lamp
Power
Supply
IZS Option
Permeation
Tube
Heater
Sample
Chamber
Heaters
AC POWER
DC POWER
Figure 12-22: Power Distribution Block Diagram
296
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
12.6. FRONT PANEL/DISPLAY INTERFACE
Users can input data and receive information directly through the front panel touchscreen display. The LCD display is controlled directly by the CPU board. The
touchscreen is interfaced to the CPU by means of a touchscreen controller that connects
to the CPU via the internal USB bus and emulates a computer mouse.
LCD Display
and
Touchscreen
3.3V
LVDS
Transmitter
Board
CPU
LVDS
Receiver
Back-Light
Supply
+5V
TFT BIAS
Supply
10.4, -7.0, 16, 4V
PWM
Touch Screen Controller
18 Bit TTL Data
Remote
Local
LAN
COM4
USB4
Lang.
USB & 5V
Utility
BL Cont.
Controller
USB Master
USB2 HUB
Ethernet
Front Panel Interface PCA
Powered
Powered
USB-1
USB-2
Ethernet Port
USB
USB Slave
Type B Port
Analog Input
Terminal Block
Aux I/O PCA
Figure 12-23: Front Panel and Display Interface Block Diagram
12.6.1. LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD
The LVDS (low voltage differential signaling) transmitter board converts the parallel
display bus to a serialized, low voltage, differential signal bus in order to transmit the
video signal to the LCD interface PCA.
12.6.2. FRONT PANEL INTERFACE PCA
The front panel interface PCA controls the various functions of the display and
touchscreen. For driving the display it provides connection between the CPU video
controller and the LCD display module. This PCA also contains:
06807F DCN7335
•
power supply circuitry for the LCD display module
•
a USB hub that is used for communications with the touchscreen controller and the
two front panel USB device ports
•
the circuitry for powering the display backlight
297
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
12.7. SOFTWARE OPERATION
The instrument’s core module is a high performance, X86-based microcomputer running
Windows CE. Inside Windows CE, special software developed by Teledyne API
interprets user commands from the various interfaces, performs procedures and tasks,
stores data in the CPU’s various memory devices and calculates the concentration of the
gas being sampled.
Windows CE
API FIRMWARE
Memory Handling
• DAS Records
• Calibration Data
• System Status Data
Instrument Operations
• Calibration Procedures
• Configuration Procedures
• Autonomic Systems
• Diagnostic Routines
PC/104 BUS
INSTRUMENT
HARDWARE
Interface Handling
Measurement
Algorithms
• Sensor input data
•
•
•
•
Display Messages
Touchscreen
Analog output data
RS232 & RS485
External Digital I/O
PC/104 BUS
Figure 12-24: Basic Software Operation
12.7.1. ADAPTIVE FILTER
The T100 SO2 analyzer software processes sample gas measurement and reference data
through an adaptive filter built into the software. Unlike other analyzers that average the
sensor output signal over a fixed time period, the T100 calculates averages over a set
number of samples where each sample is 1 second. During operation, the software
automatically switches between two filters of different lengths based on the conditions at
hand.
During conditions of constant or nearly constant concentration the software computes an
average of the last 240 samples or 240 seconds. This provides the calculation portion of
the software with smooth, stable readings. If a rapid change in concentration is detected,
the adaptive filter switches modes and only averages the last 20 samples or 20 seconds.
This allows the analyzer to respond to the rapidly changing concentration more quickly.
Once triggered, the short filter remains engaged for a fixed time period to prevent
chattering.
Two conditions must be simultaneously met to switch to the short filter. First, the
instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long filter by a fixed
298
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Principles of Operation
amount. Second, the instantaneous concentration must exceed the average in the long
filter by a portion, or percentage, of the average in the long filter.
If necessary, the filter lengths of these two modes may be changed to any value between
1 and 1000 samples. Long sample lengths provide better signal-to-noise rejection, but
poor response times. Conversely, shorter filter lengths result in poor signal-to-noise
rejection, but quicker response times.
12.7.2. CALIBRATION - SLOPE AND OFFSET
Calibration of the analyzer is performed exclusively in software. During instrument
calibration (refer to Section 90) the user enters expected values for zero and span
through the front panel touch-screen control buttons and commands the instrument to
make readings of sample gases with known concentrations of SO2. The readings taken
are adjusted, linearized, and compared to the expected values as input. With this
information the software computes values for both slope and offset and stores these
values in memory for use in calculating the SO2 concentration of the sample gas.
Instrument slope and offset values recorded during the last calibration can be viewed by
pressing the following control buttons sequence:
SAMPLE
RANGE = 500.000 PPB
< TST TST > CAL
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
SAMPLE
RCELL TEMP=0.0C
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
TIME = HH:MM:SS
SETUP
SO2 =XXX.X
< TST TST > CAL
SETUP
SAMPLE
HVPS 553 VOLTS
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
PMT TEMP=0.0C
< TST TST > CAL
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
BOX TEMP=0.0C
< TST TST > CAL
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
SAMPLE
OFFSET=XX.X MV
< TST TST > CAL
SAMPLE
SO2 =XXX.X
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
SAMPLE
< TST TST > CAL
SLOPE=XXX
SO2 =XXX.X
SETUP
Figure 12-25: Calibration Slope and Offset
12.7.3. TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE COMPENSATION (TPC) FEATURE
As explained in the principles of operation, changes in temperature can significantly
affect the amount of fluoresced UV light generated in the instrument’s sample chamber.
To negate this effect the T100 maintains the sample gas at a stable, raised temperature.
Pressure changes can also have a noticeable, if more subtle, effect on the SO2
concentration calculation. To account for this, the T100 software includes a feature that
allows the instrument to compensate changes in ambient pressure during the SO2
calculations.
06807F DCN7335
299
Principles of Operation
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
When the TPC feature is enabled, the analyzer’s SO2 concentration is divided by a factor
call PRESSCO, which is based on the difference between the ambient pressure of the
sample gas normalized to standard atmospheric pressure (Equation 12-6). As ambient
pressure increases, the compensated SO2 concentration is decreased.
PRESSCO =
SAMPLE_PRESSURE (" HG - A) × SAMP_PRESS_SLOPE
29.92 (" HG - A)
(Equation 12-6)
SAMPLE-PRESSURE: The ambient pressure of the sample gas as measured by the
instrument’s sample pressure sensor in “Hg-A.
SAMP_PRESS_SLOPE: Sample pressure slope correction factor.
The SETUP>VARS menu enables/disables the TPC feature (see Section 5.8, Table 5-2).
12.7.4. INTERNAL DATA ACQUISITION SYSTEM (DAS)
The DAS is designed to implement predictive diagnostics that store trending data for
users to anticipate when an instrument will require service. Large amounts of data can
be stored in non-volatile memory and retrieved in plain text format for further
processing with common data analysis programs. The DAS has a consistent user
interface in all Teledyne API instruments. New data parameters and triggering events
can be added to the instrument as needed.
Depending on the sampling frequency and the number of data parameters the DAS can
store several months of data, which are retained even when the instrument is powered
off or a new firmware is installed. The DAS permits users to access the data through the
instrument’s front panel or the remote interface. The latter can automatically download
stored data for further processing. For information on using the DAS, refer to Section 7.
300
06807F DCN7335
GLOSSARY
Note: Some terms in this glossary may not occur elsewhere in this manual.
Term
Description/Definition
10Base-T
an Ethernet standard that uses twisted (“T”) pairs of copper wires to transmit at 10
megabits per second (Mbps)
100Base-T
same as 10BaseT except ten times faster (100 Mbps)
APICOM
name of a remote control program offered by Teledyne API to its customers
ASSY
Assembly
CAS
Code-Activated Switch
CD
Corona Discharge, a frequently luminous discharge, at the surface of a conductor or
between two conductors of the same transmission line, accompanied by ionization of the
surrounding atmosphere and often by a power loss
CE
Converter Efficiency, the percentage of light energy that is actually converted into
electricity
CEM
Continuous Emission Monitoring
Chemical formulas that may be included in this document:
CO2
carbon dioxide
C3H8
propane
CH4
methane
H2O
water vapor
HC
general abbreviation for hydrocarbon
HNO3
nitric acid
H2S
hydrogen sulfide
NO
nitric oxide
NO2
nitrogen dioxide
NOX
nitrogen oxides, here defined as the sum of NO and NO2
NOy
nitrogen oxides, often called odd nitrogen: the sum of NOX plus other compounds such as
HNO3 (definitions vary widely and may include nitrate (NO3), PAN, N2O and other
compounds as well)
NH3
ammonia
O2
molecular oxygen
O3
ozone
SO2
sulfur dioxide
cm
3
metric abbreviation for cubic centimeter (replaces the obsolete abbreviation “cc”)
CPU
Central Processing Unit
DAC
Digital-to-Analog Converter
06807F DCN7335
301
Glossary
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Term
Description/Definition
DAS
Data Acquisition System
DCE
Data Communication Equipment
DFU
Dry Filter Unit
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used by LAN or Internet servers to
automatically set up the interface protocols between themselves and any other
addressable device connected to the network
DIAG
Diagnostics, the diagnostic settings of the analyzer.
DOM
Disk On Module, a 44-pin IDE flash drive with up to 128MB storage capacity for
instrument’s firmware, configuration settings and data
DOS
Disk Operating System
DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory
DR-DOS
Digital Research DOS
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory also referred to as a FLASH chip
or drive
ESD
Electro-Static Discharge
ETEST
Electrical Test
Ethernet
a standardized (IEEE 802.3) computer networking technology for local area networks
(LANs), facilitating communication and sharing resources
FEP
Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene polymer, one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as
®
Teflon
Flash
non-volatile, solid-state memory
FPI
Fabry-Perot Interface: a special light filter typically made of a transparent plate with two
reflecting surfaces or two parallel, highly reflective mirrors
GFC
Gas Filter Correlation
2
I C bus
a clocked, bi-directional, serial bus for communication between individual analyzer
components
IC
Integrated Circuit, a modern, semi-conductor circuit that can contain many basic
components such as resistors, transistors, capacitors etc in a miniaturized package used
in electronic assemblies
IP
Internet Protocol
IZS
Internal Zero Span
302
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Term
Glossary
Description/Definition
LAN
Local Area Network
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LPM
Liters Per Minute
MFC
Mass Flow Controller
M/R
Measure/Reference
MOLAR MASS
the mass, expressed in grams, of 1 mole of a specific substance. Conversely, one mole is
the amount of the substance needed for the molar mass to be the same number in grams
as the atomic mass of that substance.
EXAMPLE: The atomic weight of Carbon is 12 therefore the molar mass of Carbon is 12
grams. Conversely, one mole of carbon equals the amount of carbon atoms that weighs
12 grams.
Atomic weights can be found on any Periodic Table of Elements.
NDIR
Non-Dispersive Infrared
NIST-SRM
National Institute of Standards and Technology - Standard Reference Material
PC
Personal Computer
PCA
Printed Circuit Assembly, the PCB with electronic components, ready to use
PC/AT
Personal Computer / Advanced Technology
PCB
Printed Circuit Board, the bare board without electronic component
PFA
Perfluoroalkoxy, an inert polymer; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller, a device that is used to control instruments based on a
logic level signal coming from the analyzer
PLD
Programmable Logic Device
PLL
Phase Lock Loop
PMT
Photo Multiplier Tube, a vacuum tube of electrodes that multiply electrons collected and
charged to create a detectable current signal
P/N (or PN)
Part Number
PSD
Prevention of Significant Deterioration
PTFE
Polytetrafluoroethylene, a very inert polymer material used to handle gases that may react
®
on other surfaces; one of the polymers that Du Pont markets as Teflon
PVC
Poly Vinyl Chloride, a polymer used for downstream tubing
Rdg
Reading
RS-232
specification and standard describing a serial communication method between DTE (Data
Terminal Equipment) and DCE (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment) devices, using a
maximum cable-length of 50 feet
06807F DCN7335
®
303
Glossary
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
Term
Description/Definition
RS-485
specification and standard describing a binary serial communication method among
multiple devices at a data rate faster than RS-232 with a much longer distance between
the host and the furthest device
SAROAD
Storage and Retrieval of Aerometric Data
SLAMS
State and Local Air Monitoring Network Plan
SLPM
Standard Liters Per Minute of a gas at standard temperature and pressure
STP
Standard Temperature and Pressure
TCP/IP
Transfer Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, the standard communications protocol for
Ethernet devices
TEC
Thermal Electric Cooler
TPC
Temperature/Pressure Compensation
USB
Universal Serial Bus: a standard connection method to establish communication between
peripheral devices and a host controller, such as a mouse and/or keyboard and a
personal computer or laptop
VARS
Variables, the variable settings of the instrument
V-F
Voltage-to-Frequency
Z/S
Zero / Span
304
06807F DCN7335
INDEX
Analog to Digital Converter........................................72
Critical Flow Orifice ......................................... 24, 68, 284
A
ANALOG CAL WARNING ....................................... 72
Analog Outputs .............................................................. 44
CONC1...................................................................... 75
CONC2...................................................................... 75
Configuration & Calibration
Automatic............................................................... 37
Electrical Connections ............................................... 44
Pin Assignments ........................................................ 45
Reporting Range ........................................................ 75
User Configurable .................................................... 266
APICOM ........................................................................ 23
B
BOX TEMP .................................................................. 72
BOX TEMP WARNING ............................................. 72
brass ............................................................................... 58
C
CAL Key ...................................................................... 266
Calibration
Analog Ouputs ........................................................... 37
Initial Calibration
Basic Configuration ............................................... 75
Calibration Gases
Span Gas .................................................................. 266
Dilution Feature ..................................................... 98
Zero Air...................................................................... 40
CALS Key ................................................................... 266
CANNOT DYN SPAN ................................................. 72
CANNOT DYN ZERO ................................................ 72
CO2 ..................... 69, 70, 80, 207, 208, 209, 210, 281, 282
CO2 ALARM1 WARN ................................................ 73
CO2 ALARM2 WARN ................................................ 73
CO2 Sensor .......................... 69, 70, 80, 207, 209, 281, 282
Calibration
Procedure ............................................................. 210
Span Gas Concentration ....................................... 208
CO2 Sensor Option
Pneumatic Set Up for Calibration ............................ 207
COMM Ports
COM2 ........................................................................ 55
Machine ID ................................................................ 56
CONC Key................................................................... 266
CONC VALID .............................................................. 48
CONC1.......................................................................... 75
CONC2.......................................................................... 75
Concentration Field ........................................................ 37
CONFIG INITIALIZED ............................................. 72
Control Button Definition Field ..................................... 37
Control Inputs ................................................................ 48
Pin Assignments ........................................................ 49
Control InputS
Electrical Connections ............................................... 48
CPU........................................... 71, 72, 226, 229, 281, 282
06807F DCN7335
D
DARK CAL ...................................................................72
DAS System ....................................................... 37, 72, 75
Holdoff Period ..........................................................266
data acquisition ....................................... See DAS System
DATA INITIALIZED ..................................................72
DB-25M ..........................................................................26
DB-9F .............................................................................26
DC Power .......................................................................49
Diagnostic Menu (DIAG) ...............................................99
Dilution Ratio .................................................................70
E
Electrical Connections
AC Power ...................................................................43
Analog Outputs ...........................................................44
Control InputS ............................................................48
Ethernet .......................................................................23
Electro-Static Discharge ........................................... 33, 55
Ethernet ......................... 23, 24, 81, 88, 138, 171, 238, 239
Exhaust Gas ....................................................................40
Exhaust Gas Outlet .......................................................40
External Pump ................................................................25
F
FEP .................................................................................58
Final Test and Validation Data Sheet ....................... 73, 75
Front Panel ......................................................................35
Concentration Field.....................................................37
Control Button Definition Field ..................................37
Message Field .............................................................37
Mode Field ..................................................................37
Status LED’s ...............................................................37
G
Gas Inlets
Sample ........................................................................40
Span............................................................................40
ZERO AIR .................................................................40
Gas Outlets
Exhaust .......................................................................40
H
Hold Off Period ............................................................266
HVPS WARNING ........................................................72
hydrocarbons .......................................... 23, 223, 278, 285
I
Infrared Radiation (IR) .................................................281
Internal Pneumatics
T100
Basic Configuration ................................................62
Internal Pump............................................................ 58, 71
305
INDEX
Internal Span Gas Generator
Warning Messages ................................................ 72, 73
Internal Zero Air (IZS) ................................................... 40
IZS .................................................................................. 69
IZS TEMP WARNING ................................................ 73
K
kicker ...................................................................... 23, 278
M
Machine ID ..................................................................... 56
Menu Keys
CAL .......................................................................... 266
CALS ........................................................................ 266
CONC ....................................................................... 266
Message Field ................................................................. 37
Mode Field ..................................................................... 37
Motherboard ................................................................. 229
multipoint calibration ..................................................... 70
N
naphthalene ................................................................... 278
National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
Standard Reference Materials (SRM) ......................... 70
SO2.......................................................................... 70
O
O2 .................... 44, 45, 68, 70, 80, 205, 209, 279, 280, 282
O2 ALARM1 WARN ................................................... 73
O2 ALARM2 WARN ................................................... 73
O2 sensor......................................... 44, 45, 68, 70, 80, 280
O2 Sensor
Calibration
Procedure .............................................................. 206
Setup ..................................................................... 203
Span Gas Concentration ....................................... 203
O2 Sensor Option
Pneumatic Set Up for Calibration .... 203, 205, 206, 208,
210
OC CELL TEMP WARN ............................................ 73
Operating Modes
Sample Mode .............................................................. 37
P
Particulate Filter ............................................................. 69
PMT
(TEC) ........................................................................ 226
PMT DET WARNING ................................................. 72
PMT TEMP WARNING.............................................. 72
Pneumatic Set Up
Basic Model T100
Bottled Gas ............................................................. 61
Gas Dilution Calibrator .......................................... 61
Calibration
optional O2 Sensor ................................................ 205
T100 with CO2 Sensor .......................................... 208
T100 with CO2 Sensor .......................................... 207
with O2 Sensor ...................................... 203, 206, 210
Calibration Gases ........................................................ 69
PTFE............................................................................... 58
306
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
R
RCELL TEMP WARNING......................................... 72
REAR BOARD NOT DET .......................................... 72
RELAY BOARD WARN ............................................. 72
relay PCA ............................................................... 72, 226
Reporting Range ............................................................. 75
Modes ......................................................................... 98
Upper Span Limit ................................................. 98, 99
RJ45................................................................................ 26
RS-232 ..... 24, 53, 54, 55, 58, 64, 65, 66, 81, 88, 134, 137,
147, 155, 168, 171, 180, 244, 245, 299
RS-485 ........................................ 24, 58, 81, 134, 137, 299
S
Safety Messages ............................................................viii
SAMPLE FLOW WARN............................................. 72
Sample Inlet .................................................................. 40
Sample Mode ............................................................ 37, 71
SAMPLE PRESS WARN ............................................ 72
Serial I/O Ports
RS-232 ........................................................................ 55
SNGL ............................................................................. 75
SO2 .. 23, 44, 58, 66, 67, 69, 70, 73, 81, 83, 84, 90, 91, 94,
95, 186, 193, 195, 200, 217, 230, 234, 235, 236, 237,
238, 246, 253, 254, 256, 257, 258, 266, 269, 270, 271,
272, 273, 274, 275, 276, 277, 278, 279, 283, 288, 290,
292, 295, 299, 306
SO2 ALARM1 WARN .................................................. 73
SO2 ALARM2 WARN .................................................. 73
SPAN CAL .................................................................... 48
Remote........................................................................ 49
Span Gas .... 40, 64, 65, 66, 67, 70, 75, 108, 185, 186, 191,
192, 193, 195, 200, 208, 228, 229, 230, 235, 236, 237,
238, 265, 266
Dilution Feature .......................................................... 98
Span Inlet ...................................................................... 40
Status Outputs
Pin Assignments ......................................................... 48
SYSTEM OK ................................................................ 48
SYSTEM RESET ......................................................... 72
T
Teledyne Contact Information
Email Address ................................................... 31, 267
Fax ..................................................................... 31, 267
Phone ................................................................. 31, 267
Technical Assistance .........................................viii, 267
Website .................................................................... 267
TEST FUNCTIONS
BOX TEMP ............................................................... 72
U
Units of Measurement .................................................... 75
UV ..... 23, 84, 86, 108, 131, 151, 185, 215, 217, 229, 230,
236, 245, 246, 251, 252, 253, 254, 256, 257, 258, 259,
260, 261, 264, 269, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275, 276,
277, 278, 279, 283, 290, 291, 298, 299
UV fluorescence ........................................................... 272
UV Fluorescence .................................... 23, 269, 271, 283
06807F DCN7335
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
INDEX
UV Lamp .............................................. 127, 230, 257, 258
UV Lamp ........................................ 71, 251, 256, 258, 260
UV LAMP WARNING ................................................ 72
uv Light ........... 71, 251, 256, 258, 260, 270, 271, 272, 274
HVPS WARNING.....................................................72
IZS TEMP WARNING ............................................73
O2 ALRM1 WARN ..................................................73
O2 ALRM2 WARN ..................................................73
O2 CELL TEMP WARN .........................................73
PMT DET WARNING .............................................72
PMT TEMP WARNING ..........................................72
RCELL TEMP WARNING .....................................72
REAR BOARD NOT DET .......................................72
RELAY BOARD WARN .........................................72
SAMPLE FLOW WARN .........................................72
SAMPLE PRESS WARN .........................................72
SO2 ALRM1 WARN .................................................73
SO2 ALRM2 WARN .................................................73
SYSTEM RESET ......................................................72
UV LAMP WARNING .............................................72
V
Valve Options ................................................................ 40
Internal Span Gas Generator
Warning Messages ............................................72, 73
VARS Menu .................................................................. 99
Ventilation Clearance..................................................... 34
W
Warm-up Period ............................................................. 71
Warnings ........................................................................ 71
ANALOG CAL WARNING ................................... 72
BOX TEMP WARNING ......................................... 72
CANNOT DYN SPAN ............................................. 72
CANNOT DYN ZERO ............................................ 72
CO2 ALRM1 WARN ............................................... 73
CO2 ALRM2 WARN ............................................... 73
CONFIG INITIALIZED ......................................... 72
DARK CAL .............................................................. 72
DATA INITIALIZED .............................................. 72
06807F DCN7335
Z
Zero Air ... 40, 66, 67, 69, 70, 75, 125, 191, 192, 195, 200,
215, 230, 235, 236, 237, 264, 266, 296
ZERO AIR Inlet ............................................................40
ZERO CAL ............................................................. 48, 49
Remote ........................................................................49
307
INDEX
Teledyne API - T100 UV Fluorescence SO2 Analyzer
This page intentionally left blank.
308
06807F DCN7335
APPENDIX A - Version Specific Software Documentation
Rev 1.0.3 (T-Series)/G6 (E-Series)
APPENDIX A-1: SOFTWARE MENU TREES ........................................................................ 3
APPENDIX A-2: SETUP VARIABLES FOR SERIAL I/O ...................................................... 11
APPENDIX A-3: WARNINGS AND TEST FUNCTIONS ........................................................ 12
APPENDIX A-4: SIGNAL I/O DEFINITIONS .................................................................... 15
APPENDIX A-5: DAS FUNCTIONS .................................................................................... 21
APPENDIX A-6: TERMINAL COMMAND DESIGNATORS ................................................... 25
APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS REGISTER MAP....................................................................... 27
06807F DCN7335
A-1
This page intentionally left blank.
A-2
06807F DCN7335
APPENDIX A-1: Software Menu Trees
SAMPLE
TEST1
<TST
MSG1,2
CAL
TST>
Only appear if
reporting range
is set for
AUTO range
mode.
CLR1,3
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
LOW
HIGH
(Primary Setup Menu)
CFG
RANGE
STABIL
STABIL24
RSP
PRES
SAMP FL
PMT
NORM PMT
UV LAMP
UV STB
LAMP RATIO
STR. LGT
DARK PMT
DARK LMP
SLOPE
OFFSET
HVPS
RCELL ON
RCELL TEMP
BOX TEMP
PMT TEMP
IZS TEMP5
TEST6
TIME
ZERO
SPAN
DAS
RANG
PASS
CLK
MORE
CONC
(Secondary Setup Menu)
COMM
1
TEST FUNCTIONS
Viewable by user while
instrument is in SAMPLE
Mode (see Test Functions
section in manual).
2
3
4
5
6
Figure A-1:
06807F DCN7335
SETUP
VARS
DIAG
Only appears when warning messages are activated
(see section on Warning Messages in manual).
Press this key to cycle through list of active warning
messages.
Press to clear/erase the warning message currently
displayed
T100U/M100EU
Only appears if the IZS valve option is installed.
Only appears if the TEST analog output channel is
activated.
Basic Sample Display Menu
A-3
SAMPLE
TEST1
<TST
TST>
Only appears if
reporting range
is set for
AUTO range
mode.
LOW
HIGH
RANGE
STABIL
STABIL24
SPAN
ZERO
RSP6
VAC7
PRES
SAMP FL
PMT
NORM PMT
UV LAMP
UV STB4
LAMP RATIO
STR. LGT
DARK PMT
DARK LMP
SLOPE
OFFSET
HVPS
RCELL ON
RCELL TEMP
BOX TEMP
PMT TEMP
IZS TEMP5
TEST6
TEST FUNCTIONS
TIME
Viewable by user while instrument is
in SAMPLE Mode (see Test Functions
section in manual).
Figure A-2:
A-4
CALZ
CAL
LOW
CONC
HIGH
ZERO
MSG1,2
CALS
LOW
HIGH
SPAN
CONC
CLR1,3
SETUP
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
(Primary Setup Menu)
CFG
DAS
RANG
PASS
CLK
MORE
(Secondary Setup Menu)
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
7
Only appears when warning messages are activated.
Press to cycle through list of active warning messages.
Press to clear/erase the warning message currently
displayed.
T100U/M100EU
Only appears if the IZS valve option is installed.
Only appears if the TEST analog output channel is activated.
Not in T100H/M100EH
T100H/M100EH
COMM
VARS
DIAG
Sample Display Menu - Units with Z/S Valve or IZS Option installed
06807F DCN7335
SETUP
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
CFG
PREV
NEXT
PREV
• MODEL NAME
• SERIAL NUMBER
• SOFTWARE
REVISION
• LIBRARY REVISION
•
iCHIP SOFTWARE
REVISION1
•
HESSEN PROTOCOL
REVISION1
• ACTIVE SPECIAL
SOFTWARE
OPTIONS1
• CPU TYPE
NEXT
MODE
TIME
PREV
ENTR
3
Only appears if a applicable
option/feature is installed and
activated.
Only appears whenever the
currently displayed sequence
is not set for DISABLED.
Only appears when reporting
range is set to AUTO range
mode.
MODE
SET
IND
AUTO
DATE
UNIT
NEXT
SNGL
DISABLED
ZERO
ZERO/SPAN
SPAN
TIMER ENABLE
STARTING DATE
STARTING TIME
DELTA DAYS
DELTA TIME
DURATION
CALIBRATE
PPB
PPM
UGM
MGM
ENTR
<SET
SET>
EDIT
LOW3
Go To
SECONDARY SETUP MENU
(Fig. A-5)
HIGH3
RANGE TO CAL3
Figure A-3:
06807F DCN7335
MORE
OFF
(Fig. A-8)
SEQ 1)
SEQ 2)
SEQ 3)
CONFIGURATION
SAVED
2
CLK
ON
Go To iDAS
MENU TREE
SET2
• DATE FACTORY
1
PASS
RNGE
DAS
ACAL1
Primary Setup Menu (Except DAS)
A-5
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
CFG
DAS
ACAL1
RNGE
VIEW
PREV
PRM>
Cycles through
list of
parameters
chosen for this
DAS channel
PREV
PV10
PREV
NEXT
INS
DEL
YES
EDIT
SET>
EDIT
PRNT
Creates/changes name
NAME
EVENT
PARAMETERS
REPORT PERIOD
NUMBER OF RECORDS
RS-232 REPORT
CHANNEL ENABLE
CAL. HOLD
NO
PRNT
NO
<SET
Selects data point to view.
PREV
NEXT
CONC
PNUMTC
CALDAT
DETAILED
FAST
NX10
YES
(see Editing DAS Data Channels
section in manual).
Sets the
amount of time
between each
report.
NEXT
PREV
NEXT
DEL
INS
Cycles through
available trigger
events.
YES
<SET
Cycles through
already active
parameters.
2
MORE
NEXT
VIEW
1
CLK
EDIT
CONC
OPTICS2
PNUMTC
CALDAT
DETAILED
FAST
<PRM
PASS
PARAMETER
EDIT
PRNT
NO
SET>
ON
EDIT
SAMPLE MODE
PRNT
OFF
PRECISION
YES
NO
Selects max
no. of records
for this channel
Only appears if Z/S valve or IZS option is installed.
T100H, M100EH
PREV
NEXT
INST
AVG
MIN
MAX
Cycles through available/active parameters
(see Editing DAS Parameters section in manual).
Figure A-4:
A-6
Primary Setup Menu (DAS)
06807F DCN7335
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
CFG
DAS
ACAL1
RNGE
COMM
SET>
MODE
PREV
NEXT
PREV
BAUD RATE
PREV
ON
NEXT
300
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
DIAG
JUMP
EDIT
PRINT
DAS_HOLD_OFF
TPC_ENABLE
RCELL_SET
IZS_SET
DYN_ZERO
DYN_SPAN
CONC_PRECISION
CLOCK_ADJ
SERVICE_CLEAR
TIME_SINCE_SVC
SVC_INTERVAL
TEST PORT
TEST
Go To
DIAG MENU TREE
(Fig A-8)
1
2
3
OFF
Figure A-5:
06807F DCN7335
NEXT
EDIT
QUIET
COMPUTER
HESSEN PROTOCOL
E, 8, 1
E, 7, 1
RS-485
SECURITY
MULTIDROP PROTOCOL
ENABLE MODEM
ERROR CHECKING
XON/XOFF HANDSHAKE
HARDWARE HANDSHAKE
HARDWARE FIFO
COMMAND PROMPT
MORE
Password required
COM1 COM23
Go To INET MENU TREE (Fig A-6)
<SET
CLK
VARS
INET2
ID
PASS
Only appears if Z/S valve or IZS option is installed.
M100E, M100EU, M100EH: Only appears when the
ENABLE INTERNET mode is enabled.
M100E, M100EU, M100EH: Disappears when INET option
is enabled.
Secondary Setup Menu (COMM & VARS)
A-7
SETUP
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
CFG
DAS
ACAL1
RNGE
PASS
CLK
MORE
VARS
COMM
DIAG
Password required
ID
COM1
PREV
NEXT
JUMP
EDIT
PRINT
INET2
<SET
SET>
EDIT
COMM
MENU TREE
(Fig A-5)
VARS
MENU TREE
DHCP
INSTRUMENT IP
GATEWAY IP
SUBNET MASK
(Fig A-5)
TCP PORT3
HOSTNAME4
Go To
DIAG MENU TREE
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
(Fig A-8)
Only appears if a valve option is installed.
M100E, M100EU, M100EH: Only appears when the Ethernet card (option 63) is installed.
M100E, M100EU, M100EH: Although TCP PORT is editable regardless of the DHCP state, do not change the
setting for this property unless instructed to by Teledyne Instruments Customer Service personnel.
HOST NAME is only editable when DHCP is ON.
INSTRUMENT IP, GATEWAY IP & SUBNET MASK are only editable when DHCP is OFF.
Figure A-6:
A-8
EDIT
INSTRUMENT IP5
GATEWAY IP5
SUBNET MASK5
TCP PORT3
Secondary Setup, COMM – INET (Ethernet) Menu
06807F DCN7335
SETUP
.
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
CFG
DAS
ACAL1
RNGE
PASS
COMM
HESN2
ID
<SET
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
SET>
PREV
RESPONSE MODE
BCC
NEXT
TEXT
INS
EDIT
YES
GAS LIST
EDIT
2
3
4
(see Hessen Protocol Gas ID section in manual)
GAS TYPE
GAS ID
REPORTED
Only appears if a valve option is installed.
Only appears when the HESSEN mode is enabled.
See Setting Hessen Protocol Status Flags section in
manual for Flag Assignments.
T100H, M100EH
Figure A-7:
06807F DCN7335
PRNT
NO
SO2, 110, REPORTED
1
STATUS FLAGS
CMD
DEL
MORE
VARS
DIAG
See
Fig A-5
See
Fig A-8
COM1 COM2
See
Fig A-5
VARIATION
CLK
ON
OFF
PMT DET WARNING
UV LAMP WARNING1
DARK CAL WARNING
IZS TEMP WARNING
BOX TEMP WARNING
PMT TEMP WARNING
RCELL TEMP WARNING
SAMPLE FLOW WARNING
SAMPLE PRESS WARNING
VACUUM PRESS WARN4
HVPS WARNING
SYSTEM RESET
REAR BOARD NOT DET
RELAY BOARD WARN
FRONT PANEL WARN
ANALOG CAL WARNING
CANNOT DYN ZERO
CANNOT DYN SPAN
INVALID CONC
ZERO CAL
LOW SPAN CAL4
SPAN CAL
MP CAL
MANUAL MODE
INVALID
PPB3
PPM3
UGM3
MGM3
SO2 ALARM 1
SO@ ALARM 2
Secondary Setup Menu - HESSEN Submenu
A-9
SAMPLE
ENTER SETUP PASS: 818
CFG
DAS
ACAL1
COMM
RNGE
PASS
CLK
MORE
PMT 5
CALIBRATION
SIGNAL
I/O
PREV
ANALOG
OUTPUT
0)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
21)
22)
23)
24)
25)
26)
27)
28)
29)
30)
31)
32)
33)
34)
35)
36
↓
54
ANALOG I/O
CONFIGURATION
OPTIC
TEST
PRESSURE
FLOW
CALIBRATION CALIBRATION
ENTR
ENTR
ENTR
ENTR
ENTR
Start step Test
Starts Test
Starts Test
Starts Test
Starts Test
Starts Test
EXT ZERO CAL
EXT SPAN CAL
EXT LOW SPAN
MAINT MODE
LANG2 SELECT
NEXT
TEST
CHANNEL
OUTPUT
3
SAMPLE LED
CAL LED
FAULT LED
AUDIBLE BEEPER
ELEC TEST
OPTIC TEST
DARK TEST 4
PREAMP RANGE HI
ST SYSTEM OK
ST CONC VALID
ST HIGH RANGE
ST ZERO CAL
ST SPAN CAL
ST DIAG MODE
ST LOW SPAN CAL 3
ST LAMP ALARM
ST DARK CAL ALARM
ST FLOW ALARM
ST PRESS ALARM
SR TEMP ALARM
ST HVPS ALARM
ST SYSTEM OK2
ST CONC ALARM 1
ST CONC ALARM 2
ST HIGH RANGE 2
RELAY WATCHDOG
RCELL HEATER
IZS HEATER 2
CAL VALVE
SPAN VALVE
PMT SIGNAL
LOW SPAN VALVE 3
ZERO VALVE 1
DARK SHUTTER
<SET
AOUTS CALIBRATED
SET>
CONC OUT 1
CONC OUT 2
TEST OUTPUT
CAL
NONE
PMT READING
UV READING
SAMPLE PRESSURE
SAMPLE FLOW
RCELL TEMP
CHASSIS TEMP
IZS TEMP2
PMT TEMP
HVPS VOLTAGE
EDIT
<SET
ON
RANGE
SET>
REC OFFSET
AUTO CAL
0.1V
CALIBRATED
ON
OFF
1V
5V
10V
CAL
OFF
CURR
1
Only appears if valve option is installed.
Only relevant to analyzers with IZS options installed.
T100H, M100EH
4
T100, T100U, M100E, M100EU
5
T100U, M100EU
2
3
INTERNAL ANALOG
VOLTAGE SIGNALS
(see Appendix A)
Figure A-8:
A-10
ELECTRICAL
LAMP
TEST
CALIBRATION
PREV
ENTR
NEXT
DIAG
VARS
Secondary Setup Menu (DIAG)
06807F DCN7335
APPENDIX A-2: Setup Variables For Serial I/O
Table A-1:
NUMERIC
UNITS
SETUP VARIABLE
Setup Variables
DEFAULT
VALUE
VALUE RANGE
DESCRIPTION
DAS_HOLD_OFF
Minutes
15
0.5–20
Duration of DAS hold off period.
TPC_ENABLE
—
ON
OFF, ON
ON enables temperature and pressure
compensation; OFF disables it.
RCELL_SET
ºC
50
30–70
Reaction cell temperature set point and
warning limits.
30–70
IZS temperature set point and warning
limits.
Warnings:
45–55
IZS_SET
1
ºC
50
Warnings:
45–55
DYN_ZERO
—
OFF
OFF, ON
ON enables contact closure dynamic
zero; OFF disables it.
DYN_SPAN
—
OFF
OFF, ON
ON enables contact closure dynamic
span; OFF disables it.
CONC_PRECISION
—
3
AUTO,
Number of digits to display to the right
of the decimal point for concentrations
on the display. Enclose value in double
quotes (“) when setting from the RS232 interface.
0,
1,
2,
3,
4
2
Minutes
20
1–120
Duration of automatic calibration
initiated from TAI protocol.
CLOCK_ADJ
Sec./Day
0
-60–60
Time-of-day clock speed adjustment.
SERVICE_CLEAR
—
OFF
OFF
ON
ON resets the service interval
timer.
REM_CAL_DURATION
TIME_SINCE_SVC
Hours
0
0–500000
Time since last service.
SVC_INTERVAL
Hours
0
0–100000
Sets the interval between service
reminders.
1
T100/M100E
2
TAI protocol
06807F DCN7335
A-11
APPENDIX A-3: Warnings and Test Functions
Table A-2:
NAME
Warning Messages
MESSAGE TEXT
DESCRIPTION
Warnings
WSYSRES
SYSTEM RESET
Instrument was power-cycled or the CPU was reset.
WDATAINIT
DATA INITIALIZED
Data storage was erased.
WCONFIGINIT
CONFIG INITIALIZED
Configuration storage was reset to factory configuration or
erased.
WSO2ALARM1
7
SO2 ALARM 1 WARN
SO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
WSO2ALARM2
7
SO2 ALARM 2 WARN
SO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded
WO2ALARM1
10+7
O2 ALARM 1 WARN
O2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
WO2ALARM2
10+7
O2 ALARM 2 WARN
O2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded
CO2 ALARM 1 WARN
CO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
WCO2ALARM1
11+7
WCO2ALARM2
11+7
CO2 ALARM 2 WARN
CO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded
WPMT
PMT DET WARNING
PMT detector outside of warning limits.
WUVLAMP
UV LAMP WARNING
UV lamp reading outside of warning limits.
WSAMPFLOW
SAMPLE FLOW WARN
Sample flow outside of warning limits.
SAMPLE PRESS WARN
Sample pressure outside of warning limits
VACUUM PRESS WARN
Vacuum pressure outside of warning.
BOX TEMP WARNING
Chassis temperature outside of warning limits
RCELL TEMP WARNING
Reaction cell temperature outside of warning.
O2 CELL TEMP WARN
O2 sensor cell temperature outside of warning limits.
WIZSTEMP
IZS TEMP WARNING
IZS temperature outside of warning limits.
WPMTTEMP
PMT TEMP WARNING
PMT temperature outside of warning.
WDARKCAL
DARK CAL WARNING
Dark offset above limit.
WHVPS
HVPS WARNING
High voltage power supply output outside of warning limits.
WDYNZERO
CANNOT DYN ZERO
Contact closure zero calibration failed while DYN_ZERO was set
to ON.
WDYNSPAN
CANNOT DYN SPAN
Contact closure span calibration failed while DYN_SPAN was set
to ON.
WSAMPPRESS
WVACPRESS
5
WBOXTEMP
WRCELLTEMP
WO2CELLTEMP
10
WREARBOARD
REAR BOARD NOT DET
Rear board was not detected during power up.
WRELAYBOARD
RELAY BOARD WARN
Firmware is unable to communicate with the relay board.
WFRONTPANEL
FRONT PANEL WARN
WANALOGCAL
ANALOG CAL WARNING
Firmware is unable to communicate with the front panel.
The A/D or at least one D/A channel has not been calibrated.
1
The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.
2
Engineering software.
3
Current instrument units.
4
T100/M100E.
5
T100H/M100EH.
6
T100U/M100EU.
7
Concentration alarm option.
10
O2 option.
11
CO2 option.
A-12
06807F DCN7335
Table A-3:
TEST FUNCTION
Test Functions
MESSAGE TEXT
DESCRIPTION
Test Measurements
RANGE
RANGE=500.0 PPB
3
D/A range in single or auto-range modes.
SO2 RNG=500.0 PPB
RANGE1
RANGE2
CO2RANGE
RANGE1=500.0 PPB
3
SO2 RN1=500.0 PPB
3, 10, 11
RANGE2=500.0 PPB
3
SO2 RN2=500.0 PPB
3, 10, 11
11
CO2 RNG=100 PCT
O2RANGE
O2 RNG=100 PCT
STABILITY
3
STABIL=0.0 PPB
10
O2 STB=0.0 PCT
STABIL2=0.0 PPB
Concentration stability #2.
3, 10
10
CO2 STB2=0.0 PCT
VACUUM
5
D/A range for O2 concentration
11
SO2 STB2=0.0 PPB
RESPONSE
D/A range for CO2 concentration.
3, 10
3
O2 STB2=0.0 PCT
2
D/A #2 range in independent range mode.
10
CO2 STB=0.0 PCT
6
D/A #1 range in independent range mode.
Concentration stability #1.
SO2 STB=0.0 PPB
STABILITY2
3, 10, 11
11
RSP=1.11(0.00) SEC
Instrument response. Length of each signal processing loop.
Time in parenthesis is standard deviation.
VAC=9.1 IN-HG-A
Vacuum pressure.
SAMPPRESS
PRES=29.9 IN-HG-A
Sample pressure.
SAMPFLOW
SAMP FL=700 CC/M
Sample flow rate.
PMTDET
PMT=762.5 MV
Raw PMT reading.
NORMPMTDET
NORM PMT=742.9 MV
PMT reading normalized for temperature, pressure, auto-zero
offset, but not range.
UVDET
UV LAMP=3457.6 MV
UV lamp reading.
UV STB=5.607 MV
UV lamp stability reading.
LAMPRATIO
LAMP RATIO=100.0 %
UV lamp ratio of current reading divided by calibrated reading.
STRAYLIGHT
STR. LGT=0.1 PPB
Stray light offset.
DARKPMT
DRK PMT=19.6 MV
PMT dark offset.
DARKLAMP
DRK LMP=42.4 MV
UV lamp dark offset.
SLOPE
SLOPE=1.061
Slope for current range, computed during zero/span calibration.
OFFSET=250.0 MV
Offset for current range, computed during zero/span calibration.
STABILITYUV
6
OFFSET
CO2SLOPE
11
CO2 SLOPE=1.0000
CO2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration.
CO2 OFFSET=0.00 %
CO2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration.
O2 SLOPE=0.980
O2 slope, computed during zero/span calibration.
O2 OFFSET=1.79 %
O2 offset, computed during zero/span calibration.
HVPS
HVPS=650 VOLTS
High voltage power supply output.
RCELLDUTY
RCELL ON=0.00 SEC
Reaction cell temperature control duty cycle.
RCELL TEMP=52.1 C
Reaction cell temperature.
O2 CELL TEMP=50.2 C
O2 sensor cell temperature.
BOX TEMP=35.5 C
Internal chassis temperature.
CO2OFFSET
O2SLOPE
11
10
O2OFFSET
10
RCELLTEMP
O2CELLTEMP
10
BOXTEMP
06807F DCN7335
A-13
TEST FUNCTION
MESSAGE TEXT
DESCRIPTION
PMTTEMP
PMT TEMP=7.0 C
PMT temperature.
IZSDUTY
IZS ON=0.00 SEC
IZS temperature control duty cycle.
IZSTEMP
IZS TEMP=52.2 C
IZS temperature.
SO2
SO2=261.4 PPB
SO2 concentration for current range.
CO2=0.00 PCT
CO2 concentration.
O2=0.00 PCT
O2 concentration.
TESTCHAN
TEST=3721.1 MV
Value output to TEST_OUTPUT analog output.
CLOCKTIME
TIME=10:38:27
Current instrument time of day clock.
XIN1
12
AIN1=37.15 EU
External analog input 1 value in engineering units.
XIN2
12
AIN2=37.15 EU
External analog input 2 value in engineering units.
XIN3
12
AIN3=37.15 EU
External analog input 3 value in engineering units.
XIN4
12
AIN4=37.15 EU
External analog input 4 value in engineering units.
XIN5
12
AIN5=37.15 EU
External analog input 5 value in engineering units.
XIN6
12
AIN6=37.15 EU
External analog input 6 value in engineering units.
XIN7
12
AIN7=37.15 EU
External analog input 7 value in engineering units.
XIN8
12
AIN8=37.15 EU
External analog input 8 value in engineering units.
CO2
O2
11
10
1
The name is used to request a message via the RS-232 interface, as in “T BOXTEMP”.
2
Engineering software.
3
Current instrument units.
4
T100/M100E.
5
T100H/M100EH.
6
T100U/M100EU.
7
Concentration alarm option.
10
O2 option.
11
CO2 option.
12
External analog input option T-Series only.
A-14
06807F DCN7335
APPENDIX A-4: Signal I/O Definitions
Table A-4:
SIGNAL NAME
T100/M100E Signal I/O Definitions
BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
Internal inputs, U7, J108, pins 9–16 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex
0–7
Spare
2
AUX board digital outputs, default I C address 30 hex
ELEC_TEST
3
0
1 = electrical test on
0 = off
OPTIC_TEST
3
1
1 = optic test on
0 = off
DARK_TEST
3
2
1 = dark test on
0 = off
PREAMP_RANGE_HI
3
3
1 = select high preamp range
0 = select low range
Internal outputs, U8, J108, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 322 hex
ELEC_TEST
0
1 = electrical test on
0 = off
OPTIC_TEST
1
1 = optic test on
0 = off
PREAMP_RANGE_HI
2
1 = select high preamp range
0 = select low range
I2C_RESET
3–5
Spare
6
1 = reset I C peripherals
2
0 = normal
I2C_DRV_RST
7
0 = hardware reset 8584 chip
1 = normal
Control inputs, U11, J1004, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 321 hex
EXT_ZERO_CAL
0
0 = go into zero calibration
1 = exit zero calibration
EXT_SPAN_CAL
1
0 = go into span calibration
1 = exit span calibration
EXT_LOW_SPAN
2, 6
2
0 = go into low span calibration
1 = exit low span calibration
EXT_BKGND_CAL
4
3
0 = go into background calibration
1 = exit background calibration
4–5
Spare
6–7
Always 1
Control inputs, U14, J1006, pins 1–6 = bits 0–5, default I/O address 325 hex
06807F DCN7335
0–5
Spare
6–7
Always 1
A-15
SIGNAL NAME
BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
Control outputs, U17, J1008, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 321 hex
0–7
Spare
Control outputs, U21, J1008, pins 9–12 = bits 0–3, default I/O address 325 hex
0–3
Spare
Alarm outputs, U21, J1009, pins 1–12 = bits 4–7, default I/O address 325 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK2,
MB_RELAY_36
4
9
1 = system OK
0 = any alarm condition or in diagnostics mode
Controlled by MODBUS coil register
ST_CONC_ALARM_1
MB_RELAY_37
12
,
5
9
1 = conc. limit 1 exceeded
0 = conc. OK
Controlled by MODBUS coil register
ST_CONC_ALARM_2
MB_RELAY_38
12
,
6
9
1 = conc. limit 2 exceeded
0 = conc. OK
Controlled by MODBUS coil register
ST_HIGH_RANGE2
MB_RELAY_39
13
,
7
9
1 = high auto-range in use (mirrors ST_HIGH_RANGE
status output)
0 = low auto-range
Controlled by MODBUS coil register
A status outputs, U24, J1017, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 323 hex
ST_SYSTEM_OK
0
0 = system OK
1 = any alarm condition
ST_CONC_VALID
1
0 = conc. valid
1 = warnings or other conditions that affect validity of
concentration
ST_HIGH_RANGE
2
ST_ZERO_CAL
3
0 = high auto-range in use
1 = low auto-range
0 = in zero calibration
1 = not in zero
ST_SPAN_CAL
4
0 = in span calibration
1 = not in span
ST_DIAG_MODE
ST_LOW_SPAN_CAL
2, 6
5
0 = in diagnostic mode
1 = not in diagnostic mode
6
0 = in low span calibration
1 = not in low span
ST_BKGND_CAL
4
7
0 = in background calibration
1 = not in background calibration
A-16
06807F DCN7335
SIGNAL NAME
BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
B status outputs, U27, J1018, pins 1–8 = bits 0–7, default I/O address 324 hex
ST_LAMP_ALARM
0
0 = lamp intensity low
1 = lamp intensity OK
ST_DARK_CAL_ALARM
1
0 = dark cal. warning
1 = dark cal. OK
ST_FLOW_ALARM
2
ST_PRESS_ALARM
3
0 = any flow alarm
1 = all flows OK
0 = any pressure alarm
1 = all pressures OK
ST_TEMP_ALARM
4
0 = any temperature alarm
1 = all temperatures OK
ST_HVPS_ALARM
5
0 = HVPS alarm
1 = HVPS OK
ST_CO2_CAL
11
6
0 = in CO2 calibration
1 = not in CO2 calibration
ST_O2_CAL
10
7
0 = in O2 calibration
1 = not in O2 calibration
2
2
Front panel I C keyboard, default I C address 4E hex
MAINT_MODE
5 (input)
0 = maintenance mode
1 = normal mode
LANG2_SELECT
6 (input)
0 = select second language
1 = select first language (English)
SAMPLE_LED
8 (output)
0 = sample LED on
1 = off
CAL_LED
9 (output)
FAULT_LED
10 (output)
0 = cal. LED on
1 = off
0 = fault LED on
1 = off
AUDIBLE_BEEPER
14 (output)
0 = beeper on (for diagnostic testing only)
1 = off
06807F DCN7335
A-17
SIGNAL NAME
BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
2
Relay board digital output (PCF8575), default I C address 44 hex
RELAY_WATCHDOG
0
Alternate between 0 and 1 at least every 5 seconds to keep
relay board active
RCELL_HEATER
1
0 = reaction cell heater on
1 = off
IZS_HEATER
2–3
Spare
4
0 = IZS heater on
1 = off
O2_CELL_HEATER
10
5
0 = O2 sensor cell heater on
6
0 = let cal. gas in
1 = off
CAL_VALVE
1 = let sample gas in
SPAN_VALVE
7
0 = let span gas in
1 = let zero gas in
LOW_SPAN_VALVE
2, 6
8
0 = let low span gas in
1 = let sample gas in
CYLINDER_VALVE
7
8
0 = open pressurized inlet valve
1 = close valve
2
ZERO_VALVE
9
0 = let zero gas in
1 = let sample gas in
DARK_SHUTTER
10
0 = close dark shutter
1 = open
11–15
Spare
2
AUX board analog inputs, default I C address 30 hex
3
PMT_SIGNAL
UVLAMP_SIGNAL
3
NORM_PMT_SIGNAL
PMT_TEMP
3
HVPS_VOLTAGE
PMT_DARK
3
3
3
0 (register number)
PMT detector
1
UV lamp intensity
2
Normalized PMT detector
3
PMT temperature
4
HV power supply output
5
PMT reading during dark cycles
LAMP_DARK
3
6
Lamp reading during dark cycles
AGND_DARK
3
7
AGND reading during dark cycles
AGND_LIGHT
3
8
AGND reading during light cycles
VREF_DARK
3
9
VREF4096 reading during dark cycles
VREF_LIGHT
3
10
VREF4096 reading during light cycles
A-18
06807F DCN7335
SIGNAL NAME
BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
Rear board primary MUX analog inputs
PMT_SIGNAL
0
PMT detector
HVPS_VOLTAGE
1
HV power supply output
PMT_TEMP
2
PMT temperature
UVLAMP_SIGNAL
3
UV lamp intensity
4
Temperature MUX
PHOTO_ABS
8
5
Pre-amplified UV lamp intensity
O2_SENSOR
10
6
O2 concentration sensor
SAMPLE_PRESSURE
7
Sample pressure
TEST_INPUT_8
8
Diagnostic test input
REF_4096_MV
9
4.096V reference from MAX6241
10
Sample flow rate
10
Vacuum pressure
SAMPLE_FLOW
VACUUM_PRESSURE
CO2_SENSOR
11
2
11
CO2 concentration sensor
12–13
Spare (thermocouple input?)
14
DAC MUX
REF_GND
15
Ground reference
BOX_TEMP
0
Internal box temperature
RCELL_TEMP
1
Reaction cell temperature
IZS_TEMP
2
IZS temperature
3
Spare
4
O2 sensor cell temperature
TEMP_INPUT_5
5
Diagnostic temperature input
TEMP_INPUT_6
6
Diagnostic temperature input
7
Spare
Rear board temperature MUX analog inputs
O2_CELL_TEMP
10
Rear board DAC MUX analog inputs
DAC_CHAN_1
0
DAC channel 0 loopback
DAC_CHAN_2
1
DAC channel 1 loopback
DAC_CHAN_3
2
DAC channel 2 loopback
DAC_CHAN_4
3
DAC channel 3 loopback
Rear board analog outputs
CONC_OUT_1,
0
DATA_OUT_1
Data output #1
CONC_OUT_2,
1
DATA_OUT_2
CONC_OUT_3
Concentration output #1 (SO2, range #1),
Concentration output #2 (SO2, range #2),
Data output #2
10,
2
DATA_OUT_3
TEST_OUTPUT,
DATA_OUT_4
06807F DCN7335
Concentration output #3 (CO2 or O2),
Data output #3
3
Test measurement output,
Data output #4
A-19
SIGNAL NAME
BIT OR CHANNEL
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
2
2
I C analog output (AD5321), default I C address 18 hex
LAMP_POWER
5
0
Lamp power (0–5V)
1
Optional.
2
T100H/M100EH.
3
T100U/M100EU.
4
Background concentration compensation option (6400E/6400EH).
5
Engineering firmware only.
6
Low span option.
7
Pressurized IZS option.
8
T100/M100E.
9
MODBUS option.
10
O2 option.
11
CO2 option.
12
Concentration alarm option.
13
High auto range relay option
A-20
06807F DCN7335
APPENDIX A-5: DAS Functions
Table A-5: DAS Trigger Events, Software Version G.4
NAME
Automatic timer expired
EXITZR
Exit zero calibration mode
EXITLS
2, 3
EXITHS
Exit low span calibration mode
Exit high span calibration mode
EXITMP
Exit multi-point calibration mode
EXITBK
5
Exit background calibration mode
EXITO2
10
Exit O2 calibration mode
SLPCHG
Slope and offset recalculated
CO2SLC
11
CO2 slope and offset recalculated
O2SLPC
10
O2 slope and offset recalculated
EXITDG
Exit diagnostic mode
PMTDTW
PMT detector warning
UVLMPW
UV lamp warning
DRKCLW
Dark calibration warning
CONCW1
4
Concentration limit 1 exceeded
CONCW2
4
Concentration limit 2 exceeded
RCTMPW
O2TMPW
IZTMPW
Reaction cell temperature warning
10
1
O2 sensor cell temperature warning
IZS temperature warning
PTEMPW
PMT temperature warning
SFLOWW
Sample flow warning
SPRESW
VPRESW
06807F DCN7335
DESCRIPTION
ATIMER
Sample pressure warning
2
Vacuum pressure warning
BTEMPW
Box temperature warning
HVPSW
High voltage power supply warning
1
T100/M100E.
2
T100H/M100EH.
3
Low span option.
4
Concentration alarm option.
5
Background concentration compensation option (6400E/6400EH).
10
O2 option.
11
CO2 option.
A-21
Table A-6: DAS Parameters
NAME
PMTDET
PHABS
1
DESCRIPTION
UNITS
PMT detector reading
mV
Pre-amplified UV lamp intensity reading
mV
UVDET
UV lamp intensity reading
mV
LAMPR
UV lamp ratio of calibrated intensity
%
DRKPMT
PMT electrical offset
mV
DARKUV
UV lamp electrical offset
mV
SLOPE1
SO2 slope for range #1
—
SLOPE2
SO2 slope for range #2
—
OFSET1
SO2 offset for range #1
mV
SO2 offset for range #2
mV
OFSET2
CO2SLP
11
CO2 slope
—
CO2OFS
11
CO2 offset
%
O2SLPE
10
O2 slope
—
O2OFST
10
O2 offset
%
SO2 concentration for range #1 during zero/span calibration, just before
computing new slope and offset
PPB,
SO2 concentration for range #2 during zero/span calibration, just before
computing new slope and offset
PPB
ZSCNC1
ZSCNC2
PPM
CO2ZSC
11
CO2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing new
slope and offset
%
O2ZSCN
10
O2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before computing new
slope and offset
%
SO2 concentration for range #1
PPB
CONC1
CONC2
SO2 concentration for range #2
PPB
CNCBK1
4
SO2 concentration plus background concentration for range #1
PPB
CNCBK2
4
SO2 concentration plus background concentration for range #2
PPB
BKGND1
4
Background concentration for range #1
PPB
BKGND2
4
Background concentration for range #2
PPB
SO2CR1
12
SO2 concentration for range #1, with O2 correction
PPB
SO2CR2
12
SO2 concentration for range #2, with O2 correction
PPB
CO2CNC
11
CO2 concentration
%
O2CONC
10
O2 concentration
%
Concentration stability #1
PPB
STABIL
3
STABL2
Concentration stability #2
PPB
UV lamp stability
mV
Stray light reading
PPB
Reaction cell temperature
°C
O2 sensor cell temperature
°C
IZS temperature
°C
PMTTMP
PMT temperature
°C
SMPFLW
Sample flow
cc/m
SMPPRS
Sample pressure
“Hg
STABUV
3
STRLGT
RCTEMP
O2TEMP
IZSTMP
A-22
1
10
2
06807F DCN7335
NAME
2
VACUUM
DESCRIPTION
UNITS
Vacuum pressure
“Hg
BOXTMP
Internal box temperature
°C
HVPS
High voltage power supply output
Volts
TEST8
Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_8)
mV
TEMP5
Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5)
°C
TEMP6
Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_6)
°C
REFGND
Ground reference (REF_GND)
mV
RF4096
4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV)
mV
XIN1
13
Channel 1 Analog In
13
Channel 1 Analog In Slope
13
Channel 1 Analog In Offset
XIN1SLPE
XIN1OFST
XIN2
13
Channel 2 Analog In
13
Channel 2 Analog In Slope
13
Channel 2 Analog In Offset
XIN2SLPE
XIN2OFST
XIN3
13
Channel 3 Analog In
13
Channel 3 Analog In Slope
13
Channel 3 Analog In Offset
XIN3SLPE
XIN3OFST
XIN4
13
Channel 4 Analog In
13
Channel 4 Analog In Slope
13
Channel 4 Analog In Offset
XIN4SLPE
XIN4OFST
XIN5
13
Channel 5 Analog In
13
Channel 5 Analog In Slope
13
Channel 5 Analog In Offset
XIN5SLPE
XIN5OFST
XIN6
13
Channel 6 Analog In
13
Channel 6 Analog In Slope
13
Channel 6 Analog In Offset
XIN6SLPE
XIN6OFST
XIN7
13
Channel 7 Analog In
13
Channel 7 Analog In Slope
13
Channel 7 Analog In Offset
XIN7SLPE
XIN7OFST
XIN8
13
Channel 8 Analog In
13
Channel 8 Analog In Slope
13
Channel 8 Analog In Offset
XIN8SLPE
XIN8OFST
3
AGNDDK
AGND reading during dark cycles
mV
AGNDLT
3
AGND reading during light cycles
mV
RF4VDK
3
VREF4096 reading during dark cycles
mV
VREF4096 reading during light cycles
mV
RF4VLT
3
06807F DCN7335
A-23
NAME
DESCRIPTION
1
T100/M100E.
2
T100H/M100EH.
3
T100U/M100EU.
4
Background concentration compensation option (6400E/6400EH).
10
O2 option.
11
CO2 option.
12
SO2 with O2 correction option.
13
Analog In option, T-Series only.
A-24
UNITS
06807F DCN7335
APPENDIX A-6: Terminal Command Designators
Table A-7:
COMMAND
Terminal Command Designators
ADDITIONAL COMMAND SYNTAX
? [ID]
LOGON [ID]
Display help screen and this list of commands
password
LOGOFF [ID]
T [ID]
W [ID]
C [ID]
D [ID]
V [ID]
DESCRIPTION
Establish connection to instrument
Terminate connection to instrument
SET ALL|name|hexmask
Display test(s)
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]
Print test(s) to screen
name
Print single test
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask
Disable test(s)
SET ALL|name|hexmask
Display warning(s)
LIST [ALL|name|hexmask] [NAMES|HEX]
Print warning(s)
name
Clear single warning
CLEAR ALL|name|hexmask
Clear warning(s)
ZERO|LOWSPAN|SPAN [1|2]
Enter calibration mode
ASEQ number
Execute automatic sequence
COMPUTE ZERO|SPAN
Compute new slope/offset
EXIT
Exit calibration mode
ABORT
Abort calibration sequence
LIST
Print all I/O signals
name[=value]
Examine or set I/O signal
LIST NAMES
Print names of all diagnostic tests
ENTER name
Execute diagnostic test
EXIT
Exit diagnostic test
RESET [DATA] [CONFIG] [exitcode]
Reset instrument
PRINT ["name"] [SCRIPT]
Print DAS configuration
RECORDS ["name"]
Print number of DAS records
REPORT ["name"] [RECORDS=number]
[FROM=<start date>][TO=<end
date>][VERBOSE|COMPACT|HEX] (Print
DAS records)(date format:
MM/DD/YYYY(or YY) [HH:MM:SS]
Print DAS records
CANCEL
Halt printing DAS records
LIST
Print setup variables
name[=value [warn_low [warn_high]]]
Modify variable
name="value"
Modify enumerated variable
CONFIG
Print instrument configuration
MAINT ON|OFF
Enter/exit maintenance mode
MODE
Print current instrument mode
DASBEGIN [<data channel definitions>]
DASEND
Upload DAS configuration
CHANNELBEGIN propertylist CHANNELEND
Upload single DAS channel
CHANNELDELETE ["name"]
Delete DAS channels
06807F DCN7335
A-25
The command syntax follows the command type, separated by a space character. Strings in
[brackets] are optional designators. The following key assignments also apply.
TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENTS
ESC
CR (ENTER)
Ctrl-C
Abort line
Execute command
Switch to computer mode
COMPUTER MODE KEY ASSIGNMENTS
LF (line feed)
Ctrl-T
A-26
Execute command
Switch to terminal mode
06807F DCN7335
APPENDIX A-7: MODBUS Register Map
MODBUS
Register Address
(dec., 0-based)
Description
Units
MODBUS Floating Point Input Registers
(32-bit IEEE 754 format; read in high-word, low-word order; read-only)
0
PMT detector reading
mV
2
UV lamp intensity reading
mV
4
UV lamp ratio of calibrated intensity
%
6
PMT electrical offset
mV
8
UV lamp electrical offset
mV
10
SO2 slope for range #1
—
12
SO2 slope for range #2
—
14
SO2 offset for range #1
mV
16
SO2 offset for range #2
mV
18
SO2 concentration for range #1 during zero/span
calibration, just before computing new slope and offset
PPB,
20
SO2 concentration for range #2 during zero/span
calibration, just before computing new slope and offset
PPB
22
SO2 concentration for range #1
PPB
24
SO2 concentration for range #2
PPB
26
Concentration stability
PPB
28
Stray light reading
PPB
30
Reaction cell temperature
°C
32
PMT temperature
°C
34
Sample pressure
“Hg
36
Internal box temperature
°C
38
High voltage power supply output
Volts
40
Diagnostic test input (TEST_INPUT_8)
mV
42
Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_5)
°C
44
Diagnostic temperature input (TEMP_INPUT_6)
°C
46
Ground reference (REF_GND)
mV
48
4096 mV reference (REF_4096_MV)
mV
50
PPM 2
Sample flow
cc/m
52
1
IZS temperature
°C
54
2
Vacuum pressure
“Hg
56
1
Pre-amplified UV lamp intensity reading
mV
100
10
O2 concentration
%
102
10
O2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before
computing new slope and offset
%
104
10
O2 slope
—
106
10
O2 offset
%
108
10
O2 sensor cell temperature
°C
06807F DCN7335
A-27
MODBUS
Register Address
(dec., 0-based)
Description
Units
110 12
SO2 concentration for range #1, with O2 correction
PPB
112
12
SO2 concentration for range #2, with O2 correction
PPB
130
14
External analog input 1 value
Volts
132
14
External analog input 1 slope
eng unit /V
134
14
External analog input 1 offset
eng unit
136
14
External analog input 2 value
Volts
138
14
External analog input 2 slope
eng unit /V
140
14
External analog input 2 offset
eng unit
142
14
External analog input 3 value
Volts
144
14
External analog input 3 slope
eng unit /V
146
14
External analog input 3 offset
eng unit
148
14
External analog input 4 value
Volts
150
14
External analog input 4 slope
eng unit /V
152 14
External analog input 4 offset
eng unit
154 14
External analog input 5 value
Volts
156
14
External analog input 5 slope
eng unit /V
158
14
External analog input 5 offset
eng unit
160
14
External analog input 6 value
Volts
162
14
External analog input 6 slope
eng unit /V
164
14
External analog input 6 offset
eng unit
166
14
External analog input 7 value
Volts
168
14
External analog input 7 slope
eng unit /V
170
14
External analog input 7 offset
eng unit
172
14
External analog input 8 value
Volts
174
14
External analog input 8 slope
eng unit /V
176
14
External analog input 8 offset
eng unit
200
11
CO2 concentration
%
202
11
CO2 concentration during zero/span calibration, just before
computing new slope and offset
%
204
11
CO2 slope
—
206
11
CO2 offset
%
MODBUS Floating Point Holding Registers
(32-bit IEEE 754 format; read/write in high-word, low-word order; read/write)
0
2
Maps to SO2_SPAN1 variable; target conc. for range #1
Conc. units
Maps to SO2_SPAN2 variable; target conc. for range #2
Conc. units
100
10
Maps to O2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable
%
200
11
Maps to CO2_TARG_SPAN_CONC variable
%
A-28
06807F DCN7335
MODBUS
Register Address
(dec., 0-based)
Description
Units
MODBUS Discrete Input Registers
(single-bit; read-only)
0
PMT detector warning
1
UV detector warning
2
Dark calibration warning
3
Box temperature warning
4
PMT temperature warning
5
Reaction cell temperature warning
6
Sample pressure warning
7
HVPS warning
8
System reset warning
9
Rear board communication warning
10
Relay board communication warning
11
Front panel communication warning
12
Analog calibration warning
13
Dynamic zero warning
14
Dynamic span warning
15
Invalid concentration
16
In zero calibration mode
17
In span calibration mode
18
In multi-point calibration mode
19
System is OK (same meaning as SYSTEM_OK I/O signal)
20
Sample flow warning
21
1
IZS temperature warning
22
2
In low span calibration mode
23
2
Vacuum pressure warning
24
3
SO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
25
3
SO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded
26
In Hessen manual mode
100
10
In O2 calibration mode
101
10
O2 cell temperature warning
102
10+3
O2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
103
10+3
O2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded
200
11
In CO2 calibration mode
201
11+3
CO2 concentration alarm limit #1 exceeded
202
11+3
CO2 concentration alarm limit #2 exceeded
06807F DCN7335
A-29
MODBUS
Register Address
(dec., 0-based)
Description
Units
MODBUS Coil Registers
(single-bit; read/write)
0
Maps to relay output signal 36 (MB_RELAY_36 in signal I/O list)
1
Maps to relay output signal 37 (MB_RELAY_37 in signal I/O list)
2
Maps to relay output signal 38 (MB_RELAY_38 in signal I/O list)
3
Maps to relay output signal 39 (MB_RELAY_39 in signal I/O list)
20
13
Triggers zero calibration of range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)
21
13
Triggers span calibration of range #1 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)
22
13
Triggers zero calibration of range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)
23
13
Triggers span calibration of range #2 (on enters cal.; off exits cal.)
1
M100E.
2
M100EH.
3
Concentration alarm option.
10
O2 option.
11
CO2 option.
12
SO2 with O2 correction option.
13
Set DYN_ZERO or DYN_SPAN variables to ON to enable calculating new slope or offset. Otherwise a
calibration check is performed.
14
External analog input option.
A-30
06807F DCN7335
APPENDIX B - Spare Parts
Note
Note
06807F DCN7335
Use of replacement parts other than those supplied by Teledyne Advanced
Pollution Instrumentation (TAPI) may result in non-compliance with European
standard EN 61010-1.
Due to the dynamic nature of part numbers, please call the factory for
more recent updates to part numbers: +1 858-657-9800 or toll free 800-324-5190.
B-1
This page intentionally left blank.
B-2
06807F DCN7335
T100 Spare Parts List
PN 06845A DCN5809 08/18/2010
1 of 3 page(s)
Part Number
000940100
000940400
000940800
002690000
002700000
002720000
003290000
005960000
009690000
009690100
011630000
012720100
013140000
013210000
013390000
013400000
013420000
013570000
014080100
014400100
014750000
016290000
016300700
037860000
040010000
040030100
041620100
041800400
041920000
042410200
043420000
043570000
045230200
046250000
046260000
048830000
049310100
050510200
050610100
050610200
050610300
050610400
050630100
051990000
06807F DCN7335
Description
ORIFICE, 3 MIL, IZS
CD, ORIFICE, .004 BLUE
ORIFICE, 012 MIL, RXCELL
LENS, UV
LENS, PMT
FILTER, PMT OPTICAL, 330 NM
ASSY, THERMISTOR
AKIT, EXP, 6LBS ACT CHARCOAL (2 BT=1)
AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL6 100=1) 47mm
AKIT, TFE FLTR ELEM (FL6, 30=1) 47mm
HVPS INSULATOR GASKET (KB)
OPTION, NOx OPTICAL FILTER *
ASSY, COOLER FAN (NOX/SOX)
ASSY, VACUUM MANIFOLD
ASSY, KICKER
CD, PMT, SO2, (KB)
ASSY, ROTARY SOLENOID
ASSY, THERMISTOR (COOLER)
ASSY, HVPS, SOX/NOX
OPTION, ZERO AIR SCRUBBER
AKIT, EXP KIT, IZS
WINDOW, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM (KB)
ASSY, SAMPLE FILTER, 47MM, ANG BKT
ORING, TFE RETAINER, SAMPLE FILTER
ASSY, FAN REAR PANEL
PCA, FLOW/PRESSURE
ASSY, SO2 SENSOR (KB)
PCA, PMT PREAMP, VR
ASSY, THERMISTOR
ASSY, PUMP, INT, E SERIES
ASSY, HEATER/THERM, O2 SEN
AKIT, EXPENDABLES
PCA, RELAY CARD W/RELAYS, E SERIES, S/N'S >455
ASSY, RXCELL HEATER/FUSE
ASSY, THERMISTOR, RXCELL (KB)
AKIT, EXP KIT, EXHAUST CLNSR, SILCA GEL
PCA, TEC CONTROL, E SERIES
PUMP, INT, 115/240V * (KB)
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 115V/60Hz
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 115V/50Hz
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 220-240V/50Hz
CONFIGURATION PLUGS, 220-240V/60Hz
PCA, M100E UV REF DETECTOR
ASSY, SCRUBBER, INLINE EXHAUST, DISPOS
B-3
T100 Spare Parts List
PN 06845A DCN5809 08/18/2010
2 of 3 page(s)
Part Number
052660000
055100200
055560000
055560100
058021100
061930000
062420200
066970000
067240000
067300000
067300100
067300200
067900000
068070000
068220100
068810000
069500000
072150000
CN0000073
CN0000458
CN0000520
FL0000001
FL0000003
FM0000004
HW0000005
HW0000020
HW0000030
HW0000031
HW0000036
HW0000101
HW0000453
HW0000685
KIT000093
KIT000095
KIT000207
KIT000219
KIT000236
KIT000253
KIT000254
OP0000030
OP0000031
OR0000001
OR0000004
OR0000006
OR0000007
OR0000015
B-4
Description
ASSY, HEATER/THERMISTOR (IZS)
ASSY, OPTION, PUMP, 240V *
ASSY, VALVE, VA59 W/DIODE, 5" LEADS
ASSY, VALVE, VA59 W/DIODE, 9" LEADS
PCA,E-SERIES MOTHERBD, GEN 5 ICOP (ACCEPTS ACROSSER OR ICOP CPU)
PCA, UV LAMP DRIVER, GEN-2 43mA *
PCA, SER INTRFACE, ICOP CPU, E- (OPTION) (USE WITH ICOP CPU 062870000)
PCA, INTRF. LCD TOUCH SCRN, F/P
CPU, PC-104, VSX-6154E, ICOP *
PCA, AUX-I/O BD, ETHERNET, ANALOG & USB
PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET
PCA, AUX-I/O BOARD, ETHERNET & USB
LCD MODULE, W/TOUCHSCREEN
MANUAL, OPERATORS, T100
DOM, w/SOFTWARE, T100 *
PCA, LVDS TRANSMITTER BOARD
PCA, SERIAL & VIDEO INTERFACE BOARD
ASSY. TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL MODULE
POWER ENTRY, 120/60 (KB)
CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 12 PIN
CONNECTOR, REAR PANEL, 10 PIN
FILTER, FLOW CONTROL
FILTER, DFU (KB)
FLOWMETER (KB)
FOOT, CHASSIS
SPRING, FLOW CONTROL
ISOLATOR
FERRULE, SHOCKMOUNT
TFE TAPE, 1/4" (48 FT/ROLL)
ISOLATOR
SUPPORT, CIRCUIT BD, 3/16" ICOP
LATCH, MAGNETIC, FRONT PANEL
AKIT, REPLCMNT(3187)214NM FLTR (BF)
AKIT, REPLACEMENT COOLER
KIT, RELAY RETROFIT
AKIT, 4-20MA CURRENT OUTPUT
KIT, UV LAMP, w/ADAPTER (BIR)
ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS37
ASSY & TEST, SPARE PS38
OXYGEN TRANSDUCER, PARAMAGNETIC
WINDOW, QUARTZ, REF DETECTOR
ORING, FLOW CONTROL/IZS
ORING, OPTIC/CELL, CELL/TRAP
ORING, CELL/PMT
ORING, PMT/BARREL/CELL
ORING, PMT FILTER
06807F DCN7335
T100 Spare Parts List
PN 06845A DCN5809 08/18/2010
3 of 3 page(s)
Part Number
OR0000016
OR0000025
OR0000027
OR0000039
OR0000046
OR0000083
OR0000084
OR0000094
PU0000022
RL0000015
SW0000006
SW0000025
SW0000059
WR0000008
06807F DCN7335
Description
ORING, UV LENS
ORING, ZERO AIR SCRUBBER
ORING, COLD BLOCK/PMT HOUSING & HEATSINK
ORING, QUARTZ WINDOW/REF DETECTOR
ORING, PERMEATION OVEN
ORING, PMT SIGNAL & OPTIC LED
ORING, UV FILTER
ORING, SAMPLE FILTER
KIT, PUMP REBUILD
RELAY, DPDT, (KB)
SWITCH, THERMAL, 60 C
SWITCH, POWER, CIRC BREAK, VDE/CE *
PRESSURE SENSOR, 0-15 PSIA, ALL SEN
POWER CORD, 10A(KB)
B-5
IZS, AKIT, EXPENDABLES
T100/M100E
(Reference 01475A)
Part Number
014750000
Part Number
005960000
006900000
FL0000001
FL0000003
HW0000020
OR0000001
OR0000046
B-6
Description
AKIT, EXP KIT, M100A/M100E, IZS
Description
AKIT, EXPEND, 6LBS ACT CHARCOAL
RETAINER PAD CHARCOAL, SMALL, 1-3/4"
FILTER, SS
FILTER, DFU (KB)
SPRING
ORING, 2-006VT
ORING, 2-019V
06807F DCN7335
Appendix C
Warranty/Repair
Questionnaire
T100, M100E
(04796G DCN7335)
CUSTOMER: _________________________________ PHONE: __________________________________________________
CONTACT NAME: ____________________________ FAX NO. __________________________________________________
SITE ADDRESS: _________________________________________________________________________________________
MODEL SERIAL NO.: ______________________ FIRMWARE REVISION: ______________________________________
1.
ARE THERE ANY FAILURE MESSAGES? _______________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING TABLE: (NOTE: DEPENDING ON OPTIONS INSTALLED, NOT ALL TEST
PARAMETERS BELOW WILL BE AVAILABLE IN YOUR INSTRUMENT)
*IF OPTION IS INSTALLED
Parameter
Recorded Value
RANGE
STABIL
SAMP PRESS
SAMPLE FLOW
PMT SIGNAL WITH
ZERO AIR
PMT SIGNAL AT
SPAN GAS CONC
NORM PMT AT
SPAN GAS CONC
UV LAMP
LAMP RATIO
STR. LGT
DARK PMT
DARK LAMP
SLOPE
OFFSET
HVPS
RCELL TEMP
BOX TEMP
PMT TEMP
IZS TEMP*
ETEST
OTEST
Acceptable Value
PPB/PPM
PPB
IN-HG-A
cm3/MIN
mV
50 PPB to 20 PPM
1 PPB WITH ZERO AIR
~ 2” < AMBIENT
650 ± 10%
-20 TO 150 mV
mV
PPB/PPM
mV
PPB/PPM
mV
mV
PPB
mV
mV
mV
V
ºC
ºC
ºC
ºC
mV
mV
0-5000 mV
0-20000 PPB
0-5000 mV
0-20000 PPB
1000 TO 4800 mV
30 TO 120%
≤ 100 PPB/ ZERO AIR
-50 TO 200 mV
-50 TO 200 mV
1.0 ± 0.3
< 250 mV
≈ 400 – 900
50ºC ± 1
AMBIENT + ~ 5
7ºC ± 2º CONSTANT
50ºC ± 1
2000 mV ± 1000
2000 mV ± 1000
mV
mV
4096mv±2mv and Must be Stable
0± 0.5 and Must be Stable
Values are in the Signal I/O
REF_4096_MV
REF_GND
3.
WHAT IS THE SAMPLE FLOW & SAMPLE PRESSURE W/SAMPLE INLET ON REAR OF MACHINE CAPPED?
SAMPLE FLOW -
CC
SAMPLE PRESS -
IN-HG-A
TELEDYNE API TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Email: sda_techsupport@teledyne.com
PHONE: +1 (858) 657-9800
TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190
FAX: +1 (858) 657-9816
06807F DCN7335
C-1
Appendix C
Warranty/Repair
Questionnaire
T100, M100E
(04796G DCN7335)
4.
WHAT ARE THE FAILURE SYMPTOMS? ______________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________________________
5.
IF POSSIBLE, PLEASE INCLUDE A PORTION OF A STRIP CHART PERTAINING TO THE PROBLEM. CIRCLE
PERTINENT DATA.
THANK YOU FOR PROVIDING THIS INFORMATION. YOUR ASSISTANCE ENABLES TELEDYNE API TO RESPOND
FASTER TO THE PROBLEM THAT YOU ARE ENCOUNTERING.
C-2
TELEDYNE API TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Email: sda_techsupport@teledyne.com
PHONE: +1 (858) 657-9800
TOLL FREE: (800) 324-5190
FAX: +1 (858) 657-9816
06807F DCN7335
Appendix D - Interconnect Diagram
06807F DCN7335
D-1